Hennepin County State of Minnesota 1800 Chicago Ave. Triage Fit Up

Hennepin County State of Minnesota

1800 Chicago Ave. Triage Fit Up Hennepin County Contract No. 5033A9 Hennepin County Project Number 1007737 December 10, 2019 Book 2 (Divisions 21 – 28)

Project Number: 1007737 Contract Number: 5033A9 Commission Number: 17366.3HCP Date: December 10, 2019

Mechanical Engineer

John T. Costello, PE, LEED AP BD+C, BEMP, WELL AP Principal, Client Executive

Electrical Engineer

Associate/Senior Electrical Engineer

DIVISIONS 21, 22 AND 23

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE

21 0500 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 21 1000 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 22 0500 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 23 0500 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0513 ELECTRICAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0514 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVE - MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 0519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0593 ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION 23 0716 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0913 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC 230923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2114 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2213 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 2214 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING SPECIALTIES 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3413 HVAC FANS 23 3600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County – 1 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 7413 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 8101 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 23 8216 AIR COILS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County – 2 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION SECTION TITLE PAGES THRU

26 ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 General Requirements 26 05 00 - 26 05 05 Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 26 05 05 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 26 05 19 Cables 26 05 19 - 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26 - 26 05 33 Raceway & Boxes 26 05 33 - 26 05 38 Wire Basket Cable Trays 26 05 38 - 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical 26 05 53 - 26 09 26 Lighting Control Systems 26 09 26 - 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 16 - 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 26 28 12 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers 26 28 12 - 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 13 - 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13 - 26 51 00 Lighting 26 51 00 -

28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 01 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 28 31 01 -

END TABLE OF CONTENTS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County – 1 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section No. Title

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 27 13 13 Communications for Copper Backbone Cabling 27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 27 51 19 Sound Masking Systems 27 51 23 Intercom System

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 05 00 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security 28 10 03 Access Control System Integration 28 10 04 Access Control Devices and Cabling 28 21 00 Video Surveillance 28 23 00 Video Management System 28 26 16 Security Alarm Systems

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 00 00 00 Table of Contents Intake/Triage – Fit Up Package SECTION 210500

FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies the basic materials, methods and workmanship requirements for Division 21 and shall apply to all Division 21 specifications and Drawings.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, shall also apply to this Section.

B. Division 21 Specification Sections

C. Section 221005 – Plumbing Piping

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The Work to be accomplished under this specification, the accompanying Division 21 specification Sections, and the accompanying Drawings; includes providing all labor, materials, equipment, necessary for the proper completion of all Work by Division 21.

B. The omission of express reference to any parts or services necessary for, or reasonably incidental to, a complete and operational installation shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such parts or services.

1.04 DEMOLTION

A. Division 21 Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition of fire protection system components noted in the contract Documents. Refer to Part 3 for additional demolition requirements.

1.05 INSPECTION OF SITE:

A. Before submitting a proposal on the Work outlined in this specification and accompanying Drawings, each bidder shall examine the site and confirm the means of making connections to services and shall become familiar with all the existing conditions and limitations.

B. Additional compensation shall not be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding as to the amount of Work involved or his lack of knowledge of any site conditions that may affect his Work when such information is provided in the contract Documents and/or is readily visible on site.

1.06 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS

A. All required fees, permits, plan review submittals, and inspections for Division 21 work shall be obtained and/or arranged for by the Division 21 Contractor.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 1 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

B. Regular inspections shall be arranged by the Contractor as required by any and all regulations. All charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations or review of plans and specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.

C. Refer to additional Division 21 specification Sections for inspection documentation requirements.

1.07 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the specifications, applicable building and fire codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations, and the Contract Documents.

B. In case of a difference between any of the following: specifications, applicable building and fire codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations, and/or the Contract Documents; the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any such difference.

C. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any Work that does not comply with the requirements of the specifications, applicable building and fire codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations, or the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies.

1.08 DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings are to scale as noted but the Contractor shall refer to Architectural and Structural Drawings for exact locations of partitions, walls, beams, shafts, equipment, etc. Dimensional information noted on Architectural and Structural Drawings shall take precedence over the Division 21 Drawings.

B. Drawings of fire protection systems are diagrammatic and are intended to indicate approximate location and/or direction, and approximate arrangement of the Work, but not necessarily the exact detail or exact arrangement of construction.

C. The Division 21 Contractor shall consult all Project Drawings to confirm, finishes, locations of ceilings, structural members, pipes, ducts, recessed lighting fixtures, conduits, etc. This coordination shall occur prior to installation.

D. If it is found that a more convenient, suitable or workable arrangement would result by altering the arrangement indicated on the Drawings, the Architect/Engineer may require any or all Contractors to modify the location or arrangement of their Work. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Architect/Engineer.

E. Discrepancies discovered either before or after Work has started, shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer immediately and the Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require minor changes in the Work of any Contractor in order to eliminate such discrepancies with no change in contract cost. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Architect/Engineer.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 2 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

F. The Division 21 Contractor shall coordinate their installation with all other trades and shall leave adequate room for the installation of materials and equipment by other Contractors where space is limited. The Division 21 Contractor shall be cautioned that in certain instances, space may be limited to the extent that there may be only one arrangement of equipment or material which may be feasible.

G. The plans and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either one shall be as binding as if called for in both.

H. Where a disagreement exists between the plans and specifications or within the plans or specifications, the item or arrangement of better quality or greater quantity which results in a higher overall bid cost shall be included in the bid.

1.09 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to symbols and abbreviations on Drawings. Other symbols are in common usage but if uncertainty exists regarding any plan symbols or abbreviations it shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.

B. Within the contract Documents, the word “Provide” shall be considered to be equivalent to the phrase “Furnish and Install”.

C. Words used in the present tense include the future; words stated in the masculine gender include the feminine and neuter; the singular number includes the plural and the plural, the singular.

1.10 IMPAIRMENT OF EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. The Division 21 Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all fire protection system impairments and the extent of required fire watch with the owner and the local fire department. Any impairment shall be in compliance with the locally adopted fire code.

B. The Division 21 Contractor shall coordinate the phasing of the Work such that any required impairment duration is kept to a minimum.

C. Any required fire watch staffing not explicitly stated in writing by the owner as provided by the owner shall be provided by the Division 21 Contractor.

D. After service has been restored following an interruption, Division 21 shall inspect all areas affected by the interruption and shall be responsible for returning the fire protection systems to the same operating condition which existed prior to the interruption.

1.11 USE OF FACILITY

A. The normal use of the facility shall not be disturbed, except within the immediate construction area. All walks, driveways and entrances shall be kept clear and free of all Contractor's equipment, material and debris at all times.

1.12 CLEANUP

A. Division 21 shall daily clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc. resulting from their Work or operations, leaving the job and the equipment furnished under any or all contracts in a clean condition.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 3 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

1.13 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the design and installation of fire protection pipe, sprinklers, etc. with other construction, including coordination with light fixtures, speakers, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. Coordinate Work with all other trades and the existing building conditions.

B. Unless otherwise indicated in the Construction Documents, the Division 21 Contractor shall remove and reinstall any electrical equipment, mechanical equipment, and ceilings; if so necessary; to install the required fire protection systems.

C. The Division 21 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating various features of the fire protection design, as depicted throughout this specification. Examples include sprinkler types in various areas of the building (i.e. recessed pendent, concealed, etc.), Fire Department Connection, exterior alarm bell/horn-strobe, etc.

D. When a fire pump and on site water storage tank is provided, The Division 21 Contractor shall be responsible to determine the hydraulic performance characteristics of the designed sprinkler system and confirm the fire pump and tank sizing together satisfy the pressure, flow, and duration requirements of the fire sprinkler system.

1.14 WARRANTIES

A. Unless otherwise described under the Conditions of the Contract, the Division 21 Contractor shall warranty this installation for a minimum of 1-year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Furnish manufacturer’s warranty information for fire suppression materials.

1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, AND PROJECT DOCUMENTATION

A. Shop Drawings to be submitted shall be as noted in the General Conditions.

B. Refer to additional Division 21 Sections for Project documentation requirements for specific systems.

C. Materials installed by the Division 21 Contractor prior to final Shop Drawing acceptance shall be subject to removal and replacement. Such removal and replacement, if deemed necessary by the Engineer, shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

D. Materials installed by the Division 21 Contractor shall be as per the submitted and accepted product data Shop Drawings. Such Shop Drawings shall be in compliance with these specifications. Materials installed which differ from the accepted product data Shop Drawing submittals shall be subject to removal and replacement at the Contractor’s expense.

1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be as noted in the General Conditions.

B. Refer to additional Division 21 Sections for Project documentation requirements for specific systems.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 4 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Floor sleeves shall be uncoated or galvanized steel pipe not less than Schedule 40.

B. Sleeves in rated walls shall be as required for U. L. listing.

C. Temporary sleeves in poured concrete walls or floors shall be poly-sleeve with nailing flange.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION - PIPE

A. Pipes. Labels shall describe the contents and direction of flow. Labels shall be secured to pipe with full self-adhesive banding around pipe at each end of label. Labels shall be a red background with white letters and shall read: “FIRE PROTECTION WATER”.

B. Pipe label sizes shall comply with the following table:

Band Letter Pipe Size Width Height 1/2" - 1-1/4" 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" - 2" 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" - 6" 12" 1-1/4" 8" - 10" 24" 2-1/2" 10" & UP 32" 3-1/2"

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Seton 2. Brady 3. Marking Services

2.03 IDENTIFICATION - VALVES

A. Colored plastic with 1/2" white letters such as Bakelite attached with a brass chain.

B. Control valves shall be tagged as to service and normal position.

C. Other valves tagged as to service and function.

D. Control valve tags shall have black background, other valves tags shall have colors corresponding to service described above.

E. Valve list shall be included into operation and maintenance manuals.

2.04 ACCESS PANELS IN WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Division 21 shall be responsible to provide all access panels, not otherwise provided by Division 01, which are necessary for required access to items provided under the Division 21 contract.

B. Fire rated access panels shall be provided in fire rated construction.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 5 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

C. Access panels shall be as manufactured by Milcor or approved equal and of type that is compatible with construction and finish of the wall and/or ceiling.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED CONSTRUCTION.

A. All pipe penetrations through fire rated construction shall be made with U.L. listed fire penetration assemblies and shall comply with Division 07 - Firestopping.

B. Refer to Architectural Drawings locations of fire rated construction. In addition, and at a minimum for determining pipe sleeve and sealing requirements, pipe penetrations at the following locations shall be considered to be fire rated construction unless directed otherwise by the Architect of Record: 1. All floors separating more than one level of a building. 2. Walls adjoining enclosed stairs, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and storage rooms. 3. Penetrations into shafts joining more than one floor.

3.02 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for all piping as follows: 1. Precast slabs 2. Exposed finished areas 3. Fire rated or acoustical walls when required for UL listed assembly 4. Fire rated floors or ceilings when required for UL listed assembly 5. CMU walls

B. Sleeves shall be a minimum of 1” greater in inside diameter than piping passing through sleeve.

C. Fabricate all pipe sleeves of new material, cut square and reamed.

D. All sleeves through walls shall extend full thickness of wall and shall be cut flush with finished surfaces.

E. Pack space between all sleeve and pipes.

F. Sleeves through floor slabs for exposed piping shall extend 1/2" above finished floor. Sleeves shall extend 4” above the floor in mechanical penthouses, dishwashing areas, kitchens, server areas, and all other wet areas. Where concealed, set sleeves through floor and flush with floor. Concealed piping shall be defined as piping in walls, chases and similar locations. All sleeves through existing floor slabs shall be bonded to the slab with an epoxy bonding material.

G. In locating and setting sleeves, this Contractor is to leave a minimum of 4" between sleeves in rows or clusters.

H. Prior to installation of sleeves, prepare mock-up samples of each pipe sleeve arrangement to be installed.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. All piping in unfinished, accessible areas shall be identified every 50 feet, both sides of wall or floor penetration and at every change of direction as to type of service and direction of flow.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 6 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

B. All equipment furnished shall be labeled.

3.04 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING ESCUTCHEON PLATES

A. Where uncovered, exposed pipes pass through walls or floors, they shall be fitted with wall or floor plates.

B. Escutcheon plates shall be set tight against wall or floor.

3.05 DEMOLITION:

A. Demolition Work shall comply with the construction sequence schedule.

B. The Division 21 Contractor shall include all temporary connections necessary to permit the Owner to occupy areas of the building during the various construction phases.

C. The Division 21 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation to prevent disruption to the Owner and minimize the "downtime." The Architect/Owner's approval shall be sought prior to all cut-off of services.

D. The Division 21 Contractor shall remove existing Work shown, specified or necessary for completion of his Work. Owner shall have the option of the retaining any or all items of material removed under this contract. Items or materials not retained by Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises.

E. The Division 21 Contractor shall verify the extent of the remodeling Work and any details not clear shall be referred to the Architect/Engineer for clarification prior to commencing demolition Work.

F. No fire protection items scheduled for demolition may be abandoned in place but rather shall be removed and disposed of off-site, unless specifically noted on the plans.

G. Use of Owner's dumpsters for the disposition of any type of construction debris is not allowed.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The Division 21 Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching necessary in order to perform their Work unless such Work has been delegated to the General Contractor. However, special permission shall be obtained from the Architect/Engineer before cutting structural members or finished material.

B. All patching shall be performed in such manner as to leave no visible trace and to return the part affected to the condition of undisturbed Work. Patching Work shall be performed by persons experienced, skilled and licensed for the particular type of Work involved. Inferior Work will not be accepted.

C. Pipe penetrations through new or existing floors and walls, regardless of type of construction, shall be done by rotary drill, wet or dry method. Use of hand, electric, or pneumatic impact tools is not acceptable. The Division 21 Contractor shall contain water and dust to avoid damage to adjacent finishes, furniture and equipment.

D. The Division 21 Contractor shall provide additional selective demolition not shown on the Drawings as required for installation of new building elements and systems.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 7 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

E. Pavements, sidewalks, roads and curbs shall be cut, patched, repaired and replaced as required to permit the installation of the Work of Division 21. Such cutting, patching, repairing and replacing shall be the responsibility of, and paid for by, Division 21.

F. The Division 21 Contractor shall bear the expense of all cutting, patching, repairing, or replacing of the Work of other trades required because of fault, error, tardiness, or damage done by Division 21.

3.07 HOLES THROUGH MASONRY AND CONCRETE

A. Division 21 shall provide all holes and openings required for their Work unless such holes and openings are shown to be provided on the architectural or structural Drawings. Pay particular attention to openings required in pre-cast, pre-stressed, or post-tensioned slabs.

B. Division 21 shall be responsible for providing and disposing of water they use in the core drilling operation. Such Work shall be scheduled and other trades coordinated so that damage will not result from the use of water.

3.08 PAINTING

A. Painting shall comply with the requirements of Division 9.

3.09 ACCESS PANELS IN WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Division 21 shall be responsible to provide all access panels, not otherwise provided by Division 01, which are necessary to provided required access to items provided under the Division 21 contract.

B. Access panels shall be provided at the following locations: 1. Access shall be provided to any type of valve or component that requires adjustment, frequent replacement, or visual inspection. 2. Division 21 shall consult with Division 01 to coordinate the location of each access panel. 3. Generally, access panels are not required when a lay-in-ceiling is installed. However, depending on the type of occupancy, the Engineer may require that access areas be identified. 4. Comply with Division 08.

3.10 FIRE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. Division 21 shall exercise extreme care to maintain and exercise adequate fire safety precautions throughout the Work. This shall include providing sufficient firefighting devices, watchmen, standby helpers or other precautions during construction, in use of temporary heat, welding, brazing, sweating, testing or other phase of Work.

B. At all times, access shall be maintained for fire department trucks to the building.

C. All welding, brazing, cutting and sweating operations performed in the vicinity of or accessible to combustible materials, shall be adequately protected to make certain that sparks or hot slag does not reach the combustible material and start a fire.

D. All glass, glazed materials and other finish, in the vicinity of welding, brazing and cutting, shall be masked by the Contractor performing the welding Work.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 8 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

E. When necessary to do cutting, welding, brazing, sweating and similar Work in the vicinity of wood, in shafts or in the vicinity of any combustible material (and the combustible material cannot be removed), the materials shall be adequately protected with fire retardant blankets or similar approved coverings.

3.11 TESTS

A. All damage to equipment occasioned by improper or ill-timed operation or testing shall be made good at the Contractor's own expense, before final inspection and acceptance.

B. Refer to additional Division 21 Sections for testing requirements for specific systems.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 9 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 0500 – 10 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS

SECTION 211000

WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water based fire protection systems and equipment: 1. Fire Protection Piping, Fittings and Hangers 2. Fire Protection Valves 3. Air Compressors 4. Dry Valves 5. Water Flow Alarm Switches 6. Sprinklers 7. Pressure Gauges

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Division 07 Sections for materials and methods for sealing pipes penetrations through exterior and foundation walls, and fire rated construction.

C. Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets and fire extinguishers.

D. Division 26 Sections for electrical power wiring.

E. Division 28 Sections for fire alarm system connections to water flow indicators, pressure switches, supervisory switches, alarm devices, and control panels for fire protection systems.

F. Section 210500 – Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods.

G. Section 212200 – Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems.

H. Section 213000 – Fire Pumps.

I. Section 221005 – Plumbing Piping.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME B1.2 – Gauges and Gauging for Unified Inch Screw Threads; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1983 (R2007).

B. ASME B1.12– Class 5 Interference-Fit Thread; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1987 (R2013).

C. ASME B16.1 – Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2015.

D. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 1 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

E. ASME B16.4 – Gray Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.

F. ASME B16.5 – Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.

G. ASME B16.9 – Factory-Made Wrought Butt-welding Fittings; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012.

H. ASME B16.11 – Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.

I. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012.

J. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).

K. ASME B16.25 – Butt-welding Ends; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012.

L. ASME B18.2.1 – Bolts: Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head, Screws: Hex, heavy hex, hex flange, lobed head, and lag (inch series) – 2012.

M. ASME B1.20.1 – Inside thread conical, outside thread conical – 2013.

N. ASME B31.1 – Power Piping; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2016.

O. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; American Society for Testing and Materials; 2012.

P. ASTM A135 – Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe; American Society for Testing and Materials; 2014.

Q. ASTM A795/A795M – Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2013.

R. ASTM A234/A234M – Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; American Society for Testing and Materials; 2015.

S. ASTM F-442 – Non-metallic piping specification for special listed chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe, 2013.

T. AWWA C-509 – Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water Works Association; 2015.

U. NFPA 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2010.

V. NFPA 25 – Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water Based Fire Protection Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.

W. NFPA 70 (NEC) – National Electric Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2014.

X. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2010.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 2 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

Y. NFPA 291 – Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants; National Fire Protection Association; 2010.

1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Division 21 shall provide the design and subsequent installation of the water based fire protection systems for the building. 1. The building sprinkler system shall be designed and installed in compliance with NFPA 13 (2010) and the 2015 Minnesota State Fire Code (MSFC), Section 903.3.1.1.

B. Requirements for the fire sprinkler systems arise from a variety of sources such as building codes, fire codes, and Owner requirements. As these contract Documents do not reiterate all of the requirements, it is necessary that the Division 21 Contractor shall be thoroughly knowledgeable and experienced with fire sprinkler system installations as the Division 21 Contractor shall comply with all stated contract requirements and all referenced codes, standards and guidelines.

C. The fire protection system installation provided by the Division 21 Contractor shall include all labor and materials obviously necessary; though not specifically mentioned or shown; to provide a fully functional and code-compliant fire sprinkler installation throughout the entire building.

D. All equipment used shall be UL listed for the application for which it is installed.

E. Sprinkler system Installation shall comply with NFPA 13, 2010.

F. Provide a fire sprinkler system that shall meet or exceed City of Minneapolis requirements and conform to applicable State and NFPA Codes and standards and meet manufacturers' criteria and tests. This shall include all City ordinances or policies adopted or enforced by the City.

G. Sprinkler Contractor shall make connection to existing sprinkler piping and provide distribution system as shown on the Drawings.

H. Where demolition Work is indicated on the Drawings, the demolition shall include removal of all piping, fittings, hangers, and equipment in the area indicated. Cap all remaining pipe openings.

I. The Division 21 Contractor shall obtain Architect/Engineer acceptance prior to relocation of any standpipe, riser, valve, flow switch, main or equipment from locations as indicated on these Documents or of any revisions to equipment sizes, or electrical requirements from those listed herein. Division 21 shall advise all affected trades of such relocations and/or revisions.

J. Signal wiring of the supervisory switches, flow switches, pressure switches and alarms shall be by Division 28.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide (3) complete sets of sprinkler shop Drawings to each Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and obtain all required approvals before fabrication and/or installation. Complete shop Drawing submittals shall include: installation Drawings, hydraulic calculations, and materials data submittals.

B. Fabrication and/or installation shall not proceed without notification of final acceptance by the Architect/Engineer for all required shop Drawing submittals.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 3 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

C. Materials installed by the Division 21 Contractor prior to final Shop Drawing acceptance shall be subject to removal and replacement. Such removal and replacement shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Installation Drawings and hydraulic calculation submittals shall be prepared in compliance with NFPA 13 Chapter 22 and shall be signed by a registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer (FPE) or NICET Level IV-certified technician.

F. Installation Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following information: 1. Installing Contractors name, address and telephone number. 2. Project name and address. 3. Site plan indicating the size and location of the water main and water service in relation to the building. Indicate a north arrow on the site plan. 4. Flow test information noting the elevation of the test and flow hydrants. 5. Installation Drawings, drawn to and appropriate scale. Drawings shall note sprinkler locations for each type of sprinkler to be installed and shall include information on sprinkler manufacturer, type, temperature rating, nominal orifice size, sprinkler identification number (SIN), etc. 6. Center to center cut length piping dimensions and nominal pipe sizes. 7. Piping hanger types and locations. 8. Location of all control valves, check valves, drain pipes and test connections, etc. 9. Room number and room name (or use) for each room. 10. Hydraulic calculations for each hazard classification. 11. Hydraulic calculation nodes indicated on the Drawing corresponding to the nodes used in each of the hydraulic calculations. 12. Notation of hydraulic calculation boundaries for each hydraulically calculated area. 13. Hazard classification assignments of each area or room (i.e., Light Hazard, Ordinary Hazard Group 1, Ordinary Hazard Group 2, Extra Hazard Group 1, Extra Hazard Group 2) 14. Ceiling construction type (ACT, Gyp, etc.) 15. Ceiling or deck height elevations. 16. Building cross sections at major building areas. 17. Location of walls and partitions. 18. The volume of each dry pipe sprinkler system (in gallons)

G. Upon receipt of approval from each reviewing authority, forward a copy of approval documentation to Architect/Engineer.

H. Upon receipt all required approvals, submit shop Drawings to Architect/Engineer for final review.

1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Division 21 Contractor shall maintain at the jobsite a set of field installation Drawings upon which the progress of the installation shall be noted. Maintain a record of the installation clearly, neatly, accurately, and promptly as the Work progresses.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 4 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

B. Upon completion of the Project, transpose any changes noted on the field installation Drawings to the CAD shop Drawings to create CAD record Drawings of the fire sprinkler system.

1.07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1.

B. Provide three copies of as-built fire protection Documents prior to final closeout of the Project. As-built documentation shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Title page 2. Table of contents 3. Emergency service guidance 4. Inspection/testing/maintenance requirements from the Minnesota State Fire Code 5. Manufacturer’s literature on all specified equipment and trim 6. A computer disk with the electronic files of the CAD record Drawings 7. Paper printouts of each CAD record Drawing 8. A bound copy of the currently adopted edition of NFPA 25 9. A signed copy of the Contractor’s Standpipe Material and Test Certificate as described in NFPA 14, 2010, Chapter 11 10. A signed copy of the Contractor’s Above Ground Material and Test Certificate as described in NFPA 13, 2010, Chapter 24 11. Warranty documentation

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ABOVE GROUND FIRE PROTECTION PIPING

A. General: 1. Provide materials specified; however, only one material selection will be allowed for each nominal pipe size in any zone of a concurrent facility. 2. Pipe shall be new and have the manufacturer's name or brand along with the applicable ASTM standard marked on each length of pipe. 3. Steel piping shall be rated for a working pressure not less than 300 PSI. 4. Piping installed in exterior applications shall be galvanized. 5. Flexible sprinkler piping drops are not approved.

B. Wet System Piping: 1. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40 - ASTM A135 and/or ASTM A795, Type E, Grade A. 2. Black steel pipe, Schedule 10 - ASTM A135 and/or ASTM A795, Type E, Grade A. 3. Black steel pipe, Listed lightwall sprinkler pipe, ASTM A795, Type E, Grade A. 4. Galvanized, threadable lightwall steel pipe, ASTM A795 Type E, Grade A.

C. Dry System Piping: 1. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40 - ASTM A135 and/or ASTM A795, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40 with Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated Galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A53 or ASTM A795.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 5 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPE FITTINGS AND JOINING METHODS

A. Screwed Fittings: 1. Wet Systems: Cast iron or malleable iron fittings, ASME B16.3 or ASME B16.4, standard weight, class 125 (or 150) for pressures up to 175 PSI. Standard weight malleable iron fittings may be used for pressures up 300 PSI for pipe sizes 6” and less (reference NFPA 13, 2010, 6.4.4.2). 2. Dry Systems: Screwed galvanized iron fittings, ASME B16.3, class 150 for pressures up to 175 PSI or class 300 for where system pressures range from 175 PSI up to 300 PSI. 3. Pre Action Systems: Screwed galvanized iron fittings, ASME B16.3, class 150 for pressures up to 175 PSI or class 300 for where system pressures range from 175 PSI up to 300 PSI.

B. Flanged Fittings: 1. Cast iron, gasketed, short body, ASME B 16.1, class 125, for pressures up to 250 PSI. Flange bolts shall be hexagon head, cadmium plated, dimensions in compliance with ASME B 18.2.

C. Welded Fittings: 1. Wet Systems: Steel, rated for pressures of at least 300 PSI, standard weight, black, and in compliance with ASME B 16.9, ASME B 16.25, ASTM A 234, ASME B 16.5, and ASME B 16.11.

D. Grooved Fittings and Couplings: 1. Pressure ratings shall be at least 300 PSI. 2. Grooved fittings and couplings shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive, synthetic EPDM rubber gasket, ASTM D-2000. Steel bolts and nuts shall be ASTM B-633 zinc plated. 3. Grooved fittings and couplings used on wet pipe systems shall be enamel coated. 4. Grooved fittings and couplings used on dry pipe systems shall be galvanized and shall be listed for such service. 5. Grooved couplings, grooved fittings, and associated gaskets shall be from the same manufacturer. Intermixing of parts from different manufacturers is not acceptable. 6. Mechanical tee fittings shall not be considered to be equivalent to grooved fittings. 7. Provide flexible type couplings for installations in seismic areas where required by NFPA 13. 8. Acceptable Manufacturer: Victaulic or approved equal.

E. Schedule 40 steel pipe shall be joined by: 1. Screwed joints in compliance with specification ASME B 1.20.1 2. Welded joints in compliance with specification ASME B31.1, Chap. 5 (black pipe only). 3. Approved combination of grooved fittings, couplings, gaskets and grooves. a. Grooves may either be rolled or cut for wet systems. b. Grooves shall be cut only for dry and pre-action systems. c. Grooves shall be dimensionally compatible with the couplings.

F. Schedule 10 and black lightwall steel sprinkler pipe shall be joined by: 1. Welded joints in compliance with specification ASME B 31.1, Chap. 5 2. Approved combination of grooved fittings, couplings, gaskets and grooves. a. Grooves shall be rolled only (cut grooving is not be allowed). b. Grooves shall be dimensionally compatible with the couplings.

G. Threadable galvanized lightwall steel pipe shall be joined by: 1. Screwed joints in compliance with specification ASME B 1.20.1.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 6 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Piping hangers and supports used for fire protection systems shall comply with NFPA 13, 2010, Chapter 9.

2.04 CONTROL VALVES

A. All control valves shall have maximum working pressure of at least 175 PSI. Where pressure exceeds 175 PSI, utilize extra heavy valves with a maximum working pressure of 300 PSI.

B. Provide breakaway padlock and chain for each valve identified as "locked" on Drawings and/or as described in Part 3.

C. Each valve which controls the water supply a water based fire protection system shall be electronically supervised. Coordinate voltage requirements for electronic supervision with Divisions 26 and 28.

D. Butterfly Valves with Integral Supervisory Switch 1. Indicating type control valves with ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-536, EPDM coated ductile iron disk, integral supervisory switch set to normally open (or closed) depending on operational function of valve. 2. Valve shall not close in less than five seconds when operated at maximum possible speed from a fully open position. 3. Manufacturer: Victaulic Firelock, Milwaukee Butterball, Nibco, , Globe Fire Sprinkler, or approved equal.

E. OS&Y Valves 1. Cast iron, outside stem and yoke, flanged end, gate valve, AWWA C-509 and UL-262. 2. Manufacturer: Kennedy, Mueller, Wilkins, or approved equal.

F. OS&Y Valve Supervisory Switch 1. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw, switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

2.05 CHECK VALVES

A. All check valves shall have a soft seat and shall have maximum working pressure of at least 175 PSI. Where pressure exceeds 175 PSI, utilize extra heavy valves with a maximum working pressure of 300 PSI.

B. Check valves used for fire department connections shall be equipped with 1/2” street 90° and a ball drip.

2.06 DRAIN VALVES

A. Drain valves shall be full port, lockable ball valves, bronze body, 400 psi WOG, ball valve, locking lever handle, chrome plated bronze or stainless steel ball, teflon seat, teflon stuffing box seal, screwed connection.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Apollo, Nibco, Milwaukee, Wilkins, AGF.MFG, Inc., or approved equal

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 7 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

2.07 DRY SYSTEM AIR COMPRESSOR AND ACCESSORIES (FAC-1)

A. Air compressor shall be single stage, pipe mounted, oil–free type, air cooled, and electric motor driven and equipped with starter. Verify compressor electrical requirements with Division 26.

B. Air compressor shall completely charge system in 30 minutes or less. If more than one system is served by a single compressor, shut off valves and check valves shall be supplied on the supplies to each system.

C. Provide air maintenance device to maintain air pressure at required set point of system. Air maintenance device shall include; shut off valves, by-bass valve, strainer, and pressure switch. Systems utilizing air from a remote source shall be provided with air pressure regulator in lieu of a pressure switch.

D. Manufacturer: C’Aire, General Air Products, or approved equal

2.08 DRY SYSTEM AIR PRESSURE SUPERVISORY SWITCH

A. UL listed supervisory switch to monitor for both high and low system pressure. Pressure range is 10 PSI to 175 PSI.

B. Operates on a pressure increase or decrease of 10 PSI from normal.

C. Two Sets of SPDT (Form C) Contacts with ratings of 15.0 Amps at 125/250VAC, 2.5 Amps at 30VDC Resistive.

D. Manufacturer: Potter PS40-2, or approved equal

2.09 DRY PIPE VALVE

A. Differential type dry pipe valve and all necessary trim. Provide accelerator and/or exhauster if required for proper operation to achieve required water delivery time to inspectors test outlet.

B. Manufacturers: Tyco, Viking, Reliable, Globe Sprinkler or approved equal.

2.10 WATER FLOW ALARM SWITCHES - DRY SYSTEMS

A. Pressure-operated-type water-flow detector with electrical supervision UL 346 listed, minimum 175 psi working pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation.

B. Two Sets of SPDT (Form C) Contacts with ratings of 15.0 Amps at 125/250VAC, 2.0 Amps at 30VDC Resistive.

C. Sensitivity setting between 5 and 8 PSI with adjustable retards.

D. Manufacturer: Potter WFSR-F or approved equal

2.11 QUICK RESPONSE SPRINKLERS

A. Quick response sprinklers shall be UL-listed and/or FM approved. Pressure rating shall be 175-psig minimum. Sprinklers shall have a temperature rating between 155 and 170 degrees Fahrenheit unless otherwise shown in Drawings or indicated herein. Escutcheon colors must match sprinklers. Select only models with UL and/or FM approval for intended application.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 8 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

B. Quick response sprinklers shall be used in light and ordinary hazard occupancies except where noted on Drawings, specified herein, or exempted or prohibited by code.

C. Provide the following sprinkler types at the locations indicated below unless otherwise noted on Drawings or specified herein: 1. Areas without ceilings: Upright or pendent sprinklers 2. Suspended ceilings: Concealed pendent sprinklers 3. Gypsum ceilings: Concealed pendent sprinklers 4. Wall mounting: Sidewall sprinklers 5.

D. Upright or pendent sprinklers (K5.6): 1. Finish shall be chrome-plated, brass, or white-painted 2. Tyco TY-FRB, Reliable Model F1FR, Globe Series GL-QR, or equal

E. Recessed pendent sprinklers (K5.6): 1. Finish shall be chrome-plated or white-painted 1. Tyco TY-FRB, Reliable Model F1FR, Globe Series GL-QR, or equal

F. Horizontal sidewall sprinklers(K5.6): 1. Finish shall be chrome-plated or white-painted 2. Tyco TY-FRB, Reliable Model F1FR, Globe Series GL-QR/SW, or equal

G. Concealed pendent sprinklers(K5.6): 1. Finish shall be white-painted with flush cover plate. Provide custom color cover plate where noted on Drawings. 2. Tyco Model RF II, Reliable Model G4A, or equal 3. Note: These models are currently not FM approved for quick response applications.

H. Institutional style (K5.6): 1. Finish shall be white-painted. 2. Tyco Raven or approved equal.

I. Where standard spray sprinklers are designated on Drawings to be installed, extended coverage sprinklers shall not be substituted for standard spray sprinklers without prior approval by the Architect/Engineer.

J. Provide wire cage type sprinkler guards, including fastening device for attaching to exposed sprinklers, at locations as described in Part 3.

2.12 STANDARD RESPONSE SPRINKLERS

A. Standard response sprinklers shall be UL-listed and/or FM approved. Pressure rating shall be 175-psig minimum. Sprinklers shall have a temperature rating between 155 and 170 degrees Fahrenheit unless otherwise shown in Drawings or indicated herein. Escutcheon colors must match sprinklers. Select only models with UL and/or FM approval for intended application.

B. Standard response sprinklers shall not be used in light hazard occupancies, except in areas or conditions specifically allowed by code. Standard response sprinklers may be used in ordinary hazard occupancies.

C. The Division 21 Contractor is responsible for coordinating sprinkler finishes with the Architect of Record.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 9 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

D. Provide the following sprinkler types at the locations indicated unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 1. Areas Without Ceilings: Upright or pendent sprinklers 2. Suspended Ceilings: Recessed pendent sprinklers 3. Gypsum Ceilings: Concealed pendent sprinklers 4. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers 5. MNSCU Projects shall require concealed sprinklers in all finished ceilings

E. Extended coverage horizontal sidewall sprinklers: 1. Finish shall be chrome-plated or white-painted 2. Tyco TY-FRB (light hazard) or Tyco SW-20 (ordinary hazard); Reliable Model F1FR56 (light hazard) or Reliable Model F1FR (light hazard), Globe Series GL-QR/ECLH/SW or equal

F. Extended coverage concealed pendent sprinklers: 1. Finish shall be white-painted with flush cover plate. Provide custom color cover plate where noted on Drawings. 2. Tyco ELOC, Reliable Model G4 XLO, Globe Series GL-QR/INCH/ECLH, or equal

G. Dry pendent sprinklers (K5.6): 1. Finish shall be chrome-plated or white-painted 2. Tyco Model DS-1, Reliable Model F3QR, Globe Series GL-QR/DRY, or equal 3. Reliable model FM approved for wet systems only

H. Dry sidewall sprinklers (K5.6): 1. Finish shall be chrome-plated or white-painted 2. Tyco DS-1, Reliable Model F3QR, Globe Series GL-QR/DRY/HSW or GL-QR/DRY/VSW or equal 3. Reliable model FM approved for wet systems only

I. Dry concealed sprinklers (K5.6): 1. Finish shall be white-painted with flush cover plate. Provide custom color cover plate where noted on Drawings. 2. DS-C, Globe Series GL-QR/DRY/INCH, or equal

J. Dry recessed pendent sprinklers (K5.6): 1. Finish shall be chrome-plated or white-painted 2. Tyco Model DS-1, Reliable Model F3, Globe Series GL-QR/DRY, or equal 3. Note: These models are currently not FM approved for quick response applications

K. Provide corrosion resistant sprinklers in lieu of the above specified finishes where sprinklers are exposed to a corrosive environment. Examples include outdoor installations, swimming pools, chemical storage rooms, etc.

L. For areas where no specific sprinkler spray pattern is designated on Drawings, extended coverage sprinklers may be utilized where permitted by code and accounting for all encountered obstructions. Where standard spray sprinklers are designated on Drawings to be installed, extended coverage sprinklers shall not be substituted for standard spray sprinklers without prior approval by the Architect/Engineer.

M. Provide wire cage type sprinkler guards, including fastening device for attaching to exposed sprinklers, at locations as described in Part 3.

2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 10 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

A. Pressure gauges shall be 4” diameter, white face, stainless steel case, clear polycarbonate lens, pressure range of 0 – 300 PSI and operating temperature from -40°F to 140°F, 1/4” NPT lower mount.

B. UL Listed and FM Approved for fire sprinkler applications

C. Manufacturer: Fire Protection Products or approved equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. The Division 21 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating sprinkler pipe routing throughout the building. Coordinate piping installation with existing building conditions and all other trades.

B. Coordinate the pipe routing and installation of exposed piping with the Architect of Record prior to fabrication of piping. Exposed sprinkler pipe is not permitted in areas where concealing the piping above a ceiling is possible; except where specifically allowed by the Architect of Record or explicitly described on the Drawings.

C. Sprinkler pipe routing shall be reviewed with the Architect of Record to minimize alterations of existing ceilings, walls, etc., as well as disruptions. Unless otherwise noted in the contract Documents, the fire sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for replacing ceiling tile, gypsum board, etc. and repairing any damage to the existing building caused by installation of the sprinkler system components.

D. Piping in exposed conditions shall be installed with necessary clearances from building operations, utilities, etc. Adjust locations to maintain necessary clearances if so directed by Owner or Architect/Engineer.

E. Painting of exposed sprinkler pipe, hangers and supports shall be by Division 9 and shall be done in locations as directed per the Architect. The fire sprinkler Contractor shall remove all adhesive labeling on sprinkler piping to be painted.

F. Sprinkler piping joint construction shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 13, 2010, 6.5.

G. Welded pipe outlets shall be shop welded.

H. Welded joints, fittings, and/or outlets shall not be used for galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings shall have pressure ratings at least equal to or higher than the system pressure that may be encountered.

J. Piping shall be run in a straight line, parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions, whenever possible.

K. Properly brace all system piping and equipment to prevent movement during operation.

L. Provide piping escutcheons where exposed piping passes through floors, walls and ceilings.

M. Piping hangers, supports, their installation shall comply with NFPA 13, 2010 Chapter 9. Spacing between supports shall comply with NFPA 13, 2010, table 9.2.2.1.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 11 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

N. Piping penetrations through fire rated walls, fire rated floors, and fire rated ceilings shall be provided with U.L Listed fire stopping assemblies.

O. Sprinkler piping shall not be routed over electrical panels. Where this requirement is not feasible, at a minimum, the piping must be routed at least 6’-0” above the panel in compliance with NEC (NFPA 70), Section 110.26 (F)(1)(a).

P. Piping sleeves shall be provided as described in Section 210500.

3.02 DRAINAGE

A. Wet sprinkler system branchlines, crossmains and feedmains may be installed level with drains provided at low points and trapped water locations.

B. Dry system piping drainage in non-refrigerated areas shall comply with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.16.2.3.1. Branch piping shall be pitched at ½” per 10 feet. Distribution piping shall be pitched at ¼” per 10 feet.

C. Provide drains at low points and trapped water locations as required by NPPA 13, 2010, 8.16.2.5.2 for wet systems.

D. Provide drains at low points and trapped water locations as required by NPPA 13, 2010, 8.16.2.5.3 for dry systems.

E. Provide main drain, drain valve and pressure gauge on each sprinkler system zone or riser. Drain pipe sizing shall comply with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.16.2.4.1 through 8.16.2.4.7. Main drain shall discharge to building exterior. Provide concrete splash block at discharge outlet.

F. All cross mains shall terminate in 1-1/4” or larger pipe with grooved cap with outlet to allow for flushing in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.16.3.3.

G. Provide drain piping for fire department connection check valve ball drip. Drain to floor drain or outside of building.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Sprinkler system component identification shall be provided by Division 21 as described in Section 210500.

3.04 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. All wiring of fire protection system components shall comply with NFPA 70 and 72.

B. Wiring is provided as described in Part 1.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers and piping.

B. Protect fire protection equipment from damage until Project Substantial Completion.

C. Upon completion of painting within the building, remove all temporary protective coverings attached to sprinklers used to protect sprinklers from paint overspray.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 12 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

D. Remove adhesive labeling on all exposed sprinkler piping installed in finished areas of the building.

3.06 VALVES

A. All valves regulating the water supply to sprinklers shall be supervised. Supervised valve switch contact adjustment by Division 21. Switches shall be mounted so not to interfere with normal operation of valve and shall be adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the valve control, or when the stem has moved, no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position. Wired by Division 28.

B. All valves controlling water supplies for automatic sprinklers shall be locked or secured in the open position. Locks are not required for valves located in a room or space with access limited to essential personnel only. Reference MSFC 903.4.4.

3.07 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Provide gauges where required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Gauges shall be valved to permit testing of gauge. Gauges shall be accessible for operation, inspection, tests, and maintenance.

3.08 DRY PIPE SYSTEMS

A. Provide dry pipe and associated trim where shown on Drawings. Dry system installation shall conform to NFPA 13, 2010, 7.2.

B. Dry pipe air compressor shall be pipe mounted.

C. Air pressure shall be maintained on all dry pipe systems by an automatically activated air compressor regulated by a system pressure switch.

D. Dry systems shall be provided with an air test at 40 PSI for a minimum of 24 hours, in addition to the required hydrostatic test, in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 24.2.2.1. Any air leakage in excess of 1.5 PSI in 24 hours shall be corrected and the system shall be retested.

E. Dry systems shall be monitored for both high and low pressure through a pressure monitoring switch. Activation of the switch shall indicate a “TROUBLE” condition at the building fire alarm panel.

3.09 WATER FLOW ALARMS

A. Provide flow switches or pressure switches as indicated on Drawings. Wired by Division 28. Flow switches shall not be mounted in or within 12” of any fitting that changes direction of water flow. Adjust delay setting to eliminate false alarms.

3.10 SPRINKLERS

A. Locate sprinklers and other devices to be installed in suspended ceilings carefully to match the coordinated pattern of the ceiling, lighting fixtures, diffusers and other elements to be installed thereon. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plan. Sprinklers shall be centered in ceiling tile +/-2".

B. Provide escutcheon plates for pendent sprinklers mounted in finished ceilings and horizontal sidewall sprinklers mounted on walls. Maximum depth of escutcheon below ceiling or out from

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 13 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

wall shall be 1-1/4". Two piece escutcheons exceeding a depth of 1-1/4" are not approved. Escutcheon diameters shall not exceed 3-inch.

C. Provide sprinkler guards at the following locations: 1. Where moving objects are likely to cause sprinkler damage 2. Where sprinkler is installed less than 7’-6” above finished floor 3. Where noted on Drawings

D. Provide intermediate and high temperature sprinklers near heat-producing devices in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.3.2.5.

E. In cases where existing sprinkler locations are moved or adjusted to accommodate a revised ceiling configuration, any existing sprinklers changing position shall be removed and replaced with new sprinklers in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 6.2.1 and Minnesota State Fire Code 104.7.

F. Provide sprinklers above and below fixed obstructions, including , open overhead garage doors, and ceiling clouds over 48” in width, as per NFPA 13, 2010, 8.5.5.3.1.

G. Minnesota State Fire Code 903.3.1.6.2 prohibits sprinklers in elevator shafts and equipment rooms.

H. For Projects in Minnesota, sprinklers may be omitted from non-combustible and limited combustible vestibules as allowed by Minnesota State Fire Code 903.3.1.6.5. The vestibule shall be less than 225 square feet, have glazing allowing for vision into the vestibule, contain no combustible material including furniture, and only be used for ingress and egress.

I. Provide sprinklers to protect all concealed combustible spaces in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.15.1 thru 8.15.3.1.

J. Where ceilings do not fully extend to all walls within a room or space, or where cloud type ceilings are installed, sprinklers shall be provided both above and below the ceiling.

K. Sidewall sprinklers shall only be installed in the following locations: light hazard occupancies with smooth, horizontal or sloped flat ceilings; ordinary hazard occupancies with smooth, flat ceilings and where listed for such use; and below open overhead doors as described in NFPA 13, 2010, 8.4.2.

L. When approved for installation by the Architect/Engineer, extended coverage sprinklers shall only be installed below unobstructed construction with smooth, flat ceilings, with a pitch not exceeding 2 units in 12 unless otherwise allowed by the exceptions stated in NFPA 13, 2010, 8.4.3.

M. When approved for installation by the Architect/Engineer, extended coverage sidewall sprinklers shall not be installed within 8’-0” of surface mounted light fixtures or similar obstructions directly mounted to the ceiling in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.9.5.1.2.

N. When approved for installation by the Architect/Engineer, extended coverage sidewall sprinklers shall be separated from pendent mounted light fixtures or similar obstructions separated from the ceiling in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.9.5.2.1.4.

3.11 SPRINKLER CABINET

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 14 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

A. Provide sprinkler cabinet near sprinkler system riser assembly. Include a stock of extra sprinklers including each type and rating installed as described in NFPA 13, 2010, 6.2.9. Provide wrench(es) suitable for use with all sprinklers installed.

B. Provide spare sprinklers per the following schedule: 1. Installations having under 300 sprinklers, provide at least 6 sprinklers 2. Installations having 300 to 1000 sprinklers, provide at least 12 sprinklers 3. Installations having over 1000 sprinklers, provide at least 24 sprinklers

3.12 INSPECTORS TEST CONNECTIONS AND OUTLETS

A. Provide inspectors test connections and outlets at locations ensuring that each flow switch installed can be tested.

B. Inspector's test connections shall be complete with discharge piping and shutoff valve and shall be sized and located to comply with NFPA 13, 2010, 8.17.4.

C. Inspector test piping shall be routed to drain to the building exterior to a location subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Inspectors test connections for dry systems shall be installed on the remote end of the system.

E. Inspectors test connections for pre-action systems shall be installed on the remote end of the system.

3.13 SIGNS

A. Provide permanent visible signs to identify all drains, test connections, control valves and fire department connections.

B. Unless otherwise provided by Division 10, the Division 21 Contractor shall provide permanent, durable, and readily visible signs for rooms containing the following: controls for air conditioning systems, sprinkler risers, sprinkler valves, or other fire detection or suppression or control elements. Comply with IFC section 510.1. Coordinate required locations and wording with the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Division 23.

C. Dry systems with low point drains shall have a sign posted at the dry valve indicating the number and location of each individual drain as described in NFPA 13, 2010, 8.16.2.5.3.7.

D. Provide hydraulic design information signs in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 24.5. Each sign shall be permanently marked, weatherproof metal or rigid plastic, and secured with corrosion resistant wire or chain. Such signs shall be placed at each zone control riser or sub zone. Each individual sign shall include the following information: 1. Location of the design area or areas 2. Discharge densities over the design area or areas 3. Required flow and residual pressure demand at the base of the riser 4. Occupancy classification or commodity classification and maximum permitted storage height and configuration 5. Hose stream allowance included in addition to the sprinkler demand 6. The name of the installing Contractor

E. Provide general design information signs in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 24.6. Each sign shall be permanently marked, weatherproof metal or rigid plastic, and secured with corrosion resistant wire or chain. Each sign shall identify the system design basis and information

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 15 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

relevant to the inspection, testing, and maintenance requirements for the system. Such signs shall be placed at each zone control riser or sub zone. Each individual sign shall include the following information: 1. Name and location of the facility protected 2. Presence of high-piled and/or rack storage 3. Maximum height of storage planned 4. Aisle width planned 5. Commodity classification 6. Encapsulation of pallet loads 7. Presence of solid shelving 8. Flow test data 9. Presence of flammable/combustible liquids 10. Presence of hazardous materials 11. Presence of other special storage 12. Location of auxiliary drains and low point drains 13. Original results of main drain flow test 14. Name of installing Contractor or designer 15. of presence and location of antifreeze or other auxiliary systems

F. The Division 21 Contractor shall provide any additional signage pertaining to the fire protection system as may be required by the authority having jurisdiction.

3.14 SPRINKLER SYSTEM HAZARD CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Sprinkler hazard classifications shall comply with NFPA 13, 2010, Chapter 5 and the locally adopted Fire Code.

B. Additional requirements for special hazards; including high piled storage, rubber tire storage, flammable and combustible liquids, aerosols, idle pallets, etc.; shall comply with applicable requirements defined in NFPA 13 Chapters 12 through 21, NFPA 30, NFPA 30B, and the locally adopted Fire Code. Refer to Drawings and/or these specifications for identification of any special hazard areas.

C. Unless noted otherwise, all general storage rooms shall be designed at a minimum to protect Class I-IV commodities to a storage height of 10’-0” ” in any configuration and Group A plastics to 5’-0” in any configuration (i.e., Ordinary Hazard Group 2). Ordinary Hazard Group 1 designations for storage areas shall only be applied where specifically called out for on the Drawings. Reference NFPA 13, 2010, Table 13.2.1.

D. Hazard classifications shall correspond with the following unless noted otherwise: 1. Light Hazard: a. Occupancies where the quantity of combustibles is low and where fires with relatively low heat release rates are expected shall be considered as Light Hazard. b. Such locations include, but are not limited to: office areas, dining areas, church sanctuaries, classrooms, corridors, attics without storage, residential spaces, etc. 2. Ordinary Hazard – Group 1: a. Electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, restaurant service areas and automobile parking areas. b. Miscellaneous storage areas, as defined by NFPA 13, 2010, 3.9.1.18; with the following configurations and when specifically noted on the Drawings: 1) Class I commodities stored in palletized, bin box, shelf, rack, and back to back shelf storage 12 feet or less in height. 2) Class II commodities stored in palletized, bin box, shelf, rack, and back to back shelf storage 10 feet or less in height.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 16 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

3. Ordinary Hazard – Group 2: a. Chemistry labs, wrestling rooms, gymnastic rooms, repair garages, machine shops, library stack areas, mercantile, etc. b. Miscellaneous storage areas, as defined by NFPA 13, 2010, 3.9.1.18; with the following configurations: 1) Any storage configuration allowed under Light Hazard and/or Ordinary Hazard Group 1. 2) Class II commodities stored in palletized, bin box, shelf, rack, and back to back shelf storage 12 feet or less in height. 3) Class III commodities stored in palletized, bin box, shelf, rack, and back to back shelf storage 12 feet or less in height. 4) Class IV commodities stored in palletized, bin box, and shelf storage 12 feet or less in height with a maximum ceiling height of 32 feet. 5) Class IV commodities stored in rack and back to back shelf storage 10 feet or less in height. 6) Group A plastics stored 5 feet or less in height. c. Buildings or portions of buildings of undermined use as required by Minnesota State Fire Code 903.3.1.4. The minimum design area for these areas shall be 3,000 square feet.

3.15 SPRINKLER SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS – NFPA 13 DESIGN

A. Contractor shall provide a hydraulically designed sprinkler system designed in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, Chapter 22 and all applicable State and local codes.

B. Hazard classifications shall be designed with the following base design criteria: 1. Light Hazard: 0.10 GPM per sq. ft. over the most remote 1500 sq. ft. 2. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1: 0.15 GPM per sq. ft. over the most remote 1500 sq. ft. 3. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2: 0.20 GPM per sq. ft. over the most remote 1500 sq. ft. 4. See items below for additional requirements

C. Where extended coverage sprinklers are used, the base design area shall be that noted above or the area protected by 5 sprinklers, whichever area is greater, in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.2.2.3. 1. When extended coverage sprinklers are used in combination with standard coverage sprinklers within a room or area, all sprinklers in the calculation shall be based on the hydraulic calculation requirements of the most demanding extended coverage sprinklers in the room or area.

D. Combined hose streams and water supply durations shall be as noted below (reference NFPA 13, 2010, Table 11.2.3.1.2) – assumes systems are electronically supervised at an approved and constantly attended location. 1. Light Hazard: 100 GPM for 30 minutes 2. Ordinary Hazard Group 1: 250 GPM for 60 minutes 3. Ordinary Hazard Group 2: 250 GPM for 60 minutes

E. Allowable decreases to base remote areas are as noted below: 1. Wet systems for light and ordinary hazard occupancies are allowed to have the design area reduced, based on ceiling heights and the installation of quick response sprinklers installed throughout, where permitted by NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.2.3.1. The number of sprinklers in the design area shall never be less than 5 and unprotected ceiling pockets must not exist. If the area under consideration is below a sloped ceiling, the maximum height of the room shall determine the allowable reduction as described in NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.2.3.3.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 17 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

2. The room design method; in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.3; is allowed where it is applicable and all required conditions are satisfied. All rooms must be enclosed with walls having a fire resistance rating equal to the water supply duration established for the protected occupancy. Doors and other openings must be protected as described in NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.3.5. Doors must be self-closing. Doors and other openings must have fire resistance ratings as described in NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.3.5. The Division 21 Contractor shall confirm all required conditions are satisfied and note the required conditions on their submittals when utilizing the room design method.

F. Apply increases to remote areas as noted below: 1. Where ceiling slopes exceed 2” in 12”, the design area for wet systems shall be increased by 30% without revising the density as required by NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.2.4. 2. Where ceiling slopes are less than 2” in 12”, the design area for dry systems and pre action systems shall be increased by 30% without revising the density as required by NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.2.5. 3. Where ceiling slopes exceed 2” in 12”, the design area for dry systems shall be increased by 69% without revising the density in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 11.2.3.2.4 and 11.2.3.2.5.

G. Pipe Sizing: 1. The system shall be calculated to allow for a safety factor. The safety factor shall be the pressure available at the required flow that is above the required pressure at the required flow. The safety factor shall meet the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction but in no case be less than 5 PSI. 2. Pipe serving more than two sprinklers shall be a minimum of 1-1/4" in size.

H. Additional compensation shall not be granted for fire sprinkler distribution piping up to and including 8” in diameter and sprinkler branch piping 2-1/2” in diameter if such piping sizing is necessary to satisfy hydraulic calculation requirements without the assistance of a fire pump.

I. The Division 21 Contractor shall perform a flow test at the site prior to final hydraulic calculations. The flow test shall be in compliance with NFPA 291, 2010 Edition. The elevation of the gauge hydrant relative to the floor slab shall be indicated on the shop Drawings.

3.16 TESTING AND FLUSHING

A. Contractor shall perform and pay for all tests for the respective systems in compliance with the requirements of this Specification and all of the applicable governing codes.

B. All authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance company, shall be notified by the Division 21 Contractor in sufficient time to enable them to be present for each test.

C. Documentation of the above ground piping system testing and acceptance procedures shall be the responsibility of the Division 21 fire protection Contractor; shall be in compliance with NFPA 13, chapter 24. The testing and documentation shall include: 1. Hydrostatic testing in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 24.2.1.1. If any leaks are found during the test, the system must be retested after the leaks have been corrected. 2. Test all installed backflow prevention assemblies in compliance with NFPA 13, 2010, 24.2.5.1. 3. Furnish Contractors Aboveground Material and Test Certificate, to Architect/Engineer upon completion.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 18 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

D. Conduct all additional tests, as necessary or required by the authority having jurisdiction, to verify that the systems, equipment and supervisory devices are completely operational and functioning correctly.

E. Division 21 Contractor is responsible for maintaining the equipment in service after the acceptance test as well as minimizing impairments to the system for the remainder of the Project.

3.17 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. All fire extinguishers and extinguisher cabinets provided under Division 10.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 19 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 21 1000 – 20 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This section specifies the basic materials, methods and workmanship requirements for Division 22 and shall apply to all Division 22 specifications and drawings.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Division 22 Specification Sections.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work to be accomplished under this specification, accompanying Division 22 specification sections, and the accompanying drawings, includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the proper completion of all plumbing work under the Division 22 contract.

B. The omission of express reference to any parts or services necessary for, or reasonably incidental to, a complete installation shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such parts or services.

C. Within the work area there are sections of existing storm, cold water, hot water, and recirculating hot water pipes which are uninsulated. Division 22 shall provide insulation on any of this uninsulated existing piping along with any new piping such that all new and existing storm, cold water, hot water, and recirculating hot water pipes within the work area are insulated as described in Section 220719.

1.04 DEMOLTION

A. Division 22 Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition of plumbing system components noted in the contract documents. Refer to Part 3 for additional demolition requirements.

1.05 INSPECTION OF SITE

A. Before submitting a proposal on the work outlined in this specification and accompanying drawings, each bidder shall examine the site and confirm the means of making connections to services and shall become familiar with all the existing conditions and limitations.

B. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to visit the site prior to bid to identify the location of any existing building features, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other items which may affect their installation.

C. Additional compensation shall not be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved or their lack of knowledge of any site conditions that may affect the Work when such information is provided in the contract documents and/or is readily visible on site.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 1 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

D. Any apparent variance of the plan or specification from the existing conditions at the site shall be called to the attention of the Engineer.

1.06 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS

A. All required fees, permits, plan review submittals, and inspections for Division 22 work shall be obtained and/or arranged for by the Division 22 Contractor.

C. All required plan review submittals and associated fees for Division 22 Work, including submittal for plumbing plan review to the Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry, shall be made and paid for by the Division 22 Contractor.

1.07 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, ordinances, laws, regulations, industry standards, and utility company regulations.

B. All domestic plumbing systems shall be installed in accordance with the 2015 Minnesota Plumbing Code Chapter 4714.

C. In case of difference between construction codes, specifications, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, and utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.

D. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable construction codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations, they shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies.

1.08 DRAWINGS

B. Drawings of the plumbing systems are diagrammatic and are intended to indicate approximate location and/or direction, and approximate arrangement of the Work, but not necessarily the exact detail or exact arrangement of construction.

C. The Division 22 Contractor shall consult all Drawings, including: architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, kitchen, etc.; and shall confirm any materials, finishes, locations of ceilings, structural members, pipes, ducts, recessed lighting fixtures, conduits, etc. which may affect their installation. This coordination shall occur prior to installation.

D. If it is found that a more convenient, suitable or workable arrangement would result by altering the arrangement indicated on the Drawings, the Engineer may require any or all Contractors to modify the location or arrangement of their Work. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Engineer.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 2 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

E. Discrepancies discovered either before or after Work has started, shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer immediately and the Engineer reserves the right to require minor changes in the Work of any Contractor in order to eliminate such discrepancies with no change in contract cost. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Engineer.

F. The Division 22 Contractor shall leave adequate room for the installation of equipment by other Contractors items where space is limited. The Division 22 Contractor shall be cautioned that in certain instances, space may be limited to the extent that there may be only one arrangement of equipment or material which may be feasible.

G. The plans and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either one shall be as binding as if called for in both.

1.09 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to symbols and abbreviations on drawings. Other symbols are in common usage but if uncertainty exists regarding any plan symbols or abbreviations it shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.

B. Within the contract documents, the word “Provide” shall be considered to be equivalent to the phrase “Furnish and Install”.

1.10 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES

A. The building will be in use during these operations. The Division 22 contractor shall schedule their work, in consultation with other trades, and carry it out in such a manner as to least inconvenience the occupants due to interruption of mechanical services.

B. Interruptions shall be confined to the smallest area possible at any one time and all interruptions shall be approved by the Owner. Temporary connections shall be made if required to provide continuity of service.

C. After service has been restored following an interruption, each trade shall inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and be responsible for returning all services to the same operating condition which existed prior to the interruption.

1.11 USE OF FACILITY

1.12 CLEANUP

A. Division 22 shall periodically clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc. resulting from their work or operations, leaving the job and the equipment furnished under any or all contracts in a clean condition.

1.13 TESTS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 3 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

A. Any damage to equipment occasioned by improper or ill-timed operation or testing shall be made good at the Contractor's own expense, before final inspection and acceptance.

B. Refer to remaining Division 22 sections additional testing requirements for specific systems.

1.14 DRAIN LINES FROM EQUIPMENT

A. Unless noted otherwise, noted, each item of equipment requiring a drain line or a conductor for liquid shall be provided with an "open site" drain, such as a standpipe, floor drain, or a janitors sink. Direct connection to existing or new waste and vent stacks or rainwater leaders is not acceptable.

B. Division 22 shall also provide drains on items of equipment as noted in Miscellaneous Work.

1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, AND PROJECT DOCUMENTATION

A. Shop drawings to be submitted shall be as noted in the General Conditions.

B. Refer to Division 22 sections additional project documentation requirements for specific systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Sleeves shall be uncoated or galvanized steel pipe not less than Schedule 40.

B. Sleeves in rated walls shall be as required for U. L. listing.

C. Temporary sleeves in poured concrete walls or floors shall be poly-sleeve with nailing flange.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND VALVES

A. Comply with Section 220553.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 HOLES THROUGH MASONRY AND CONCRETE

A. Division 22 shall provide all holes and openings required for their work unless such holes and openings are shown to be provided on the architectural or structural drawings. Pay particular attention to openings required in pre-cast, pre-stressed, or post-tensioned slabs.

B. Holes made in the field shall be core drilled large enough to allow all pipe insulation to continue uninterrupted. Holes in floors or exterior walls above grade shall include a steel pipe sleeve grouted watertight.

C. The above method shall be employed whenever holes are made on the job including holes required by change orders or because of omissions made inadvertently by the trade.

D. Pipe openings in exterior walls below grade between earth areas and interior spaces shall include a steel pipe sleeve and a mechanical seal.

E. Division 22 shall be responsible for providing and disposing of water they use in the core drilling operation. Such work shall be scheduled and other trades coordinated so that damage will not result from the use of water.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 4 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

3.02 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for all piping as follows: 1. Precast slabs. 2. Exposed finished areas. 3. Fire rated or acoustical walls. 4. Fire rated floors. 5. CMU walls.

B. Sleeves shall be a minimum of 1” greater in inside diameter than piping passing through sleeve.

C. Fabricate all pipe sleeves of new material, cut square and reamed.

D. All sleeves through walls, extend full thickness of wall, cut flush with finished surfaces.

E. Pack space between all sleeve and pipes.

F. For sleeves located in fire rated construction, comply with Division 7 - Firestopping.

G. All pipe penetrations through fire rated construction shall be made with U.L. listed fire penetration assemblies. Refer to Architectural drawings locations of for fire rated construction. In addition, and at a minimum for determining pipe sleeve and sealing requirements, pipe penetrations at the following locations shall be considered to be fire rated construction unless directed otherwise by the Architect of Record: 1. All floors. 2. Walls adjoining corridors, enclosed stairs, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and storage rooms

H. Permanent sleeves through floor slabs for exposed piping shall extend 1/2" above finished floor. Sleeves shall extend 4” above the floor in mechanical penthouses, dishwashing areas, kitchens, server areas, and all other wet areas. Where concealed, set sleeves through floor and flush with floor. Concealed piping is piping in walls, chases and similar locations. All sleeves through existing floor slabs shall be bonded to the slab with an epoxy bonding material.

I. In locating and setting sleeves, this Contractor is to leave a minimum of 4" between sleeves in rows or clusters. Where the normal spacing of top and bottom reinforcing bars cannot be maintained or the bars are interrupted because of sleeves size or cluster location, provide extra reinforcing bar as specified elsewhere around the clusters or sleeves as approved by Architect or Engineer.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. All piping in unfinished, accessible areas shall be identified every 50 feet, both sides of wall or floor penetration and at every change of direction as to type of service and direction of flow.

B. All equipment furnished shall be labeled.

3.04 ACCESS PANELS (FINISHED SURFACES)

A. Coordinate with Division 1 to locate access panels where required for access to equipment, valves, etc.

3.05 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING ESCUTCHEON PLATES

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 5 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

A. Where uncovered, exposed pipes pass through walls or floors, they shall be fitted with wall or floor plates.

B. Plates shall be set tight against wall or floor. Plates on other than exposed pipes shall be prime coated.

3.06 DEMOLITION:

A. The demolition work shall be a phased operation and shall comply with the construction sequence schedule.

B. The Division 22 Contractor shall include all temporary connections necessary to permit the Owner to occupy areas of the building during the various construction phases.

C. The Division 22 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation to prevent disruption to the Owner and minimize the "downtime." The Architect/Owner's approval shall be sought prior to all cut-off of services.

D. The Division 22 Contractor shall remove existing work shown, specified or necessary for completion of his work. Owner shall have the option of the retaining any or all items of material removed under this contract. Items or materials not retained by Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises.

E. The Division 22 Contractor shall verify the extent of the remodeling work and any details not clear shall be referred to the Architect/Engineer for clarification prior to commencing demolition work.

F. No items scheduled for demolition may be abandoned in place but rather shall be removed and disposed of off-site, unless specifically noted on the plans.

G. Use of Owner's dumpsters for the disposition of any type of construction debris is not allowed.

3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Division 22 shall perform all cutting and patching necessary in order to perform their work unless such work has been delegated to the General Contractor. However, special permission shall be obtained from the Engineer before cutting structural members or finished material.

B. All patching shall be performed in such manner as to leave no visible trace and to return the part affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Patching work shall be performed by persons experienced, skilled and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted.

C. Pipe penetrations through new or existing floors and walls, regardless of type of construction, shall be done by rotary drill, wet or dry method. Use of hand, electric, or pneumatic impact tool is not acceptable. Each contractor shall contain water and dust to avoid damage to adjacent finishes, furniture and equipment.

D. Each contractor may need to provide additional selective demolition not shown on the drawings as required for installation of new building elements and systems.

E. Pavements, sidewalks, roads and curbs shall be cut, patched, repaired and replaced as required to permit the installation of the work of each trade. Such cutting, patching, repairing and replacing shall be the responsibility of, and paid for by, the trade requiring the work.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 6 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

F. Each contractor shall bear the expense of all cutting, patching, repairing, or replacing of the work of other trades required because of their fault, error, tardiness, or damage done.

3.08 PAINTING

A. Painting shall comply with the requirements of Division 9.

3.09 ACCESS PANELS IN WALLS AND CEILING

A. Division 22 shall be responsible to provide all access panels, not otherwise provided by Division 1, which are necessary to provided required access to items provided under the Division 22 contract.

B. Access panels shall be as manufactured by Milcor or approved equal and of type that is compatible with construction and finish of the wall and/or ceiling.

C. Fire rated panels shall be furnished where required in rated construction.

D. Access panels shall be provided at the following locations: 1. Access shall be provided to any type of valve, trap, manual vent, control valve, that requires adjustment, replacement, or visual inspection. 2. Division 22 shall consult with the General Contractor to coordinate the location of each access panel. 3. Generally, access panels are not required when a lay-in-ceiling is installed. However, depending on the type of occupancy, the Engineer may require that access areas be identified.

3.10 FIRE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. Exercise extreme care to maintain and exercise adequate fire safety precautions throughout the work. This shall include providing sufficient firefighting devices, watchmen, standby helpers or other precautions during construction, in use of temporary heat, welding, brazing, sweating, testing or other phase of work.

B. At all times, access shall be maintained for fire department trucks to the building.

D. All glass, glazed materials and other finish, in the vicinity of welding, brazing and cutting, shall be masked by the Contractor performing the welding work.

E. When necessary to do cutting, welding, brazing, sweating and similar work in the vicinity of wood, in shafts or in the vicinity of any combustible material (and the combustible material cannot be removed), the materials shall be adequately protected with fire retardant blankets or similar approved coverings.

3.11 EXCAVATING FOR PLUMBING WORK

A. Division 22 shall not excavate for plumbing work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum.

B. Excavate with vertical sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where otherwise indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross-bracing to sustain sides of excavations.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 7 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

Remove sheeting and cross-bracing during backfilling wherever such removal would not endanger work or other property. Where not removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance below finished grade to not interfere with other work.

C. Width: Excavate for piping with 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of pipe, except where otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other work. Excavate for other items to provide minimum practical but adequate working clearances.

D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition.

E. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.

F. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of piping. 1. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze-ups. 2. Piping shall be installed with a minimum of 4" between top of pipe and underside of floor slab. 3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. For piping 5" or less in nominal size, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support piping on undisturbed soil. 5. For piping 6" and larger in nominal size, tanks, and other work indicated to receive sub- base, excavate to sub-base depth indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, to 6" below bottom of work to be supported. 6. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under piping couplings to provide solid bearing for entire body of piping.

G. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where directed (because of unsatisfactory soil condition at bottom of indicated excavation), excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil-bearing condition. Backfill with sub-base material, compacted as directed, to indicated excavation depth.

H. Depth for Exterior Piping: Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water-bearing piping (water, steam condensate, drainage) so that top of piping will not be less than 8'-0" vertical distance below finished grade.

I. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in manner that will not interfere with or damage excavation or other work.

J. Retain excavated material that complies with requirements for backfill material.

K. Dispose of excavated material that is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material. Move unused material to another location on Owner's property, at or adjacent to project site, and dispose of as directed by Architect/Engineer.

L. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35°F (1°C).

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 8 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

3.12 DEWATERING FOR PLUMBING WORK

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

B. Maintain dry excavations for mechanical work, by removing water. Protect excavations from inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations; protect excavations from major inflow of ground water, by installing temporary sheeting and waterproofing. Provide adequate barriers that will protect other excavations and below-grade property from being damaged by water, sediment, or erosion from or through mechanical work excavations.

3.13 BASE PREPARATION FOR PLUMBING WORK

A. Sub-base Installation: Where indicated, install sub-base material to receive mechanical work, and compact by tamping to form firm base for work. For piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks, and similar work, shape subbase to fit shape of bottom 90 of cylinder, for uniform continuous support.

B. Provide finely-graded sub-base material for wrapped, coated, and plastic materials to be buried.

C. Shape sub-bases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe-bells, flanged connections, valves, and similar enlargements in piping systems.

3.14 BACKFILLING FOR PLUMBING WORK

A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing is indicated.

B. Backfill with finely-graded sub-base material to 6" above wrapped, coated, and plastic piping and tanks, and to centerline of other tanks.

C. Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to required densities. Do not backfill with frozen soil materials.

D. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of mechanical work, and compact simultaneously; do not dislocate work from installed positions.

E. Backfill excavations in 8" high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the following densities (95% of maximum density, ASTM D 1557), using power-driven hand- operated compaction equipment. 1. Backfill to a point just below the underside of the concrete floor slab.

F. Compaction Tests: Where compaction tests indicate lower densities of backfill than specified, continue compaction (and re-excavation and backfilling where necessary) and provide additional testing as directed by Architect/Engineer. Allowable density tolerance is not more than one-test- out-of-five falling more than 2 percentage points below specified density.

G. Testing shall be performed and paid for by Owner.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 9 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0500 – 10 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

SECTION 22 0523

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Valve accessories: 1. Ball valves 2. Balance valves 3. Check valves 4. Drain Valves

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220500 - Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods

C. Section 220519 – Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping

D. Section 220529 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

E. Section 220553 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

F. Section 220719 – Plumbing Piping Insulation

G. Section 221005 – Plumbing Piping

H. Section 221006 – Plumbing Piping Specialties

I. Section 224000 – Plumbing Fixtures

1.03 REFERENCES

A. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 01.

B. Product Data: Provide data on valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all valves and note on drawings any deviations from the contract documents.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0523 – 1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PLUMBING PIPING © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Valves used for domestic water applications shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent in the wetted surface material and shall be manufactured in accordance with NSF 61.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FULL PORT BALL VALVES

A. Pipe sizes 2-1/2” Inches and smaller: Bronze body 400 psi WOG full port ball valve, lever handle, chrome plated bronze or stainless steel ball, TFE seat, TFE stuffing box seal, soldered or threaded ends.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Apollo 77-CLF-100/200 Series (2-1/2” and smaller) 2. Milwaukee UPBA-450 (2” and smaller) 3. Nibco, Inc. S-585-80-LF (2” and smaller”)

2.02 DRAIN VALVES

A. Construction, 200 psi, bronze ball valve 1/2 or 3/4 inch threaded inlet, 3/4 inch hose threaded outlet.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Apollo Series 70LF-HC 2. Milwaukee UPBA150H 3. Nibco T-585-LF-66-HC

2.03 CHECK VALVES

A. Pipe sizes 3 inch and smaller Class 125, bronze body, y-pattern, bronze disc, renewable seat. Sweat or soldered ends.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Apollo Series 161TLF/163SLF (2” and smaller) 2. Milwaukee Model UP509 or UP1509 (2” and smaller) 3. Nibco T-413-Y-LF or S-413-Y-LF (2” and smaller) 4. Stockham LBF-309Y or LBF -319Y (2” and smaller)

2.04 THERMOSTATIC BALANCING RECIRCULATION VALVE

A. Thermostatic Balancing Recirculation Valve (TBRV) shall be self-contained and fully automatic without additional piping or control mechanisms.

B. TBRV shall regulate the flow of recirculated domestic hot water based on water temperature entering the TBRV regardless of system operating pressure. 1. When fully closed the TBRV shall bypass a minimum of 0.1 GPM hot water to maintain dynamic control of the recirculating loop. 2. Flow rates at 1 PSI pressure drop shall be as follows: a. ½” – 1.3 GPM b. ¾” – 1.8 GPM c. 1” – 3.3 GPM d. 1-1/4” – 5.1 GPM 17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0523 – 2 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PLUMBING PIPING © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

e. 1-1/2” – 7.6 GPM f. 2” – 14.2 GPM 3. TBRV shall be factory set to 110°F or as required by project conditions. a. Fully open TBRV shall modulate towards a minimum closed position upon sensing a water temperature above 3°F of set point.

C. TBRV body and all internal components shall be constructed of stainless steel with major components constructed of type 303 stainless steel. 1. TBRV shall be rated to 200 PSIG maximum working pressure. a. All TBRV shall be standard tapered female thread, NPT. 2. All TBRV shall be rated to 300°F (148.9°C) maximum working temperature. 3. TBRV shall be ANSI/AWWA C800 compliant. 4. All TBRV shall be NSF-61 certified for use in all domestic water systems. 5. Thermal actuator shall be spring operated and self-cleaning, delivering closing thrust sufficient to keep orifice opening free of scale deposits. a. Thermal actuator shall be rated for a minimum of 200,000 cycles.

D. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Therm-Omega-Tech, Inc. Circuit Solver 2. Approved equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. In non-residential buildings, the Division 22 Contractor shall provide any additional valves necessary such that the water supply to each room or individual fixture can be shut off without disrupting any other portion of the building.

B. In residential buildings, the Division 22 Contractor shall provide any additional valves necessary such that the water supply to each family unit or each individual fixture can be shut off without disrupting any other family unit or portion of the building.

C. Provide individual shut off valves for each piece of water supplied equipment.

D. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 220719.

E. Valve Adjustment: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final testing, adjusting, and balancing, inspect each valve for possible leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace valve if leak persists.

F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Division 01.

G. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

H. Install valves with stems pointed up in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.

I. Swing check valves shall be installed in the horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to center line of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0523 – 3 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PLUMBING PIPING © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

J. Valve Identification: Tag each valve in accordance with Section 220553.

K. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0523 – 4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PLUMBING PIPING © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

SECTION 22 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hangers and Supports.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220500 - Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods

C. Section 220523 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping

D. Section 220719 – Plumbing Piping Insulation

E. Section 221005 – Plumbing Piping

F. Section 221006 – Plumbing Piping Specialties

G. Section 224000 – Plumbing Fixtures

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data on hangers and supports. Provide manufacturers catalog information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Conform to ASME B31.9.

B. All individual pipes shall be supported with adjustable clevis hangers, where required size to encompass insulated pipe. 1. Anvil Fig. 260, or approved equal. 2. Anvil Fig. CT-65 or approved equal (uninsulated copper pipe).

C. "Trapeze" hangers shall be Unistrut or B-Line channels, for piping 3" and smaller. For piping 4" to 6" use 2" x 2" x 1/4" angle iron, for piping 8" to 12" use 3" x 3" x 3/8" angle iron using the appropriate diameter rod that will sufficiently support the weight of all of the pipe and their contents being supported and nutted on both sides of the iron.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0529 – 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

D. Hanger Rods, etc.: Mild steel continuous threaded rod, heavy washers and heavy hex nuts.

2.02 ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURE

A. Concrete 1. Precast - Tapered wedge with locking sleeve: Quick Bolt.

B. Steel Beam Structure 1. Beam Clamp a. For loads up to 1070 lbs. - Anvil Fig. 94 or approved equal. b. For loads up to 470 lbs. - Anvil Fig. 93 or approved equal. 2. Welded beam attachment - Anvil Fig. 66. 3. Steel washer and heavy nut for split joists. 4. Angle or channel iron support spanning between beams and joists.

2.03 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS

A. All vertical piping shall be supported at each floor using riser clamps. 1. Anvil Fig. 261 (cast iron, steel, and insulated copper pipe). 2. Anvil Fig. CT 121 (uninsulated copper pipe).

2.04 SHEET METAL SHIELDS

A. Sheet metal shields shall be Anvil Fig. 167 or galvanized sheet metal of equal gauge thickness.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Anvil 2. Felker 3. Hycon 4. Piping Tech. 5. Unistrut 6. B-Line 7. Superstrut 8. Michigan\Erico 9. Holdrite

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 220719.

B. Provide all hangers and supports as required.

3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0529 – 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Whenever copper piping comes directly in contact with steel support system, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to wrap the pipe with two layers of 3M's #33 electrolytic tape. The length of tape shall be such to provide 2" overlap on each side of support 9. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 10. Insulated pipe support shall be supported with polyisocyanurate pipe insulation the same thickness as insulated pipe. Install between pipe and vapor barrier. 11. Supports shall be sized for weights and pipe sizes encountered. 12. Supports shall properly compensate for all thermal expansion and contraction. 13. Supports and their installation for cast iron waste pipe shall also comply with CISPI Standard 310.

B. Horizontal Hanger Spacing Schedule

1. Steel Pipe Hanger Minimum Rod Pipe or Tube Size Spacing Diameter 3/4" and smaller 7' 3/8" 1" 7' 3/8" 1-1/4” 7’ 3/8" 1-1/2 9’ 3/8" 2” 10’ 3/8" 2-1/2” 11’ 1/2” 3” 12’ 1/2” 4” 12’ 5/8” 5” 12' 5/8” 6” 12' 3/4” 10" 12' 7/8” 12” 12' 7/8” 14” 12' 1” 16” 12' 1” 18” 12' 1” 20” 12' 1-1/4”

2. Copper Pipe Hanger Minimum Rod Pipe or Tube Size Spacing Diameter 3/4" and smaller 5' 3/8" 1" 6' 3/8" 1-1/4” 6’ 3/8" 1-1/2 6’ 3/8" 2” 8’ 3/8" 2-1/2” 9’ 1/2” 3” 10’ 1/2" 4” 10’ 5/8” 5” 10’ 5/8” 6” 10’ 3/4” 10" 10’ 7/8” 12” 10’' 7/8”

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0529 – 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

3. No-Hub Cast Iron Pipe for Storm, Sanitary Waste and Sanitary Vent: a. Horizontal Piping: Every other joint, unless over 4 feet then support each joint. 1) Support adjacent to joint, not to exceed 18 inches. 2) Provide bracing for piping to prevent horizontal movement. Spacing shall not exceed 40 foot intervals 3) Support at each horizontal branch connection. 4) Hanger rods shall be per the following table:

Minimum Rod Pipe or Tube Size Diameter 1-1/4" to 2" 3/8" 2-1/2" 1/2" 3" 1/2" 4" 5/8" 5" 1/2" 6" 3/4" 8” 3/4” 10” 7/8” 12” 7/8” 15” 1”

C. Vertical Hanger Spacing Schedule 1. Cast-iron soil pipe, at base and at each story height with spacing not to not to exceed 15 feet. 2. Threaded steel pipe, every other story height not to exceed 25 feet. 3. Copper tubing, at each story. 4. Exposed plastic pipe, 1-1/4 inch and 1-1/2 inch sizes, at four foot intervals. 5. Concealed plastic pipe and exposed plastic pipe two-inch and over; at the base, at each story, and provide mid-story guides.

3.03 BRACKETS, BRACES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide brackets, braces or reinforcing angles as may be required in all partitions, not sufficient in themselves to support fixtures or other wall mounted equipment included in this specification.

B. Pipe shall be supported from the building structure independently or from a separate support, no pipe line shall be supported from another pipe line or piece of equipment.

C. No equipment shall be supported by the piping system itself. All units shall be supported in a manner to allow service without removing large piping segments or valves. Provide structural members as required.

D. On thin masonry or hollow tile walls that are to be finished on opposite side of wall, use 3/8" brass through bolts extended entirely through wall with 3" cut washer on opposite side of wall. Bolt heads and washers shall be concealed under wall finish on opposite side of wall. On walls of accessible pipe spaces, use 3/8" brass through bolts and 3" cut washers exposed in pipe spaces.

E. On brick, masonry block, hollow tile or concrete walls not finished on opposite side of wall, use brass toggle bolts or 3/8" brass bolts extending at least 3" into wall secured in place lead inserts and caulked with silicone type caulk.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0529 – 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0529 – 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0529 – 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates

B. Tags

C. Pipe Labels

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220500 - Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods

C. Section 220519 – Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping

D. Section 220523 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping

E. Section 221005 – Plumbing Piping

F. Section 221006 – Plumbing Piping Specialties

G. Section 224000 – Plumbing Fixtures

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.

C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0553 – 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation

B. Champion America, Inc.

C. Seton Identification Products

2.02 IDENTIFICATION – EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White 2. Letter Height: 1/2 inch 3. Background Color: Black

2.03 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION - PIPE

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Labels: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

C. Pipe: Labels shall describe the contents and direction of flow. Labels shall be secured to pipe with full self-adhesive banding around pipe at each end of label. Labels shall be per the schedule in Part 3.

2.05 IDENTIFICATION – VALVES

A. Colored plastic with 1/2" white letters such as Bakelite attached with a brass chain.

B. Control valves shall be tagged as to service and normal position.

C. Other valves tagged as to service and function.

D. Control valve tags shall have black background, other valves tags shall have colors corresponding to service described above.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0553 – 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion-resistant chain.

C. Install pipe labels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install pipe labels complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Identify pumps, and tanks with nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. Valve list shall be included in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with pipe labels. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service and flow direction. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 50 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

3.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

DOMESTIC COLD WATER G/W DOMESTIC HOT WATER Y/B RECIRCULATING HOT WATER Y/B PLUMBING VENT Y/B RAIN WATER G/W SANITARY DRAIN G/W Y/B =YELLOW BACKGROUND/ BLACK LETTERS G/W = GREEN BACKGROUND/ WHITE LETTERS R/W = RED BACKGROUND/ WHITE LETTERS B/W = BLUE BACKGROUND/ WHITE LETTERS

Band Letter Pipe Size Width Height 1/2" - 1-1/4" 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" - 2" 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" - 6" 12" 1-1/4" 8" - 10" 24" 2-1/2" 10" & UP 32" 3-1/2"

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0553 – 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0553 – 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PIPING AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

SECTION 22 0719

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Piping insulation

B. Jackets and accessories

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220500 - Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods

C. Section 220529 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

D. Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping

E. Section 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2005.

B. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2006.

C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2007.

D. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.

E. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

F. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003.

G. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0719 – 1 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Fiber Glass 2. Johns Manville Corporation 3. Owens Corning Corporation 4. CertainTeed Corporation 5. Armaflex

2.02 TYPE 1 - FIBERGLASS PIPE & FITTING INSULATION

A. Pipe 1. Preformed fiberglass pipe insulation with poly-encapsulated paper jacket and reinforced foil vapor barrier. 2. Jacket shall be suitable for painting. 3. Maximum thermal conductivity of K = .25 Btu in./hr. sq. ft. at 125 degrees F and rated for 0 degrees F to +1000 degrees F service.

B. Fittings 1. Premolded one-piece PVC insulated fitting covers with fiber glass insulation inserts shall be provided on all valves, strainers, elbows, tees, and fittings, etc. Insert shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of K = .28 Btu in./hr. sq. ft. and rated for 0 deg. to 450 deg.

C. Application 1. Insulate all piping in a neat, workmanlike fashion in accordance with thickness listed. Longitudinal laps of jackets shall be sealed and butt joints shall be wrapped with a 3" minimum wide strip of the jacketing material securely sealed in place. 2. In lieu of the above method of application for AP jackets, Contractor may elect to use factory-applied pressure sensitive laps and butt strips. 3. Domestic cold water, domestic hot water, domestic recirculated hot water, tempered water, and rain water conductors shall be insulated as above and have all seam edges of the cover sealed with vapor-barrier adhesive mastic. The circumferential edges of the cover shall be wrapped with vapor-barrier pressure-sensitive color-matching tape. The tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and have an overlap on itself at least two inches on the downward side. 4. Premolded insulated fitting covers shall be factory precut and insulation shall be applied to the fitting. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked in fully insulating the pipe fitting. The one-piece PVC fitting cover will be secured by banding or taping the ends to the adjacent pipe covering. On fittings where the operating temperature exceeds 250

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0719 – 2 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

deg F or where the pipe insulation thickness is greater than 1-1/2", two or more layers of the insulation inserts shall be applied prior to the installation of the PVC fitting cover.

2.03 TYPE 2 - HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE

A. Insulation: ASTM C 533 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177 and C518; 0.40 at 300 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum service temperature: 1200 degrees F. 3. Density: 15 lb./cu ft.

B. Insulating Cement: 1. ASTM C 449/C 449M

C. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered segments which match the piping insulation.

D. Application 1. Insulation shall be installed with joints tightly butted and staggered. Secured with No. 16 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire on square or rectangular surfaces ---1/2" x .015 galvanized steel bands on 9" maximum centers on cylindrical areas. Where required, welded studs, clips or angles shall be provided as anchors for wire and bands. 2. Over the insulation, 1" hexagonal mesh wire shall be tightly stretched in place with edges laced together. Finish shall be Keene Super-Powerhouse Finishing Cement or approved equal, applied 1/4" thick in one coat, trowelled to a smooth finish. All corners are to be reinforced with corner bead.

E. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Thermo-12 – Gold, Industrial Insulation Group

2.04 TYPE 3 - PIPING JACKETS

A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. 3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 per inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 4. Thickness: 20 mil. 5. Flame spread rating of 25 or less. 6. Smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 7. Connections: a. PVC tape b. For food, beverage, and pharmaceutical facilities where USDA and/or FDA regulation compliance is required, provide solvent welded adhesive in lieu of PVC tape.

B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: 1. Compatible with insulation

2.05 TYPE 4 - PIPING SAFETY JACKETS

A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Article 4.19.4. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible Buildings and Facilities. 3. Requirements of applicable building code.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0719 – 3 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

B. Piping Safety Covers: 1. Characteristics: Three-piece molded assembly, minimum 1/8 inch wall thickness, with internal ribs to provide air space between piping and piping insulation jacket, molded to receive manufacturer's snap-clip fasteners. 2. Vinyl Material: Impact-resistant and stain-resistant molded closed-cell anti-microbial vinyl compound, UV-stable, non-fading, non-yellowing; having the following performance characteristics: a. Burning Characteristics: 0 seconds Average Time of Burning (ATB), 0 mm Area of Burning (AEB), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 635. b. Thermal Conductivity: K-value 1.17, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177. c. Indentation Hardness: 60, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240, using Type A durometer. 3. Trap Assembly Cover: Three-piece assembly, with removable clean-out nut enclosure. 4. Angle Stop Covers: Formed with hinged cap for access to valve without requiring cover removal. 5. Configurations: In accordance with manufacturer's product data for Project piping configurations indicated on Drawings. 6. Color: China White, gloss finish; paintable. 7. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard re-usable snap-clip fasteners; wire-tie fasteners not permitted. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Truebro Lav-Guard 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0719 – 4 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation as described by Type 2 in Part 2 – Products, suitable for the planned temperature range.

I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, Comply with Division 7 firestopping.

3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Domestic Water: Hot, Cold, Recirculating, and Tempered 1. All piping & fittings shall be provided with Type 1 fiberglass insulation, as described by Part 2 – Products, and in accordance with the following table:

Insulation Piping System Nominal Pipe Size Thickness Cold Water and Tempered Water All 1” (less than 105°F) Hot Water, Recirculating Hot Water, and 1-1/4” and less 1” Tempered Water (105°F to140°F) Hot Water, Recirculating Hot Water, and 1-1/2” to 8” 1-1/2” Tempered Water (105°F to 140°F) Hot Water, Recirculating Hot Water, and 1-1/4” and less 1-1/2” Tempered Water (141°F to 200°F) Hot Water, Recirculating Hot Water, and 1-1/2” to 8” 2” Tempered Water (141°F to 200°F)

B. Piping Jacket 1. All exposed piping, including piping tunnels, and except in mechanical rooms, shall be covered with piping jacket as described by Type 3 in Part 2- Products.

C. Pipe Safety Covers 1. Sinks where water supplies and/or waste pipes are exposed shall be provided with insulated pipe safety covers, specified herein as insulation Type 4 in Part 2 – Products.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0719 – 5 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 0719 – 6 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

SECTION 22 1005

PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe and pipe fittings for: 1. Domestic water 2. Storm Sewer 3. Sanitary sewer 4. Sanitary vent

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 078413 – Penetration Firestopping

C. Section 220500 - Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods

D. Section 220519 – Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping

E. Section 220523 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping

F. Section 220529 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

G. Section 220553 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

H. Section 220719 – Plumbing Piping Insulation

I. Section 221006 – Plumbing Piping Specialties

J. Section 223000 – Plumbing Equipment

K. Section 224000 – Plumbing Fixtures

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998.

B. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18).

C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).

D. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1988.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 1 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

F. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a.

G. ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; latest edition.

H. ASTM A 234 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2004.

I. ASTM A 888 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; latest edition, including annex A1.

J. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.

K. ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002.

L. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.

M. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2003a.

N. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004.

O. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2004a.

P. ASTM D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2002).

Q. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2004a.

R. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 ANSI/AWWA C651).

S. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2005 edition.

T. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; latest edition.

1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish complete piping systems for the following: 1. Potable water 2. Storm Sewer 3. Sanitary waste 4. Sanitary vent

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 2 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Provide all hangers and supports as required.

C. Make connections to all equipment, fixtures and devices.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations.

B. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX).

C. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SANITARY WASTE – NO HUB CAST IRON

A. Underground (Within building to 5'-0" from building) 1. Pipe: a. No-hub, cast iron, service weight, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 2. Fittings: a. No-hub, cast iron, DWV, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 3. Joints: a. Standard duty no hub couplings, ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310 with ASTM C564 rubber sleeve, corrugated stainless steel shield, and all stainless clamping bands. 4. Markings: a. The specified pipe and fittings shall be marked with country of origin and identification of the original manufacturer in addition to markings required by referenced standards.

B. Above Ground 1. Pipe: a. No-hub, cast iron, service weight, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 2. Fittings: a. No-hub, cast iron, DWV, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 3. Joints: a. Standard duty no hub couplings, ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310 with ASTM C564 rubber sleeve, corrugated stainless steel shield, and all stainless clamping bands. 4. Markings: a. The specified pipe and fittings shall be marked with country of origin and identification of the original manufacturer in addition to markings required by referenced standards.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 3 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2.02 SANITARY VENT – NO HUB CAST IRON

A. Above Ground 1. Pipe: a. No-hub, cast iron, service weight, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 2. Fittings: a. No-hub, cast iron, DWV, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 3. Joints: a. Standard duty no hub couplings, ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310 with ASTM C564 rubber sleeve, corrugated stainless steel shield, and all stainless clamping bands. 4. Markings: a. The specified pipe and fittings shall be marked with country of origin and identification of the original manufacturer in addition to markings required by referenced standards.

2.03 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM (WITHIN BUILDING) – COPPER

A. Above Ground – Hot and Cold Distribution, Recirculating Hot Water, Tempered Water 1. Pipe: a. 2” and smaller: Copper, Type L, ASTM B88, hard drawn. b. 2-1/2” to 6”: Copper, Type L, ASTM B88, hard drawn. 2. Fittings: a. 2” and smaller: Wrought copper, solder joint fittings, brass or cast bronze b. 2-1/2” to 6”: Wrought copper, solder joint fittings, brass or cast bronze 3. Joints: a. 2” and smaller: Screwed or pressure type with soldered joints. b. 2-1/2” to 6”: Screwed or pressure type with brazed joints. 1) Brazing filler materials shall be AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper- phosphorus allows for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2) Contractor shall be required to have a certificate of Welding and Brazing qualifications. 4. Lead free requirements: a. Potable water pipes and fittings with lead content must not exceed 0.25 percent lead in the wetted surface material. b. Solder and flux for potable water systems shall contain less than 0.2 percent lead.

2.04 STORM – NO HUB CAST IRON

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 4 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

E. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.

F. Provide a sleeve set with water stop plate at all exterior wall penetrations, sleeve shall be minimum schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Sleeve inside diameter shall encompass pipe and link seal. Provide link seal as described in Part 2, Products.

G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

H. Where uncovered, exposed pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings, they shall be fitted with escutcheon plates. Plates shall be set tight against wall or floor. Plates on other than exposed pipes shall be prime coated.

I. Make connections to all equipment, fixtures and devices.

J. Where soil and/or drain pipes are required to pass over areas used in the preparation or storage of food or drink, such piping shall be protected against leakage or condensation as described below: 1. The installation shall be made with the least possible number of joints and shall be installed so as to connect to the nearest adequately sized vertical stack. 2. Openings through floors over such areas shall be sealed watertight to the floor construction. 3. Floor and shower drains installed above such areas shall be equipped with integral seepage pans. 4. Cleanouts shall be extended through the floor construction above. 5. Piping subject to operation at temperatures that will form condensation on the exterior of the pipe shall be thermally insulated. 6. Where pipes are installed in ceilings above such areas, the ceiling shall be of the removable type, or shall be provided with access panels in order to form a ready access for inspection of piping.

3.02 DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION

A. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.

B. Provide domestic hot and cold water to all outlets and fixtures as shown on drawings or specified herein.

C. All water piping shall be pitched to drain points and up from hot water tanks, supply mains or risers 1/8" per ten feet wherever possible. 1. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. 2. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 5 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

D. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.

E. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

F. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

G. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment bypass, part of systems, or vertical risers.

H. Provide drain valves at base of all risers and at all low points in piping.

I. All materials used in potable water systems shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.

3.03 WASTE AND VENT PIPING

A. The continuous waste and vent piping method shall be followed for the entire plumbing system.

B. Each plumbing fixture trap, including traps for floor drains, shall be provided with a vent.

C. Horizontal drainage piping shall be run in practical alignment and a uniform slope of not less than 1/4 inch per foot or toward the point of disposal provided that, where it is impractical due to the depth of the street sewer, to the structural features, or to the arrangement of a building or structure to obtain a slope of ¼ inch per foot, such pipe or piping 4 inches or larger in diameter shall be permitted to have a slope of not less than 1/8 inch per foot where first approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

D. Double wye drainage fittings shall not be installed in the horizontal position.

E. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. Vent stacks shall be extended at least 12" above roof in frost proof jackets. Size of vents passing through roof shall be as shown on plan with a minimum size being 2". Roof jackets shall not be placed less than 4'-0" from edge of roof. Vent outlets shall be located a minimum of 10’-0” horizontally from any ventilation opening.

F. Waste Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.

G. Installation, support, and bracing of cast iron sanitary sewer piping shall comply with the installation procedures described in CISPI 301 and CISPI 310. In no case shall hanger support spacing be a dimension less than as required by code.

H. Changes in direction in sanitary drainage piping must be made by appropriate use of wyes and bends. Sanitary tees shall not be installed where the direction of flow changes from either vertical to horizontal or horizontal to horizontal.

I. All fixture vents as well as vents serving basins, interceptors, or equipment; must rise within 45 degrees from the vertical at least 6 inches above the flood level before offsetting horizontally or connecting to a branch vent.

J. The diameter of an individual vent shall be not less than 1-1/4 inches nor less than one-half the diameter of the drain to which it is connected.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 6 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

K. The aggregate cross-sectional area of vent pipe for the building shall be not less than that of the largest required building sewer, as determined from the Minnesota Plumbing Code, 2015 edition, Table 703.2. Vent pipes from fixtures located upstream from pumps, ejectors, backwater valves, or other devices that obstruct the free flow of air and other gases between the building sewer and the outside atmosphere shall not be used for meeting the cross- sectional area venting requirements of this section.

L. 3” floor drains and other similar 6 DFU fixtures shall be served by a minimum 2” vent.

M. A common vent serving two fixtures connecting independently to a vertical drain shall be through an approved double fixture fitting. Double sanitary tees shall not be used for vertical common vent. Not more than two fixture traps may be served by a common vent.

N. For plumbing fixture drains connecting to a vertical waste pipe, such fixture drains shall connect with sanitary tee fittings. Except for water closets, fixture drain fittings shall be configured such that the vent opening will be positioned above the weir of the fixture trap.

3.04 STORM PIPING

A. All gravity drainage storm piping shall be pitched at 1/8" per foot minimum unless indicated otherwise. Piping shall be properly supported so that it will not sag and form pockets.

B. Double wye drainage fittings shall not be installed in the horizontal position.

C. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/8 inch per foot slope.

D. Installation, support, and bracing of storm sewer piping shall comply with the installation procedures described in CISPI 301 and CISPI 310. In no case shall hanger support spacing be a dimension less than as required by code.

E. Changes in direction in storm drainage piping must be made by appropriate use of wyes and bends. Sanitary tees are not allowed where the direction of flow changes from either vertical to horizontal or horizontal to horizontal.

F. In no case shall storm water piping be installed such that storm water discharge flows onto the public sidewalk.

3.05 FLASHINGS

A. Install flashings at all cleanouts, roof drains, floor drains, floor sinks, and area drains.

3.06 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Comply with Section 220500.

3.07 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. New or repaired potable water systems shall be disinfected prior to use where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by the Health Authority or, in case no method is prescribed by it, the following: 1. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until potable water appears at the points of outlet.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 7 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2. The system or parts thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing not less than 50 parts per million of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved- off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or, the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing not less than 200 parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours. 3. Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until the chlorine residual in the water coming from the system does not exceed the chlorine residual in the flushing water. 4. The procedure shall be repeated where it is shown by bacteriological examination made by an approved agency that contamination persists in the system.

3.08 CLEANING

A. Cleaning 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent Work areas. 2. Repair or replace damaged installed products.

B. Protection 1. Protect installed Work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.

3.09 PLUMBING TESTS - GENERAL

A. In Minnesota; for installations where new waste, vent, or storm piping will connect to an existing piping system; the Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry recommends that a cleanout be provided where new piping connects with existing piping to facilitate required testing of the new installation.

B. The underground combined water / fire service piping system testing and acceptance procedures shall be performed by the Division 21 Contractor in accordance with NFPA 13, chapter 10. Division 22 is responsible to make all necessary corrections as required if leaks are found during testing.

C. For storm water piping, testing is not required for outside rainwater leaders, perforated or open draintile, or portions of the storm drainage and sewer systems that are located more than ten feet from buildings, more than 50 feet from water wells and that do not pass through soil or water identified as being contaminated.

3.10 PLUMBING TESTS – WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

A. Domestic Water: Upon completion of a section or of the entire hot and cold water supply system, it shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure not less than the working pressure under which it is to be used. The water used for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply. Except for plastic piping, a 50 psi air pressure shall be permitted to be substituted for the water test. In either method of test, the piping shall withstand the test without leaking for a period of not less than 15 minutes.

3.11 PLUMBING TESTS – DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS

A. The piping of the plumbing, drainage, and venting systems shall be tested with water or air except that plastic pipe shall not be tested with air. The Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be permitted to require the removal of cleanouts, etc., to ascertain whether the pressure has reached all parts of the system. After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, they shall be submitted to a final test.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 8 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Water Rough-In Test. The water test shall be applied to the drainage and vent systems either in its entirety or in sections. Where the test is applied to the entire system, openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow. Where the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged, except the highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than a 10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections, not less than the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 10 feet of the system) shall have been submitted to a test of less than a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for not less than 15 minutes before inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at points.

C. Air Rough-In Test. The air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to a suitable opening and, after closing all other inlets and outlets to the system, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds-force per square inch (psi) or sufficient to balance a column of mercury 10 inches in height. The pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of not less than 15 minutes.

D. Sanitary and Vent Systems - Final: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the roof and building drain openings shall be sealed and the system subjected to a manometer test. The system shall maintain a pressure differential of 1" of water column for a period of not less than 15 minutes. The pressure shall remain constant without the addition of air.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 9 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1005 – 10 PLUMBING PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves

B. Water Hammer Arrestors

C. Cleanouts

D. Floor Drains

E. Escutcheon plates

F. Unions and flanges

G. Roof Drains

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220500 - Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods

C. Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping

D. Section 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011).

B. ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers, and water hammer arrestors.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 1 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform Work in accordance with State plumbing code.

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices.

D. Water pipe and fittings with a lead content which exceeds a weighted average of 0.25 percent in the wetted surface material, as established in the Safe Drinking Water Act, section 1417(d), shall be prohibited in piping systems used to convey potable water.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE – POINT OF USE LOW FLOW FOR LAVATORIES

A. Thermostatic Mixing Valve 1. Bronze body 2. Mixing valve shall be capable of delivering at least 5 GPM at a temperature between 60 degrees F and 120 degrees F with pressure drop 10 PSI or less. 3. Mixing valve shall have a minimum rated flow of 0.25 GPM. 4. 1/2” hot and cold inlet, 1/2” tempered outlet 5. Field adjustable outlet temperature. Set at max 110F. 6. Assembly shall comply with ASSE Standard 1070. 7. Assembly shall comply with the lead content restrictions described in Part 1. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Leonard 270-LF

2.02 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Stainless steel shell, elastomer or stainless steel nested bellows.

B. Arrestor sizing and installation shall conform to Standard PDI-WH201.

C. Size shall be adequate to handle fixtures served, see schedule listed in Part 3.

D. Assembly shall comply with the lead content restrictions described in Part 1.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Josam Series 75000 2. Wade Shokstop 3. Zurn Shoktrol 4. Smith 5000 Series

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 2 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

A. Finished Floors: 1. Coated cast iron body, internal gasketed ABS plug, adjustable top assembly with secured scoriated satin Nikaloy round cover. Furnish recessed cover for vinyl tile floor and square top for quarry or ceramic tile floor. Carpeted floors shall use carpet markers. 2. Provide membrane clamp ring. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Josam 56000 Series b. Zurn Z-1400 c. Smith 4020 and 4140 Round d. Smith 4040 and 4160 Square

B. Covers for Walls and Ceilings - Finished Areas 1. Square access cover with chrome plated top, anchor lugs and coverplate secured with screws. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Wade W-8480-S b. Josam 58640 c. Zurn Z-1460 d. Smith 4735.

C. Covers for Walls and Ceilings - Unfinished Areas 1. Round polished stainless steel access coverplate with countersunk screws. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Wade 8480-R b. Josam 58600 c. Zurn Z-1469 d. Smith 4472

2.04 FLOOR DRAINS AND AREA DRAINS - ABOVE GRADE

A. Finished Areas 1. Body - coated cast iron, bottom caulked or no-hub outlet, drainage flange, weep holes, flashing collar. 2. Strainer - 6" round, threaded adjustable height, satin nickel finish. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Wade W-1100-STD6 b. Josam 30000-6A c. Smith 2005 (or 2010)-A06 d. Zurn Z-415-6B

2.05 FLOOR DRAINS AND AREA DRAINS - ON GRADE

A. Finished Areas 1. Body - coated cast iron, bottom caulked or no-hub outlet, drainage flange, weep holes, flashing collar, and backwater valve. Omit backwater valve if drain is used as tell-tale drain in a kitchen. 2. Strainer - 6" round, threaded adjustable height, satin nickel finish 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Wade W-1100-STD6-31 b. Josam 30000-6AJ c. Smith 2005 (or 2010)-A06-V (or -BFV for ball float) d. Zurn Z-415-6B-V

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 3 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

A. Vent stacks for sewer, soil waste and drain lines shall be extended at least 12" above roof and shall be encased in frost proof jackets, Moore, Sure Seal or equal, each having an air space of at least 1" between the outside surface of pipe and inside surface of frost jacket. The top of the frost jackets shall be designed as to permit the insertion therein of a testing plug of such form that it can be readily seen until removed and said plug shall be removed at once after a final inspection has been made and approved by Engineer.

B. Roof jackets shall be constructed of 14 gauge galvanized iron for all sizes 6" and smaller, or factory molded rubber pipe seals with stainless steel clamps as per manufacturer's recommendations, Goodyear or approved equal.

2.07 DRAIN AND CLEANOUT FLASHING

A. Chloraloy polyethylene laminated flashing. Flashing shall be a minimum of 32" x 32".

2.08 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous pipe: ASTM A 181, Class 150 forged steel slip-on weld flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper pipe: Class 150 companion bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

2.09 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. All 2” and smaller copper piping connections to a dissimilar metal shall be made with insulated type dielectric unions or flanges.

B. All 2-1/2” and larger copper piping connections to a dissimilar metal shall be made with insulated dielectric flange kits. Dielectric flange kit shall consist of a 1/8” phenolic retainer with a Viton sealing ring. Provide one phenolic sleeve and two 1/8” phenolic washers and two 1/8” galvanized steel washers for each bolt.

C. Dielectric flange kits shall be Class 150 rated at 175 psig and conform to ANSI B16.42 and B16.24.

2.10 INTERIOR TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drain – 6” Wide Stainless Fiberglass Grate 1. Body – 6” wide modular section trench drain, 10’ foot standard lengths capable of being divided in 2’ increments. Fiber Reinforced Polyester (FRP) fiberglass body, radiused bottom, 1.04% internal slope. Provide steel top frame to support grates. 2. Grate - Heavy duty, reinforced, fiberglass slotted grate. 3. Outlets – outlet size to match piping sizes indicated on drawings. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Zurn Z806-HGG b. or approved equal

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 4 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

A. Conventional Roof Drain 1. Body – lacquer coated cast iron, bottom caulked or no-hub outlet, large sump, roof flange. 2. Dome - Aluminum dome vandal proof secure. 3. Provide with under deck clamp and extensions for insulation encountered. 4. Assembly ASME A112.6.4. 5. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type. a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. b. Adjustable under deck clamp. c. Roof sump receiver. d. Waterproofing flange. e. Leveling frame. f. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Wade W-3000-DF b. Josam Series 21500 or 21000 c. Smith 1010 or 1015 d. Zurn Z-100-E

B. Overflow Roof Drain 1. Same as above except with adjustable plastic standpipe.

C. Downspout Nozzle 1. Body - cast bronze nozzle, loose wall flange, threaded inlet 2. Finish - rough bronze. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Wade W-3940 b. Josam 25010 c. Smith 1770 d. Zurn Z-199

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Arrestors shall be placed at all flush valve groups and directly upstream of all solenoid valves and similar fast closing valves.

B. Arrestors shall be installed in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute "Standards PDI WH201".

C. Arrestor sizing for plumbing fixtures shall be as follows:

PDI designation Water Supply Fixture Units on Supply Branch

AA 1-3 A 1-11 B 12-32 C 33-60 D 61-113 E 114-154 F 155-330

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 5 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

E. Arrestor sizing for individual runs to remote equipment for pressures between 65 and 85 PSI shall be in accordance with PDI standard WH201, Table V1-A.

3.02 CLEANOUTS

A. Provide additional cleanouts at locations as required by Minnesota Plumbing Code, 4714.707.4 and 4714.719.0.

B. Cleanouts above food and beverage establishments shall be extended through the floor construction above.

C. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes they serve up to 4” in diameter and not less than 4” in diameter for larger piping.

D. A cleanout must be installed where there is an increase in pipe size from 2 inches to 3 inches and from 3 inches to 4 inches.

E. For trap arms 2-1/2” diameter and smaller, provide a cleanout where the change in direction exceeds 90 degrees. For trap arms 3 inches in diameter and larger, provide a cleanout where the change of direction exceeds 135 degrees

F. Each horizontal drainage pipe shall be provided with a cleanout at its upper terminal, and each run of piping that is more than 100 feet in total developed length shall be provided with a cleanout for each 100 feet, or fraction thereof, in length of such piping.

G. An additional clean out shall be provided in a drainage line for each aggregate horizontal change of direction exceeding 135 degrees.

H. Except for waste branches serving sinks, or urinals; cleanouts are not required at the following locations: 1. Horizontal drain lines less than 5 feet in length. 2. Excepting the building drain and its horizontal branches, a cleanout shall not be required on a pipe or piping that is above the floor level of the lowest floor of the building.

I. Cleanouts are not required on a horizontal drainage pipe installed on a slope of 72 degrees or less from the vertical angle.

J. Each cleanout for an interceptor shall be outside of such interceptor.

K. Cleanouts shall be provided for pressure drainage systems at locations as would otherwise be required for gravity drainage systems.

L. Cleanouts for drains that pass through a backwater valve shall be clearly identified with a permanent label stating, "backwater valve downstream".

M. Cleanouts shall be provided at the base of each soil or waste stack and at the base of each rainwater leader.

N. Cleanouts shall be installed on the building and storm sewer within the building immediately near the building drain and storm sewer exits from the building.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 6 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

P. Where base of stack cleanouts are to be installed at rated shaft locations, provide rated access panels of a sufficient size to properly open the cleanout cover and of a sufficient fire rating to maintain the required shaft rating. Refer to architectural Drawings for rated shaft locations and ratings. 2012 IBC Table 716.5 notes the following opening protection requirements for rated shafts: 1. A 1-hour shaft enclosure requires a minimum 1-hour fire rated access panel. 2. A 2-hour shaft enclosure requires a minimum 1-1/2 hour fire rated access panel.

Q. Where two fixture traps connect to a vertical drain at the same level, a cleanout sized for the drain is required on the vertical drain or vent. If the vertical fixture drain is accessible through the trap opening, the cleanout may be eliminated.

3.03 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Provide p-trap for all floor drains, trench drains, and floor sinks. Area drains to be installed without p-trap.

B. Install floor drains without backwater valves on all tell-tale drains in kitchens.

C. P-traps used for shower drains shall be glued PVC when connected to PVC piping systems.

3.04 ROOF JACKETS

A. Vent stacks from sewer, soil, waste and drain lines shall be extended at least 12" above roof in frost proof jackets. Size of vents passing through roof shall be as shown on plan with a minimum size being 2". Roof jackets shall not be placed less than 4'-0" from edge of roof. Vent outlets shall be located a minimum of 10’-0” horizontally from any ventilation opening.

3.05 ROOF DRAINS AND DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES

A. Pipe overflow rain water leaders to downspout nozzle, mount 18" above grade. Provide concrete splash block. Coordinate location to discharge clear of sidewalks or pedestrian crossings.

3.06 FLASHINGS

A. Install flashings at all cleanouts, roof drains, floor drains, floor sinks, trench drains, and area drains.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 7 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 1006 – 8 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water closets

B. Urinals

C. Lavatories

D. Water Coolers

E. Sinks

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220500 - Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods

C. Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping

D. Section 223000 - Plumbing Equipment

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 01.

B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.

D. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

F. Shop Drawings shall include all product literature for items listed. 1. Fixtures 2. Faucets 3. Valves 4. Traps 5. Supplies

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 - Product Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All fasteners for restroom plumbing fixtures shall be vandal resistant.

2.02 WATER CLOSETS

A. WC-1 - Floor Mounted - Exposed Manual Flush Valve - Elongated Bowl - 1.6 gpf - ADA 1. Fixture: White vitreous china, siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 1.6 gallons per flush, floor mounted, 1-1/2" top spud, bolt caps. Manufacturers: American Standard 2234.015 Madera, Kohler K-4350 Wellcomme, Zurn Z5655-BWL. 2. Flush Valve: Exposed chrome plated with 1” screw driver angle stop with protective cap, 1.6 gallons per flush, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection, spud coupling for 1-1/2” top spud, wall and spud flanges. Manufacturer: Sloan Royal 111-1.6. 3. Seat: Extra heavy duty solid plastic for elongated bowl, open front, black, stainless steel posts, self-sustaining check hinge. Manufacturers: Bemis 1655 SS/C, Church 9500SSC, Zurn Z5956SS-EL.

B. WC-1A - Floor Mounted - Concealed Sensor Flush Valve - Elongated Bowl - 1.6 gpf - ADA - Ligature Resistant 1. Fixture: White painted, stainless steel, siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 1.6 gallons per flush, floor mounted, 1-1/2" top spud, bolt caps. Manufacturers: Whitehall WH21420ADA-W 2. Flush Valve: Concealed, chrome plated manual push button, with 1” screw driver angle stop with protective cap, 1.6 gallons per flush, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection, spud coupling for 1-1/2” rear spud. Manufacturer: Sloan Royal 611-1.6. 3. Seat: Integral to the fixture.

2.03 LAVATORIES

A. LAV-1 - Wall Mounted Wash Basin - ADA 1. Fixture: Sink integral with countertop. See Architectural drawings. 2. Faucet: Individual hot and cold valves with 4" wrist blade handles, rigid gooseneck spout, vandal-resistant aerator and 4" centers. Manufacturer: Chicago 786- HGN2AE3AB. 3. Drain: Grid strainer and 1-1/4" tailpiece, chrome finish. Manufacturers: Kohler K-7729-A, Chicago 327-XCP. 4. Provide point of use ASSE 1070 Mixing Valve on hot water supply to faucet. See specification Section 221006.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

2.04 SINKS

A. SK-1 - Stainless Steel, Single Compartment, 19-1/2" x 22"x 5-1/2", 18 Gauge - ADA 1. Sink: Single compartment, 16"x16"x5-1/2"D, 18-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, self- rimming, faucet ledge, three holes on 4-inch centers, undercoated. Manufacturer: Elkay LRAD2022. 2. Trim: Individual hot and cold valves with 4" wrist blades on 4-inch centers, 8" gooseneck spout with aerator. Manufacturer: Chicago No. 785-CP. 3. Provide point of use ASSE 1070 Mixing Valve on hot water supply to faucet. See specification Section 221006. 4. 5. Drain: Stainless steel body, stainless conical strainer, removable lift-up knob with neoprene stopper, 1-1/2" chrome plated brass tailpiece. Manufacturer: Elkay LK99.

2.05 SHOWERS

A. SH-1 - Shower - ADA - Enclosure by General Contractor 1. Faucet: Single lever, washerless shower mixing valve with scald guard, pressure balanced, adjustable limit stop, shower head and arm, 1/2" inlets and outlet with screw- driver stops and 2.5 gpm flow-restrictor and with hand shower with 60" flexible metal hose, 30” slide bar. Manufacturer: Symmons 96-500-B30-V-L-X. 2. Control valves shall comply with the latest edition of ANSI/ASSI 1016. 3. Shower Drain: See Section 22 1006 for floor drains in finished areas.

2.06 WATER COOLERS

A. EWC-1 - Electric Water Cooler With Bottle Filler - Single Station 1. Fountain and bottle filler shall deliver 8.0 GPH of 50 degrees water at 90 degrees ambient. Water flow rate shall be between 1.1 and 1.5 GPM when activated. One piece polished stainless steel top with integral drain grid. Cabinet color shall be gray-beige. Separate valve and diaphragm automatic stream regulator shall be mounted within the cabinet. Flush-to-wall mounting. Provide wall bracket. 2. Matching top mounted bottle filling unit shall employ electronic sensor for no touch activation and a 30 second shut off timer. 3. The bottle filler shall incorporate a display counter to indicate the quantity of 12 or 16 ounce bottles saved from a landfill by use of the filler option. 4. The fountain and bottle filler shall include provision for internal, replaceable, water filter with visual interface display indicating when filter requires replacement. 5. Refrigeration system shall employ high efficiency, HFC-134a positive start compressor, non-pressurized counterflow cooling coil controlled by positive sensing thermostat. 6. Cooler shall comply with ADA and ANSI 117.1 for both visual and motion disabilities. Cooler shall comply with the latest edition of ARI Standard 1010. Units shall be totally lead free in any part that comes in contact with the potable water. 7. Fountain shall have front and side push bars and flexible bubbler hood. 8. Manufacturer: Elkay LZS8WS.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

2.07 LAUNDRY BOXES

A. UB-1 - Washer Box 1. Fully recessed, 20 gauge, white enamel housing with 1-1/2" drain, 1/2" combination brass sweat connection with faucets. Manufacturer: Guy Gray Model T200.

2.08 SERVICE SINKS

A. MB-1 - Janitors' Sink - Floor Set - 36" x 24" 1. Fixture: 36" x 24" x 10" deep, crushed stone, and polyester resin construction, vinyl bumperguard. Manufacturers: Fiat Model MSB 3624, Swan MS2436, or Stern Williams MTB-3624. 2. Fittings: Double faucet with vacuum breaker, 3/4" hose threaded spout, adjustable wall brace, pail hook, flanged arms with integral stops, chrome plated. Manufacturers: Chicago Faucet No. 897-CP, Kohler K-8907. 3. Drain: 3" cast brass, chrome plated with dome type strainer and lint basket made from Type 302 stainless steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to architectural Drawings and details for exact locations of fixtures and equipment.

B. All fixtures and trim shall be of first grade quality and finish, free from flaws and scratches.

C. All fixtures shall have ground backs. Groups of fixtures shall be matched. All fixtures shall be white unless otherwise specified.

D. Exposed flush valve, waste and supply pipe at the fixtures shall be chromium plated pipe with escutcheons.

E. Install components level and plumb.

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint sealants" for sealant and installation requirements. Omit sealant on counter set stainless steel sinks unless otherwise directed by manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. All fixtures shall be equipped with chrome angle 1/4 turn ball stops on water supplies. Public areas shall have loose key handles and chrome lever handles in private areas. Manufacturer: Brasscraft KT Series.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

H. Provide 17 gauge adjustable "P" trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning for all fixtures above grade.

I. All lavatory and sink hot and cold-water supply and waste lines not concealed within a cabinet shall be insulated with piping insulation covers. Comply with Specification Section 220719.

J. Handle location on ADA-compliant flushometers must be on the wide side of a water closet stall and may not be more than 44 inches above the floor.

K. Flush levers on ADA-compliant flush tank water closets are allowed to be either on the left or the right side of tank and are not required to be on the wide side of the stall.

L. ADA designated water closets shall be installed with the top of the seat set between 17” and 19” above floor. Confirm exact mounting heights with architectural Drawings.

M. ADA designated urinals shall be installed with rim of the fixture set no higher than 17” above floor. Confirm exact mounting heights with architectural Drawings.

N. The centerline of a water closet shall be set no closer than 15” from a wall or partition or 30” center-to-center to another water closet or similar fixture.

O. The centerline of a urinal shall be set no closer than 12” from a wall or partition or 24” center- to-center to another urinal.

P. Self-closing or self-closing metering faucets shall be installed on lavatories intended to serve the transient public, such as those in, but not limited to, service stations, train stations, airports, restaurants, and convention halls. Metered faucets shall deliver a maximum of 0.25 gallons per metering cycle.

Q. Urinals shall have an average water consumption not to exceed 1.0 gallon of water per flush.

R. Water closets shall have an average water consumption not to exceed 1.6 gallon of water per flush.

S. For each public-use lavatory and/or public-use sink where hand washing will likely occur, provide an individual thermostatic mixing valve to limit the maximum outlet temperature to 110°F. 1. The mixing valve shall comply with ASSE 1070. 2. Connect mixing valve to hot and cold water with individual stops on inlet to mixing valve. 3. Route tempered water from mixing valve to hot water supply on faucet. 4. If a mixing valve is not specified with a sink or lavatory fixture under Part 2, refer to Section 221006 for additional information.

T. Mixing valves serving lavatories shall either be provided with integral check valves or check valves shall be provided on the hot and cold water supplies to the mixing valve.

3.04 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Provide and all hangers, carriers, brackets, wall supports, bolts etc., required for proper installation.

B. Provide concealed hangers necessary to support all wall hung plumbing fixtures. Concealed hangers for lavatories, urinals and similar fixtures are to be provided with fastening devices to securely anchor hangers on walls or partitions.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 5 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

C. Use additional bracing and brackets to support fixtures as may be furnished by the General Contractor. See Architectural Drawings for details.

D. All anchor holes in the fixtures are to be utilized.

E. Carriers shall be Josam, Wade, Zurn or Smith.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 6 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

3.05 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Review millwork shop Drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.

B. Coordinate with Division 26 for power to the sensor transformer and between the power module and the trim.

C. Refer to Architectural Drawings for fixture mounting heights.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

B. Do not permit use of fixtures during construction.

3.08 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN

A. When fixture rough-in is indicated on Drawings, provide required waste water and vent piping in sufficient size to serve the proposed fixture. Cap all unconnected openings.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 7 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 22 4000 – 8 PLUMBING FIXTURES Intake/Triage - Pick Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

SECTION 230500

HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies basic materials, methods, and workmanship requirements for the Work described in Division 23.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Division 23 Specifications Sections

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The Work to be accomplished under this specification, accompanying Division 23 specification Sections, and the accompanying Drawings, includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the proper completion of all HVAC Work under the Division 23 contract.

1.04 DEMOLITION

A. Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition of HVAC system components noted in the contract Documents. Refer to Part 3 for additional demolition requirements.

1.05 INSPECTION OF SITE

C. Additional compensation shall not be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding as to the amount of Work involved or his lack of knowledge of any site conditions that may affect his Work when such information is provided in the contract Documents and/or is readily visible on site.

D. Any apparent variance of the plan or specification from the existing conditions at the site shall be called to the attention of the Engineer during the bid period so clarification can be made by addendum.

1.06 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 1 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 A. All required fees and inspections for Division 23 Work shall be obtained and/or arranged for by the Division 23 Contractor.

B. All required permit fees, plan review fees, and inspection fees for Division 23 Work shall be paid for by the Division 23 Contractor.

C. Regular inspections shall be arranged by the Contractor as required by any and all regulations. All charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations or review of plans and specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.

1.07 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, ordinances, laws, regulations, industry standards, and utility company regulations.

B. In case of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, and utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any such difference.

C. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any Work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations, they shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies.

1.08 DRAWINGS

B. Drawings of the HVAC systems are diagrammatic and are intended to indicate approximate location and/or direction, and approximate arrangement of the Work, but not necessarily the exact detail or exact arrangement of construction.

C. The Division 23 Contractor shall consult all Drawings, including: architectural, landscape, structural, mechanical, electrical, kitchen or laboratory layout, etc.; and shall confirm any materials, finishes, locations of ceilings, structural members, pipes, ducts, recessed lighting fixtures, conduits, etc. which may affect their installation. This coordination shall occur prior to installation.

F. The Division 23 Contractor shall leave adequate room for the installation of equipment by other Contractors items where space is limited. The Division 23 Contractor shall be cautioned that in certain instances, space may be limited to the extent that there may be only one arrangement of equipment or material which may be feasible.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 2 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 G. The plans and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either one shall be as binding as if called for in both.

H. Where a disagreement exists between the plans and specifications, the item or arrangement of better quality or greater quantity which results in a higher overall cost shall be included in the bid.

1.09 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

B. Within the contract Documents, the word “Provide” shall be considered to be equivalent to the phrase “Furnish and Install”.

C. Words used in the present tense include the future; words stated in the masculine gender include the feminine and neuter; the singular number includes the plural and the plural, the singular.

1.10 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES

A. The building will be in use during these operations. The Division 23 Contractor shall schedule his Work, in consultation with other trades, and carry it out in such a manner as to least inconvenience the occupants due to interruption of mechanical services.

1.11 USE OF FACILITY

1.12 CLEANUP

A. Each trade shall periodically clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc. resulting from his Work or operations, leaving the job and the equipment furnished under any or all contracts in a clean condition.

1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, AND PROJECT DOCUMENTATION

A. Shop Drawings to be submitted shall be as noted in the General Conditions.

B. Refer to Division 23 Sections additional Project documentation requirements for specific systems.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 3 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Contractor shall prepare 3 ring binders. Each binder shall contain material and equipment data sheets, installation details, instructions, and schematics of actual equipment and operations directions supplied by the manufacturer for each item of equipment. Final acceptance of the Work will be withheld until such data has been presented complete to the Engineer for transmission to the Owner. The manual shall be available for instruction of operations and maintenance of equipment and systems.

B. The number of manuals shall be as stated in the Special Conditions with a minimum of three (3).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Sleeves shall be uncoated or galvanized steel pipe not less than Schedule 40.

B. Sleeves in rated walls shall be as required for U. L. listing.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND VALVES

A. Comply with Section 230553.

2.03 ACCESS PANELS IN WALLS AND CEILING

A. Access panels shall be as manufactured by Milcor or approved equal and of type that is compatible with construction and finish of the wall and/or ceiling.

B. Fire rated panels shall be furnished where required in rated construction.

2.04 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD

A. Concrete pads shall comply with requirements of Division 03.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 HOLES THROUGH MASONRY AND CONCRETE

A. Each trade shall provide all holes and openings required for his Work unless such holes and openings are shown to be provided on the architectural or structural Drawings. Pay particular attention to openings required in pre-cast, pre-stressed, or post-tensioned slabs.

C. The above method shall be employed whenever holes are made on the job including holes required by change orders or because of omissions made inadvertently by the trade.

D. Pipe openings in exterior walls below grade between earth areas and interior spaces shall include a steel pipe sleeve and a mechanical seal.

E. Each trade shall be responsible for providing and disposing of water they use in the core drilling operation. Such Work shall be scheduled and other trades coordinated so that damage will not result from the use of water.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 4 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Each Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching necessary in order to perform their Work unless such Work has been delegated to the General Contractor. However, special permission shall be obtained from the Engineer before cutting structural members or finished material.

C. Pipe penetrations through new or existing floors and walls, regardless of type of construction, shall be done by rotary drill, wet or dry method. Use of hand, electric, or pneumatic impact tool is not acceptable. Each Contractor shall contain water and dust to avoid damage to adjacent finishes, furniture and equipment.

D. Each Contractor may need to provide additional selective demolition not shown on the Drawings as required for installation of new building elements and systems.

E. Pavements, sidewalks, roads and curbs shall be cut, patched, repaired and replaced as required to permit the installation of the Work of each trade. Such cutting, patching, repairing and replacing shall be the responsibility of, and paid for by, the trade requiring the Work.

F. Each Contractor shall bear the expense of all cutting, patching, repairing, or replacing of the Work of other trades required because of their fault, error, tardiness, or damage done.

3.03 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for all piping as follows: 1. Precast slabs 2. Exposed finished areas 3. Fire rated or acoustical walls 4. Fire rated floors 5. CMU walls

B. Sleeves shall be a minimum of 1” greater in inside diameter than piping passing through sleeve.

C. Fabricate all pipe sleeves of new material, cut square and reamed.

D. All sleeves through walls, extend full thickness of wall, cut flush with finished surfaces.

E. Pack space between all sleeve and pipes.

F. For sleeves located in fire rated construction, comply with Division 7 - Firestopping.

G. All pipe penetrations through fire rated construction shall be made with U.L. listed fire penetration assemblies. Refer to Architectural Drawings locations of fire rated construction. In addition, and at a minimum for determining pipe sleeve and sealing requirements, pipe penetrations at the following locations shall be considered to be fire rated construction unless directed otherwise by the Architect of Record: 1. All floors. 2. Walls adjoining corridors, enclosed stairs, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and storage rooms 3. Penetrations into shafts joining more than one floor.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 5 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 H. Permanent sleeves through floor slabs for exposed piping shall extend 1/2" above finished floor. Sleeves shall extend 4” above the floor in mechanical penthouses, dishwashing areas, kitchens, server areas, and all other wet areas. Where concealed, set sleeves through floor and flush with floor. Concealed piping is piping in walls, chases and similar locations. All sleeves through existing floor slabs shall be bonded to the slab with an epoxy bonding material.

J. Prior to installation of sleeves, prepare mock-up samples of each pipe sleeve arrangement to be installed.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. All piping in unfinished, accessible areas shall be identified every 50 feet, both sides of wall or floor penetration and at every change of direction as to type of service and direction of flow.

B. All equipment furnished shall be labeled.

3.05 ACCESS PANELS (FINISHED SURFACES)

A. Division 23 shall be responsible to provide all access panels, not otherwise provided by Division 1, which are necessary to provided required access to items provided under the Division 23 contract.

B. Access panels shall be provided at the following locations: 1. Access shall be provided to any type of valve, trap, manual vent, control valve, that requires adjustment, replacement, or visual inspection. 2. Division 23 shall consult with the General Contractor to coordinate the location of each access panel. 3. Generally, access panels are not required when a lay-in-ceiling is installed. However, depending on the type of occupancy, the Engineer may require that access areas be identified.

3.06 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING ESCUTCHEON PLATES

A. Where uncovered, exposed pipes pass through walls or floors, they shall be fitted with wall or floor plates.

B. Plates shall be set tight against wall or floor. Plates on other than exposed pipes shall be prime coated.

3.07 DEMOLITION:

A. Demolition Work shall comply with the construction sequence schedule.

B. The Division 23 Contractor shall include all temporary connections necessary to permit the Owner to occupy areas of the building during the various construction phases.

C. The Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation to prevent disruption to the Owner and minimize the "downtime." The Architect/Owner's approval shall be sought prior to all cut-off of services.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 6 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 D. The Division 23 Contractor shall remove existing Work shown, specified or necessary for completion of his Work. Owner shall have the option of the retaining any or all items of material removed under this contract. Items or materials not retained by Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises.

E. The Division 23 Contractor shall verify the extent of the remodeling Work and any details not clear shall be referred to the Architect/Engineer for clarification prior to commencing demolition Work.

F. Use of Owner's dumpsters for the disposition of any type of construction debris is not allowed.

3.08 PAINTING

A. Painting shall comply with the requirements of Division 9.

3.09 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. Provide 4” concrete housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment.

3.10 FIRE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. The Contractors shall exercise extreme care to maintain and exercise adequate fire safety precautions throughout the Work. This shall include providing sufficient firefighting devices, watchmen, standby helpers or other precautions during construction, in use of temporary heat, welding, brazing, sweating, testing or other phase of Work.

B. At all times, access shall be maintained for fire department trucks to the building.

D. All glass, glazed materials and other finish, in the vicinity of welding, brazing and cutting, shall be masked by the Contractor performing the welding Work.

3.11 CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Due to the fact that the manufacturer of the equipment purchased may vary slightly from that specified and therefore requires some rearranging or equipment different from that indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall confirm manufacturer’s installation requirements and make connections to such rearranged equipment without additional cost to the Owner. This requirement shall be for an initial installation arrangement other than that indicated on the Drawings.

B. Contractor shall make all HVAC connections to all equipment in this building whether or not such equipment is furnished by this Contractor, other Contractors, or by the Owner. This includes providing piping, valves, unions, fittings, ductwork, air control devices and insulation as indicated herein and/or on the Drawings.

3.12 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING PERSONNEL

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 7 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 A. Each trade shall furnish, without additional expense to the Owner, the services of competent instructors, who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, and operation and maintenance of all parts of the equipment to the Owner's permanent employees who are to have charge of the equipment.

B. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation on which they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and maintenance Work. Factory trained instructors shall be employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular workweek and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0500 – 8 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 0513

ELECTRICAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single phase electric motors.

B. Three phase electric motors.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230514 – Variable-Frequency Drive – Motor Controllers

C. 233413 - HVAC Fans.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying premium efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1 horsepower.

D. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to NFPA 70.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weatherproof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0513 – 1 ELECTRICAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRIC MOTOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Furnish electric motors as required for each motor driven unit. All motors must conform in every respect to the standard specifications of NEMA and bear nameplate of manufacturer, with current operating characteristics noted thereon. Motors shall be U.L. approved.

B. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency.

C. All electric motors shall be sized to meet the horsepower requirements of the driven unit at design characteristics including all V-belt and/or drive and coupling losses which are incurred without loading the motor beyond its nameplate horsepower rating. Where V-belt drives are employed, the motor horsepower nameplate ratings shall not be less than 115% of the driven unit brake horsepower requirements.

D. Motors shall be quiet when operating under full load operations. See schedules on the Mechanical/Electrical (ME) drawings for capacities.

E. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start, drip-proof. Minimum service factors shall be 1.15. All motors single speed, 1750 rpm, unless specified otherwise for specific equipment.

F. Electric motor characteristics shall be as indicated on the drawings.

G. All three phase motors for mechanical equipment rated 1 horsepower and larger shall meet NEMA Premium Efficiency standards as shown on the following table. Motors shall be labeled to comply with NEMA Standard MG1-12.53 with the nominal efficiency printed on the nameplate. Efficiency to be based on a dynamometer test per IEEE, Standard 112, Method B.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0513 – 2 ELECTRICAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. Minimum efficiency shall be provided per schedule.

MOTOR SCHEDULE

Open Drip-Proof (ODP) Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM HP 1 82.5 85.5 77 82.5 85.5 77 1.5 86.5 86.5 84 87.5 86.5 84 2 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 5 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 7.5 90.2 91 88.5 91 91.7 89.5 10 91.7 91.7 89.5 91 91.7 90.2 15 91.7 93 90.2 91.7 92.4 91 20 92.4 93 91 91.7 93 91 25 93 93.6 91.7 93 93.6 91.7 30 93.6 94.1 91.7 93 93.6 91.7 40 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4 50 94.1 94.5 93 94.1 94.5 93 60 94.5 95 93.6 94.5 95 93.6 75 94.5 95 93.6 94.5 95.4 93.6 100 95 95.4 93.6 95 95.4 94.1 125 95 95.4 94.1 95 95.4 95 150 95.4 95.8 94.1 95.8 95.8 95 200 95.4 95.8 95 95.8 96.2 95.4

2.02 SHAFT GROUNDING RING

A. Whenever variable frequency drives are installed to control AC motors, a maintenance free, circumferential, conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring shall be installed on the AC motor to discharge shaft currents to ground.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.

C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

3.02 WIRING

A. All 120V and low voltage control wiring for equipment provided by this Contractor shall be responsibility of this Contractor unless specified otherwise and clearly stated.

B. Electrical Work shall comply with the requirements of the current applicable National Electrical Code and Division 26. Where this specification or the plans indicate requirements in excess of those of NEC, the compliance with NEC will not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and installing Work as shown or specified.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0513 – 3 ELECTRICAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. All switching, protective devices and controls for equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be identified with black-white-black laminated 1/8" plastic plates. Plates shall be attached with self-tapping screws.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0513 – 4 ELECTRICAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230514

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Variable frequency controllers

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230513 – Electrical Motor Requirements for HVAC equipment

C. Section 230553 – Identification for HVAC Piping and equipment

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000.

B. NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed Drives; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.

D. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.

D. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0514 – 1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package MOTOR CONTROLLERS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 G. Operation Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include instructions for starting and operating controllers, and describe operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.

H. Maintenance Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Provide three year warranty on parts and labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Variable Frequency Controllers: Enclosed controllers suitable for operating the indicated loads, in conformance with requirements of NEMA ICS 7. 1. Employ microprocessor-based inverter logic isolated from power circuits. 2. Design for ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output. 3. Design to attempt five automatic restarts following fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart.

B. Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for equipment application in places restricted to employees of the building.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.02 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

A. Rated Input Voltage: 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz

B. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz

C. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over entire range of operating speed and load.

D. Operating Ambient: 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C.

E. Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: Plus, or minus 10 percent

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0514 – 2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package MOTOR CONTROLLERS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 F. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 to 110 percent of rated

G. Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.5 to 30 seconds

H. Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 1 to 30 seconds

I. Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC.

J. Power Line Noise and Radiated RFI 1. Power line noise shall be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch depth as defined in IEEE Standard 519-1981 guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensa- tion of Static Power Converters. The total voltage distortion shall not exceed 5%. 2. Motor noise as result of variable frequency drive shall be limited to three (3) dB above across-the-line operation. 3. Variable frequency drive controller shall not emit radiated RFI above 7 MHz as described in FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, sub-Part J, for Class A computing devices.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and output current.

B. Status Indicators: Separate indicators for overcurrent, overvoltage, ground fault, overtemperature, and input power ON.

C. Furnish HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control.

D. Include undervoltage release.

E. Variable frequency drive controller shall be provided with RFI filters.

F. Input line reactors for reduction of total harmonic content, power factor improvement and line transient suppression.

G. Control Power Source: Integral control transformer.

H. Door Interlocks: Furnish mechanical means to prevent opening of equipment with power connected, or to disconnect power if door is opened; include means for defeating interlock by qualified persons.

I. Safety Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode.

J. Control Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode.

K. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

L. Data port for connection to building management control system.

M. Disconnects 1. Fused disconnect or circuit breakers separate from motor disconnect shall be provided as a means to disconnect drive.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0514 – 3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package MOTOR CONTROLLERS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Shop inspect, and perform standard productions tests for each controller.

2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. ABB

B. Danfoss

C. Hitachi

D. IDM

E. Reliance

F. Square D

G. Toshiba

H. Yaskawa

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.

B. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.

C. Provide engraved plastic nameplates; refer to Section 230553 for product requirements and location.

D. Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying; motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place label in clear plastic holder.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.17.

3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide the service of the manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start controllers.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0514 – 4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package MOTOR CONTROLLERS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Make final adjustments to installed controller to assure proper operation of load system. Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0514 – 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package MOTOR CONTROLLERS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0514 – 6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package MOTOR CONTROLLERS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230519

METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps

B. Thermometers and thermometer wells

C. Static pressure gauges

D. Filter gauges

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230913 – Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC

C. Section 230923 - Direct Digital Control Systems for HVAC

D. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping

E. Section 232213 - Steam and Condensate Piping

F. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casing

G. Section 234000 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (Pub. 2000).

B. ASTM E 1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers; 2003a.

C. ASTM E 77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 1998 (Reapproved 2003).

D. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for manufactured components.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0519 – 1 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Gauge: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass wells, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Dial: 4-1/2" (6" if installed 15' above floor) black on white, red tip pointer. 2. Case: Aluminum, clear glass window 3. Bourdon Tube: Bronze, silver brazed 4. Movement: Brass-bronze brushed-rotary type 5. Scale: PSI

B. Range 1. One and one half (1-1/2) times the maximum system pressure.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Weiss 2. March 3. Trerice 4. U S Gauge 5. Weksler

2.02 PRESSURE GAUGE TAPPINGS

A. Gauge Cock: Brass tee handle, 1/4 inch connections, rated for maximum pressure of 200 psig and maximum temperature of 500 degrees F.

B. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections.

2.03 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometer: 1. ASTM E 1 2. Case: High Impact ABS 3. Display 3/8” LCD digital 4. Stem and Well: Angle adjustable stem, separable well with extended neck where required for insulated piping. 5. Range: -40 to 300 degree 6. Update: 10 seconds 7. Accurate to 1% or 1 degree 8. Solar self-powered

B. Range 1. Plumbing 30 degrees F to 240 degrees F

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Weiss – Digital Variable Thermometer 2. March 3. Trerice

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0519 – 2 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 4. U S Gauge 5. Weksler

2.04 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain.

B. Well: Separable well, with extended neck where required for insulated piping.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide one pressure gauge per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gauge.

C. Install pressure gauges with pulsation dampers. Provide gauge cock to isolate each gauge. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation.

D. Install thermometers in piping systems in wells in half couplings.

E. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.

F. Install thermometer wells adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor wells. Refer to Section 230913.

G. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.

H. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

I. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

J. Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

3.02 SCHEDULE

A. Pressure Gauge 1. Range: 1-1/2 times system pressure 2. Location: a. Air handling unit hydronic coils supply and return b. Additional locations as shown on Drawings

B. Thermometer - Water 1. Range: a. Hot Water Hydronic: 30 degrees to 240 degrees b. Chilled Water: 30 degrees to 100 degrees 2. Location: a. Air handler hydronic coils supply and return - hot and chilled b. Additional locations as shown on the Drawings and/or details

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0519 – 3 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0519 – 4 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hangers and Supports

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230523 – General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping

C. Section 230719 – HVAC Piping Insulation

D. Section 232113 – Hydronic Piping

E. Section 232114 – Hydronic Specialties

F. Section 232213 – Steam Piping

G. Section 232214 – Steam Specialties

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data on hangers and supports. Provide manufacturer’s catalog information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Anvil

B. Felker

C. Hycon

D. Piping Tech.

E. Unistrut

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0529 – 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 F. B-Line

G. Superstrut

H. Michigan\Erico

2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Conform to ASME B31.9.

B. All individual pipes shall be supported with adjustable clevis hangers of sizes as required to encompass insulated pipe. Provide sheet metal shields at all hanger points on insulated pipes. 1. Anvil Figure 260 or approved equal (cast iron, steel and insulated copper pipe). 2. Anvil Figure CT-65 or approved equal (uninsulated copper pipe).

C. "Trapeze" hangers piping supports shall be Unistrut, Power Strut, or B-Line channel for pipe size 3" and smaller, for pipe 4" to 6" use 2" x 2" x 1/4" angle iron, for pipe size 8" to 12" use 3" x 3" x 3/8" angle iron using the appropriate diameter rod that will sufficiently support the total weight of all of the pipe and their contents being supported and the rod nutted on both sides of the hanger. Make provisions to pitch piping as required.

D. Hanger Rods, etc.: Mild steel continuous threaded rod, heavy washers and heavy hex nuts.

2.03 ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURE

A. Concrete 1. Precast - Tapered wedge with locking sleeve: Quick Bolt

B. Steel Beam Structure 1. Beam Clamp a. For loads up to 1070 lbs. - Anvil Figure 94 or approved equal. b. For loads up to 470 lbs. - Anvil Figure 93 or approved equal. 2. Welded beam attachment - Anvil Figure 66 3. Steel washer and heavy nut for split joists 4. Angle or channel iron support spanning between beams and joists

C. Wood 1. Drill and use through bolts nutted on both sides of joist and malleable iron eye sockets.

2.04 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS

A. All vertical piping shall be supported at each floor using riser clamps. 1. Anvil Figure 261 (cast iron, steel, and insulated copper pipe) 2. Anvil Figure CT 121 (uninsulated copper pipe)

2.05 ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS

A. 80 Lb. Load and Maximum 1-1/2" Diameter Pipe 1. Radiused base 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Miro Industries b. Quick Pipe Block c. Or approved equal.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0529 – 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. 100 Lb. Load and Maximum 3" Diameter Pipe 1. U cradle with nylon roller seated on Teflon lubricant 2. Radiused base 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Miro Industries 3-R b. Quick Pipe Block c. Or approved equal.

2.06 SHEET METAL SHIELDS

A. Sheet metal shields shall be Anvil Figure 167 or galvanized sheet metal of equal gauge thickness.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

B. Provide all hangers and supports as required.

3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent Work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Whenever copper piping comes directly in contact with steel support system, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to wrap the pipe with two layers of 3M's #33 electrolytic tape. The length of tape shall be such to provide 2" overlap on each side of support. 9. Insulated pipe support shall be supported with polysiocyanurate pipe insulation the same thickness as insulated pipe. Install between pipe and vapor barrier. 10. Supports shall be sized for weights and pipe sizes encountered. 11. Supports shall properly compensate for all thermal expansion and contraction.

B. Horizontal Hanger Spacing Schedule

1. Steel Pipe Hanger Minimum Rod Pipe or Tube Size Spacing Diameter 1/2" tube only 5' 1/4" 1/2" - 1" 10' 3/8" 1-1/4" - 1-1/2" 12' 3/8" 2" 12' 1/2" 2-1/2" 12' 1/2"

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0529 – 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3" 12' 1/2"

2. Copper Pipe Hanger Minimum Rod Pipe or Tube Size Spacing Diameter 1/2" 6' 3/8" 3/4" 6' 3/8" 1" 6' 3/8" 1-1/4" 6' 3/8" 1-1/2" 10' 3/8" 2" 10' 3/8" 2-1/2" 10' 1/2" 3" 10' 1/2"

3.03 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Pipes with 25 feet of vertical height or more, without offsets shall be supported vertically as specified in Part 2 and/or detailed on the Drawings.

B. Supports shall be sized for weights and pipe sizes encountered.

C. Supports shall properly compensate for all thermal expansion and contraction.

D. Steel piping shall be supported vertically at maximum 15’ intervals.

E. Copper piping shall be supported vertically at maximum 10’ intervals.

3.04 ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Remove loose aggregate from built-up or ballasted membrane roof area beneath pipe stand.

B. Place traffic pad at pipe support location and locate pipe stand on pad.

C. For insulated pipes, provide rigid insulation inserts, vapor barrier seal and galvanized metal shields between pipe and pipe stand.

3.05 BRACKETS, BRACES AND SUPPORTS

B. Pipe shall be supported from the building structure independently or from a separate support, no pipe line shall be supported from another pipe line or piece of equipment.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0529 – 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 E. On brick, masonry block, hollow tile or concrete walls not finished on opposite side of wall, use brass toggle bolts or 3/8" brass bolts extending at least 3" into wall secured in place lead inserts and caulked with silicone type caulk.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0529 – 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0529 – 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230548

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Vibration isolators

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 233414 - HVAC Fans

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING

A. Acoustical Floor, Wall & Ceiling Piping Seal 1. Where piping passes through equipment walls, floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall Project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 degrees F, 10# density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries.

B. Pipe Anchor 1. Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide an all directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of heavy duty neoprene and duct or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All- directional anchors shall be type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0548 -1 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. General Rubber 2. Thermo Tech. 3. Vibration Mounting 4. Flexible Hose 5. Mercer Rubber Company 6. Resistoflex 7. Metraflex 8. Minnesota Flexible 9. American Boa

2.02 DUCTWORK

A. Flexible duct connection material shall be neoprene-coated glass fiber or fabric type, 6" wide with metal edging for fastening.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Vent-Fan 2. United/McGill 3. Mercer Rubber Company 4. Titus 5. General Rubber 6. Industrial Acoustics 7. Elgen

2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Vibration isolator shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to provide reasonably uniform deflection. Deflectors shall be 1" or as noted on drawings.

B. Equipment mounting type schedule based on Mason Industries Model Number.

1. Type D: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degrees arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include a scale Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degrees capability. Hangers shall be type 30N.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Vibration Mountings b. Vibration Eliminator c. Korfund Dynamics d. Industrial Acoustics

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Piping: 1. Piping connections to pumps shall be made with flexible connectors.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0548 -2 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2. Misalignment of piping will not be allowed at flexible connections. Pipe shall be independently supported.

C. DuctWork: 1. Connections to be made with 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle on all rectangular openings and two #14 gauge 1" band on all round openings. Use 5/16" stove bolts or self-tapping screws located 6" o.c. for fastening flexible duct to ductWork. 2. Flexible connectors shall be 6" wide and installed in a 4" space to allow for ample slack

D. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

F. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches WC static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.

G. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance. 1. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0548 -3 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0548 -4 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230553

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates

B. Tags

C. Pipe Labels

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1996 (Reaffirmed 2002).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.

C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation

B. Champion America, Inc.

C. Seton Identification Products

2.02 IDENTIFICATION – EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White 2. Letter Height: 1/2 inch 3. Background Color: Black

2.03 TAGS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0553 – 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION – PIPE

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Labels: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

2.05 IDENTIFICATION – VALVES

A. Brass metal tags.

B. Control valves shall be tagged as to service and normal position.

C. Other valves tagged as to service and function.

D. Control valve tags shall have black background, other valves tags shall have colors corresponding to service described above.

E. Valve list shall be included into operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Install pipe labels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install tape pipe labels complete around circumference of pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Identify air handling units, fans, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

F. Label all ductwork at damper locations, describe damper type. Provide minimum .5 inch high black letters on yellow background.

G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0553 – 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. Valve list shall be included in operation and Maintenance Manual.

I. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

J. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

K. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with tape pipe labels. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

L. All gas piping, except exposed in mechanical rooms, shall be labeled every 5’-0”.

3.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

CHILLED WATER RETURN G/W CHILLED WATER SUPPLY G/W CONDENSATE DRAIN Y/B HOT WATER SUPPLY Y/B HOT WATER RETURN Y/B LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE Y/B RETURN LOW PRESSURE STEAM Y/B

Y/B =YELLOW BACKGROUND/ BLACK LETTERS G/W = GREEN BACKGROUND/ WHITE LETTERS

Band Letter Pipe Size Width Height 1/2" - 1-1/4" 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" - 2" 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" - 6" 12" 1-1/4"

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0553 – 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0553 – 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package AND EQUIPMENT © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 0593

ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems

B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems

C. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002.

B. ASHRAE Standard 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988.

C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.

D. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 3. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

B. Begin Work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete Work prior to functional testing.

C. Support Commissioning Team activities by measuring air leakage, verifying system flow rates, or troubleshooting air and water distribution issues as needed or as requested by the Commissioning Authority.

D. Cooperate with Controls Technician the calibration of duct static pressure, building static pressure and airflow measurement.

E. Coordinate VFD with startup to obtain minimum and maximum settings for fans and pumps.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0593 – 1 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 F. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council, upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.

G. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing Work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage tests are complete, all corrections completed. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 14. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0593 – 2 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING

A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted Work by others 3. Contract interpretation requests 4. Lists of completed tests

B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross Sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds.

G. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0593 – 3 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries.

M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control.

3.07 SCOPE

A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1. Air Coils 2. Air Filters 3. Air Terminal Units 4. Air Inlets and Outlets

3.08 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED

A. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM 6. Service factor 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements 8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

B. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and actual 7. Return air flow, specified and actual 8. Outside air flow, specified and actual 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 10. Inlet pressure 11. Discharge pressure 12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 13. Number of Belts/Make/Size 14. Fan RPM

C. Terminal Unit Data: 1. Manufacturer 2. Type, constant, variable, single 3. Identification/number 4. Size 5. Minimum static pressure 6. Minimum design air flow 7. Maximum design air flow 8. Maximum actual air flow 9. Inlet static pressure

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0593 – 4 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 D. Air Distribution Tests: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor 6. Design velocity 7. Design air flow 8. Test (final) velocity 9. Test (final) air flow 10. Percent of design air flow

E. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Instrument type and make 2. Serial number 3. Application 4. Dates of use 5. Dates of calibration

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0593 – 5 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0593 – 6 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 0713

DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Duct insulation

B. Duct liner

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

C. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.

B. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2002.

C. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2004.

D. ASTM C 1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2005.

E. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2007.

F. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.

G. ASTM E 2336 – Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure System

H. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

I. NFPA 255 – Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

J. UL 723 – Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriter’s Laboratories; 2003.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0713 – 1 DUCT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

B. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Owens-Corning 2. Johns Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf 5. Dow 6. Halsted

2.02 TYPE 3 - EXTERNAL FIBERGLASS BLANKET DUCT INSULATION

A. Ducts shall be insulated on the outside with 1-1/2" nominal thick (1-1/8" installed thick) 3/4 lb. density flexible fiber blanket with an installed thermal conductance K= 0.27 Btu in./hr. sq. ft. degrees F or less at 75 degrees F and total insulated R value of 5.1 out of box.

B. Application 1. Insulation shall be cut slightly longer than circumference of duct to insure full thickness at corners and provide a 2" staple lap. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly stapled seam sealed with 3" wide pressure sensitive aluminum foil tape. 2. The insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of all ducts 18" or wider by means of welded pins 12” on center and secured with speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0713 – 2 DUCT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Vapor barrier 1. Insulation shall be furnished with a factory applied foil-scrim-kraft facing consisting of an aluminum foil (minimum .7 mil thick) reinforced with fiber glass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 lb. chemically treated, fire resistant kraft. Where painting of insulation is required, provide a white all service jacket. 2. The vapor-barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a tape where the pins have pierced through by applying a vapor adhesive to both surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. All joints and penetrations of the vapor barrier shall be sealed with 3" pressure sensitive aluminum foil tape. All cuts or tears shall be sealed with strips of the aluminum foil tape.

2.03 TYPE 7 - INTERNAL FIBERGLASS DUCT LINER BOARD (SOUND INSULATION)

A. All ducts where indicated herein shall be sound insulated with 1" thick, 1-1/2 lb. density semi- rigid duct liner. The NRC value shall not be less than 0.75 according to ASTM Test Method C-423. Thermal conductance shall be K = 0.23 Btu in./hour sq. ft. degrees F or less at 75 degrees F and total insulated R value of 4.3. Liner shall not support mold or fungus growth and shall be tested per ASTM C-665.

B. Application 1. Velocities to 1,500 feet per minute. a. The duct liner shall be applied with 100% coverage of approved fire resistant adhesive. On ducts over 20" wide or deep the liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners welded to the duct on maximum 15" centers. Fasteners shall start within 2" of the leading edge of each Section and within 3" of the leading edge of all cross joints within the duct Section. All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of the liner shall be heavily coated with an approved fire- resistant adhesive. b. The duct liner shall be cut to assure snug closing corner joints, the coated mat surface of the liner shall face the air stream, transverse joints shall be neatly butted, and any damaged areas shall be heavily coated with an approved fire resistant adhesive. 2. Velocities from 1,500 to 4,000 feet per minute. a. The duct liner shall be applied with 100% coverage of approved fire resistant adhesive. On horizontal runs, tops of ducts over 12" in width and/or sides over 16" in height shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners welded to the duct on a maximum of 15" centers. On vertical runs mechanical fasteners shall be spaced on maximum of 15" centers on all width dimensions over 12". Fasteners shall start within 2" of the leading edge of each Section and within 3" of the leading edge of all cross joints within the duct Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0713 – 3 DUCT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.

D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.

E. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

F. Duct Liner (Sound Insulation) 1. Velocities to 1,500 feet per minute. a. The duct liner shall be applied with 100% coverage of approved fire resistant adhesive. On ducts over 20" wide or deep the liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners welded to the duct on maximum 15" centers. Fasteners shall start within 2" of the leading edge of each Section and within 3" of the leading edge of all cross joints within the duct Section. All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of the liner shall be heavily coated with an approved fire- resistant adhesive. b. The duct liner shall be cut to assure snug closing corner joints, the coated mat surface of the liner shall face the air stream, transverse joints shall be neatly butted, and any damaged areas shall be heavily coated with an approved fire resistant adhesive. 2. Velocities from 1,500 to 4,000 feet per minute. a. The duct liner shall be applied with 100% coverage of approved fire resistant adhesive. On horizontal runs, tops of ducts over 12" in width and/or sides over 16" in height shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners welded to the duct on a maximum of 15" centers. On vertical runs mechanical fasteners shall be spaced on maximum of 15" centers on all width dimensions over 12". Fasteners shall start within 2" of the leading edge of each Section and within 3" of the leading edge of all cross joints within the duct Section.

3.03 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. This Contractor shall inspect that all ductwork has been properly sealed prior to installing insulation.

B. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floor and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

C. Supply Air Ductwork 1. Supply ductwork shall be insulated with Type 3 as described in Part 2 – Products

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0713 – 4 DUCT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 D. Internally Lined Ductwork (Transfer Duct) 1. All ducts as indicated below shall be lined with Type 7 insulation as described in Part 2 - Products. a. Transfer ductwork - all ducts 2. Duct sizes listed on the drawings are internal sizes. Where insulation is applied to the inside of the ducts, the metal size of the duct shall be increased in amount to result in internal dimensions equal to that shown on the drawings. 3. Where sound insulation is specified and/or shown for ducts which also require thermal insulation in this specification, the exterior thermal insulation thickness may be reduced or deleted such that the R value of the combined internal and the external insulation is not less than the R value of the thermal insulation specified.

E. Exhaust and Gravity Feed Ductwork 1. All exhaust and gravity feed ductwork shall be insulated a minimum of 10'-0", measured both from the exhaust fan inlet and/or outlet, with external board Type 4 insulation as described in Part 2 - Products.

F. Roof Mounted Ductwork 1. Roof mounted ductwork shall be insulated with Type 4 external board insulation without vapor barrier, as described in Part 2 - Products. 2. Roof mounted ductwork shall be jacket with Type 10 external wrap as described in Part 2 - Products.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0713 – 5 DUCT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0713 – 6 DUCT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230716

HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Equipment insulation

B. Covering

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

C. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties

D. Section 236416 – Water Cooled Chiller

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2004.

B. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.

C. ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2005.

D. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2002.

E. ASTM C 592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2004.

F. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2004.

G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005.

H. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.

I. NFPA 255 – Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

J. UL 723 – Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories; 2003.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0716 – 1 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for equipment scheduled.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.02 TYPE 4 - FOAM PLASTIC TUBULAR AND SHEET INSULATION

A. Flexible elastomeric material with 3/4" thickness designed for varied services at temperatures between -40 degrees F and 220 degrees F.

B. Fittings for piping shall be insulated with mitered segments which match the material used. All butt joints shall be joined by sealing with a waterproof vapor barrier adhesive as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

C. When applying sheet insulation to metal surfaces, brush on a coat of adhesive to the clean, dry metal, covering an area to the size of one sheet. Apply a brush coat of adhesive to the back of the sheet, except for 1/2" wide border around the edges. After adhesive is on the metal surface and the sheet has dried to a nonsticky state, position sheet so that the edges overlap the previously installed sheets by 1/8". Apply light pressure to adhere a spot in the center of the sheet only and compress butt edges into place. Bond sheet by pressing firmly into place. Spread joints and coat with adhesive. DO NOT FILL JOINT WITH ADHESIVE.

D. For outdoor application, apply two coats of finish as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0716 – 2 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 E. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Rubatex 2. Armstrong “Armaflex”

2.03 TYPE 8 - MINERAL FIBER/BASALT INSULATION WITH ALUMINUM JACKET (HIGH TEMPERATURE)

A. All piping or external surface shall be covered with mineral fiber/basalt insulation with field applied 0.016 aluminum jacketing and moisture barrier.

B. Thermal conductance shall be K = .25 in/hr. sq. ft. degrees F or less at 100 degrees F.

C. ASTM E84 flame spread and smoke developed hazard ratings shall not exceed 5 and 0, respectively.

D. Fittings shall be covered using mitered 0.016 aluminum jacket identical in composition to the piping jacket.

E. Application 1. The insulation shall be held firmly in place with 16 gauge wire 9" o.c. 2. The jacket circumferential joints shall be sealed by use of preformed butt strips, minimum 2" wide. Butt strips shall overlap adjacent a minimum of 1/2". The jacket longitudinal seams shall be sealed completely by providing a 2" overlap and securing with stainless steel screws.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean, dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint as filler for gapping joints and voids resulting from poor workmanship. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface irregularities.

B. Do not apply insulation to equipment while hot.

C. Cover insulated surfaces with glass cloth, jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at least two inches.

D. Do not insulate handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp and manufacturer’s nameplate. Provide neatly leveled edge at interruptions of insulation.

E. Provide removable insulation Sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened periodically for maintenance, include metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0716 – 3 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Heat Exchangers (shell type) and Air Separators 1. All surfaces shall be insulated with insulation as described by Type 4 in Part 2 Products.

B. Chilled Water Pumps 1. All surfaces shall be insulated with Type 4 insulation as described in Part 2 Products.

C. Water Cooled Chiller 1. All evaporator and condenser water box connections shall be insulated with Type 4 insulation as described in Part 2 Products.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0716 – 4 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230719

HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Piping insulation

B. Jackets and accessories

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping

C. Section 232213 - Steam and Steam Condensate Piping

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004.

B. ASTM C 449/C 449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2000.

C. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.

D. ASTM C 533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation; 2007.

E. ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2005.

F. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2006.

G. ASTM C 585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 1990 (Reapproved 2004).

H. ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation; 2005.

I. ASTM C 1126 Type 3 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation; 2005.

J. ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2003.

K. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0719 – 1 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 L. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2007.

M. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.

N. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.; 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation 2. Johns Manville Corporation 3. Owens Corning Corporation 4. CertainTeed Corporation

2.02 TYPE 1 - FIBERGLASS PIPE & FITTING INSULATION

A. Pipe 1. Preformed fiberglass pipe insulation with poly-encapsulated paper jacket and reinforced foil vapor barrier. 2. Jacket shall be suitable for painting. 3. Maximum thermal conductivity of K = .25 Btu in./hr. sq. ft. at 75 degrees F and rated for 0 degrees F to +1000 degrees F service.

B. Fittings

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0719 – 2 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. Pre-molded one-piece PVC insulated fitting covers with fiber glass insulation inserts shall be provided on all valves, strainers, elbows, tees, and fittings, etc. Insert shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of K = .28 Btu in./hr. sq. ft. and rated for 0 degrees to 450 degrees.

C. Application 1. Insulate all piping in a neat, workmanlike fashion in accordance with thickness listed. Longitudinal laps of jackets shall be sealed and butt joints shall be wrapped with a 3" minimum wide strip of the jacketing material securely sealed in place. 2. In lieu of the above method of application for AP jackets, Contractor may elect to use factory-applied pressure sensitive laps and butt strips. 3. Domestic cold water, domestic hot water, domestic recirculated hot water, tempered water, and rain water conductors shall be insulated as above and have all seam edges of the cover sealed with vapor-barrier adhesive mastic. The circumferential edges of the cover shall be wrapped with vapor-barrier pressure-sensitive color-matching tape. The tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and have an overlap on itself at least two inches on the downward side. 4. Pre-molded insulated fitting covers shall be factory precut and insulation shall be applied to the fitting. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked in fully insulating the pipe fitting. The one-piece PVC fitting cover will be secured by banding or taping the ends to the adjacent pipe covering. On fittings where the operating temperature exceeds 250 degrees F or where the pipe insulation thickness is greater than 1-1/2", two or more layers of the insulation inserts shall be applied prior to the installation of the PVC fitting cover.

2.03 TYPE 2 - HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE

B. Insulating Cement: 1. ASTM C 449/C 449M

C. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered segments which match the piping insulation.

E. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Thermo-12 – Gold, Industrial Insulation Group

2.04 TYPE 3 - PIPING JACKETS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0719 – 3 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. 3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 4. Thickness: 20 mil. 5. Flame spread rating of 25 or less. 6. Smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 7. Connections: a. PVC tape b. For food, beverage, and pharmaceutical facilities where USDA and/or FDA regulation compliance is required, provide solvent welded adhesive in lieu of PVC tape.

B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: 1. Compatible with insulation

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.

G. Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Control Valves

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0719 – 4 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 a. Do not insulate control valves smaller than 1” at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. b. Control valves 1” and larger shall be covered with oversized pipe insulation of a size that will provide the same thickness as the pipe and the jacket shall be the same as that of the pipe. Tough cut ends shall be coated with a vapor resistant mastic as described in Part 2.

H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: On all piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger, except steam and steam condensate piping 3” and larger and hydronic piping 4” and larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Shall be the same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, for pipes up thru and including 6” the length shall be 12” long, for piping 8” and larger it shall be 15” long. 5. Insert material: Insulation material as described in Part 2.03 Products suitable for the planned temperature range.

I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 078400.

3.03 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Hot Water Heating Supply and Return 1. All piping and fittings shall be insulated with the material as described by Type 1 in Part 2 Products. 2. Insulation thickness shall conform to Table 1 in this Section.

B. Steam and Steam Condensate 1. All piping and fittings shall be insulated with the material as described by Type 1 in Part 2 Products. 2. Insulation thickness shall conform to Table 1 in this Section.

C. Chilled Water Supply and Return Piping 1. All piping and fittings shall be insulated with the material as described by Type 3 in Part 2 Products. 2. Insulation thickness shall conform to Table 2 in this Section.

D. Existing Piping 1. All damaged insulation on existing piping shall be replaced with type as described herein and match original thickness.

E. Piping Jacket 1. All exposed piping including tunnels, except in mechanical rooms, shall be covered with piping jacket as described by Type 7 in Part 2 Products.

F. Table 1 - Minimum Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes For Heating Systems

STEAM, STEAM CONDENSATE, AND HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES a, c, d, e

FLUID INSULATION NOMINAL PIPE OR TUBE SIZE (inches) OPERATING CONDUCTIVITY b TEMP

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0719 – 5 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 RANGE AND CONDUCT MEAN USEAGE IVITY 1 to < 1-1/2 RATING <1 4 to <8 ≥ 8 (°F) Btu * in./(h 1-1/2 to <4 TEMP (°F) * ft2 * °F) >350 0.32 – 0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 251-350 0.29 – 0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 201-250 0.27 – 0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 141-200 0.25 – 0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 105-140 0.21 – 0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 a. Table is based on 2012 International Energy Code (IEC) - Table C403.2.8. b. For insulation outside of the stated conductivity rage, comply with 2012 IEC Table 403.2.8. c. For piping smaller than 1-1/2” and located in partitions within conditioned spaces, insulation may be reduced by 1” to a minimum thickness of 1”. d. For direct buried heating and hot water system piping, insulation may be reduced by 1- 1/2” to a minimum of 1”. e. For piping exposed to outdoor air, increase insulation thickness values determined above by 1/2”.

G. Table 2 - Minimum Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes For Cooling Systems

CHILLED WATER, BRINE, AND REFRIGERANT COOLING SYSTEMS MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES a, c, d, e

INSULATION FLUID NOMINAL PIPE OR TUBE SIZE (inches) OPERATING CONDUCTIVITY b TEMP CONDUCT MEAN RANGE AND IVITY 1 to < 1-1/2 RATING <1 4 to <8 ≥ 8 USEAGE Btu * in./(h 1-1/2 to <4 TEMP (°F) (°F) * ft2 * °F) 40-60 0.21 – 0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20 – 0.26 75 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 a. Table is based on 2012 International Energy Code (IEC) - Table C403.2.8. b. For insulation outside of the stated conductivity rage, comply with 2012 IEC Table C403.2.8. c. For piping smaller than 1-1/2” and located in partitions within conditioned spaces, insulation may be reduced by 1” to a minimum thickness of 1”. d. For direct buried chilled water supply piping, provide Type 5 insulation as specified in Part 2. e. For piping exposed to outdoor air, increase insulation thickness values determined above by 1/2”.

J. Table 1 - Minimum Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes For Heating Systems

STEAM, STEAM CONDENSATE, AND HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES a, c, d, e

FLUID INSULATION NOMINAL PIPE OR TUBE SIZE (inches) OPERATING CONDUCTIVITY b TEMP RANGE AND

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0719 – 6 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 USEAGE CONDUCT MEAN (°F) IVITY 1 to < 1-1/2 RATING <1 4 to <8 ≥ 8 Btu * in./(h 1-1/2 to <4 TEMP (°F) * ft2 * °F) >350 0.32 – 0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 251-350 0.29 – 0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 201-250 0.27 – 0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 141-200 0.25 – 0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 105-140 0.22 – 0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 a. Table is based on 2010 ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.8.3A. b. For insulation outside of the stated conductivity rage, comply with ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.8.3A. c. For piping smaller than 1-1/2” and located in partitions within conditioned spaces, insulation may be reduced by 1” to a minimum thickness of 1”. d. For direct buried heating and hot water system piping, insulation may be reduced by 1- 1/2” to a minimum thickness of 1”. e. For piping exposed to outdoor air, increase insulation thickness values determined above by 1/2”.

K. Table 2 - Minimum Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes For Cooling Systems

CHILLED WATER, BRINE, AND REFRIGERANT COOLING SYSTEMS MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES a, c, d, e

INSULATION FLUID NOMINAL PIPE OR TUBE SIZE (inches) OPERATING CONDUCTIVITY b TEMP CONDUCT MEAN RANGE AND IVITY 1 to < 1-1/2 RATING <1 4 to <8 ≥ 8 USEAGE Btu * in./(h 1-1/2 to <4 TEMP (°F) (°F) * ft2 * °F) 40-60 0.21 – 0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20 – 0.26 50 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 a. Table is based on 2010 ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.8.3B. b. For insulation outside of the stated conductivity rage, comply with ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.8.3B. c. Other than direct buried chilled water supply piping, direct bury cooling system piping does not require insulation. d. For direct buried chilled water supply piping, provide Type 5 insulation as specified in Part 2. e. For piping exposed to outdoor air, increase insulation thickness values determined above by 1/2”.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0719 – 7 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230913

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Temperature sensors

B. Control relays

C. Static pressure sensors

D. Differential pressure sensors

E. Damper operators

F. Control Valves & Balancing Acuators

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping

C. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Control dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers

D. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls

1.03 REFERENCES

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Indicate sensor data including range, accuracy, and drift.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide installation and wiring diagrams, and written description of operation. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop Drawings to reflect actual instrumentation installed.

F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended frequency of inspection and cleaning; cleaning method and cleaning materials; and frequency of re-calibration.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0913 – 1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package DEVICES FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty, forms filled out in Owner’s name, and copies sent to the manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

1.07 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 0.5 degree F over a range of –5 to 160 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEMPERATURE SENSOR – WALL MOUNTED

A. Wall mounted temperature sensors shall meet the following requirements 1. White protective enclosure. There shall be no manufacturer’s logo or name on the exposed wall plate. 2. Wall plate shall be appropriate for the application, brushed aluminum, brushed nickel, stainless steel, or manufacturer’s standard plastic cover, as selected by the Architect. 3. Provide LCD based setpoint adjustment, space temperature indication, and override command button. 4. Accuracy of 1ºF. 5. Range 32°F to 100°F.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. American Automatrix

2.02 TEMPERATURE SENSORS – VAV DISCHARGE

A. VAV discharge temperature sensors shall meet the following requirements 1. White protective enclosure. There shall be no manufacturer’s logo, name, or thermometer on the exposed wall plate. 2. Wall plate shall be primed for final coat in accordance with Architect. 3. Accuracy of 3ºF. 4. Range 32°F to 158°F.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. American Automatrix

2.03 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR – DUCT MOUNTED

A. Duct mounted static pressure sensor shall meet the following requirements 1. Input range shall be up to 0 to 5 inwc, select lower 0 to 2.5 inwc range. 2. 4-20 mA output proportional to input range 3. Accuracy 1% full scale combined linearity and hysteresis 4. Operating temperature range of 32°F to 122°F

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0913 – 2 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package DEVICES FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

5. Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment 6. Minimum overpressure input protection of five times rated input

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. American Automatrix

2.04 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR

A. Carbon dioxide sensor shall meet the following requirements 1. Dual beam absorption infrared diffusion sample method 2. 5-year calibration guarantee 3. Measurement range 0-2000 ppm CO2 4. Accuracy 30 ppm or 3% of measured value whichever is greater for 32°-122°F 5. Blank cover 6. Automatic background self-calibration feature 7. Response time 0-90% in less than 1 minute

B. Wall Sensor - Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. American Automatrix

2.05 CONTROL VALVES

A. General Requirements 1. Furnish valves controlled by the BMCS. Provide shut-off valves for instrumentation as described herein. Provide manufacturer’s installation requirements to the Piping Contractor. 2. Valves shall meet, at minimum, the following ANSI Class ratings. 3. For low pressure (150 psi), meet ANSI Class 150 ratings. 4. For medium pressure (300 psi), meet ANSI Class 250 ratings. 5. For high pressure (400 psi), meet ANSI Class 400 ratings. 6. Valves 0.5 inch to 2 inches shall have NPT female screwed ends. Valves 2.5 inches and larger to have flanged ends. Furnish companion flanges, gaskets, and bolting materials with flanged-end valves.

B. Radiation Valves: 1. Bronze body, bronze trim, 2 port, replaceable plugs and seats, union and threaded ends. 2. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F. 3. Size for 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 4. Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head. 5. Operators (2 Position): Synchronous motor with enclosed gear train, dual return springs, valve position indicator; 24 v DC, 0.4 amp. Valves shall spring return to normal position for temperature protection. 6. Operators (Modulating): Self-contained, linear motorized actuator with approximately 3/4 inch stroke, 60 second full travel with transformer and SPDT contacts: 24 v DC, 6 watt maximum input.

C. Two Way Globe Control Valve 1. Valves shall be selected to have valve authority (N) no less than 0.5 as defined by the relationship: a. N=P1/(P1+P2) where P1=pressure drop across the fully open valve and P2 = pressure drop across the remainder of the circuit (e.g. a coil).

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0913 – 3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package DEVICES FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

2. Capable of tight shutoff when pump is operating at maximum head pressure. Leakage shall be less than 0.01% of the rated valve capacity at pump shutoff head. 3. Valve to be single seat globe type. Double seated valves are unacceptable. 4. Valve shall have equal percentage or linear flow characteristics as appropriate for the application. Linear valves to be used for chilled water control. 5. Suitable for continuous throttling. 6. Valve body material shall be bronze, cast iron, or carbon steel subject to requirements for valve body pressure and temperature rating and application. 7. Valve trim to be stainless steel.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Belimo 2. Fisher 3. Dezurik 4. Warren

E. Valve Actuators - Electric 1. Valves shall spring return to normal position as indicated on freeze, fire, or temperature protection. 2. Select operator for full shut off at maximum pump differential pressure.

F. Instrument Isolation Valves 1. Provide 3-valve instrument bypass/isolation valves for water pressure sensors.

2.06 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Smoke dampers and CF/S dampers are specified under Section 233300.

B. Control dampers are specified under Section 233300.

C. Control Damper Actuators - Electric 1. Provide spring return, adjustable stroke motor having oil immersed gear train, with auxiliary end switch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before selecting controls and instruments. If existing controls are different from those specified, notify the engineer.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions as specified.

C. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Check and verify location of thermostats with Drawings and room details before installation. Locations to be reviewed by designer and owner prior to installation.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0913 – 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package DEVICES FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

C. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances, public areas, and where indicated.

D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas. Do not install motors in locations at outdoor temperatures.

E. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room.

F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face.

G. All power and low voltage wiring and shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike manner. All wiring exposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to prevent obstruction to devices and terminals.

H. The BMCS Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation required for a fully functional system. All wiring shall be in accordance to all local and national codes plus Division 26. All 120V voltage wiring, all low voltage wiring not in ceiling plenums and all low voltage wiring in equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit in accordance with Division 26. All electronic wiring shall be #18 AWG minimum and shielded, if required. Provide power wiring for BMCS panels from nearest electrical emergency panel.

I. Prior to entering computer programs and data files into the existing campus computer, the Contractor shall write approval from the Owner for algorithms, initial parameters and set points, English descriptors, and color graphics.

J. The BMCS Contractor shall maintain diskette copies of all data files and application software for Owner’s use in the event of a system crash or memory failure. One copy shall be delivered to the Owner during training session, and one copy shall be archived in the BMCS manufacturer's local software vault.

K. Variable Air Volume Box Damper Actuators 1. BMCS Contractor shall provide VAV box actuators to the manufacturer for factory installation.

L. Ceiling Access Panels

1. The Contractor shall coordinate with Section 003113 for ceiling access to all devices.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0913 – 5 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package DEVICES FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0913 – 6 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package DEVICES FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019

SECTION 23 0923

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Control equipment network and hardware

B. Software

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230593 - Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

C. Section 230913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC

D. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field programmable micro-processor based units with communications to existing Building Management System.

B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.

C. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.

D. Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and the like when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified in Section 230913.

E. Provide control systems consisting of sensors, control valves, damper operators, instruments, interface panels, piping, wiring, and accessories required to satisfy this Section, the Instrumentation and Controls Section, and the Sequences of Operation.

F. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and loop tuning necessary for complete and fully operational system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 1 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate trunk cable architecture showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors. 2. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input/output devices. 3. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. 4. Provide demonstration diskette containing graphics for Engineer/Owner approval. 5. Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 6. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all manufactured components.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. 2. Include submittals data in final "Record Documents" form.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and numbered, system components and devices. 2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 3. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

A. The Building Management Control System consists of network of interoperable, standalone digital controllers communicating via LonMark/LonTalk communication protocols to a Network Area Controller. Existing system to remain with addition of exhaust fan.

B. Systems shall be developed on the American Automatrix platform and be fully compatible with the Owner’s existing web-based network.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 2 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O, and historical data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

D. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and alarm reports directly to any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network without dependence upon a central processing device. Standalone DDC panels shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a central processing device.

2.02 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS

A. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local area network, or auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or via a combination of the two networking schemes.

B. Local Area Network 1. Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator workstations and DDC panels shall directly reside on a local area network such that communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis. 2. Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system. The hardware configuration of the BMCS network shall be totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. 3. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions: a. High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices. b. Support of any combination of controllers and operator workstations directly connected to the local area network. A minimum of 50 devices shall be supported on a single local area network. c. Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either workstations, DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include provisions for automatically reconfiguring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform their designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures. d. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost. e. Error detection, correction, and retransmission to guarantee data integrity. f. Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms are reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond. g. Use of an industry standard IEEE 802.x protocol. Communications must be of a deterministic nature to assure calculable performance under worst-case network loading. h. Synchronization of the realtime clocks in all DDC panels shall be provided. i. Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components and protocols shall be used to allow the BMCS to coexist with other networking applications such as office automation, MAP, ETHERNET, IBM Token Ring and ARCNET are acceptable technologies.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 3 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2.03 STANDALONE DDC PANELS

A. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.

B. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases including: 1. Control processes 2. Energy Management Applications 3. Alarm Management 4. Historical/Trend Data for all points 5. Maintenance Support Applications 6. Custom Processes 7. Operator I/O 8. Dial-Up Communications 9. Manual Override Monitoring

C. Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: 1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts 2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control 3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements 4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment 5. Pulse inputs for pulsed contact monitoring.

D. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators.

E. Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network terminals.

F. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.

G. Integrated On Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.

H. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 4 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 I. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area net-Work, via the local RS-232C port, or via telephone line dial-in.

2.04 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS

A. Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) (i.e., air handler, heating pumps, etc.)

B. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.

C. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including: 1. Control Processes 2. Energy Management Applications 3. Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)

D. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through any network- resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network.

E. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Display temperatures 2. Display status 3. Display setpoints 4. Display control parameters 5. Override binary output control 6. Override analog setpoints 7. Modification of gain and offset constants

F. Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.

G. Application Descriptions: 1. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers: a. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configurations of VAV boxes to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: 1) Single Duct Only (Cooling Only, or Cooling with Reheat) 2) Supply/Exhaust b. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: 1) Proportional Cooling Outputs

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 5 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2) Heating Outputs (Proportional, or 1 to 3 Stages) 3) Fan Control Output (On/Off Logic, or Proportional Series Fan Logic) c. The modes of operation supported by the VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall minimally include, but not be limited to, the following: 1) Day/Weekly Schedules 2) Comfort/Occupancy Mode 3) Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, etc.) 4) Temporary Override Mode d. Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions. e. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored. f. Alarm Management: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.

2.05 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Basic Interface Description: 1. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC application software. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. 2. Graphical and Text Based Displays: Operator Workstations shall provide consistent graphical or text-based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all workstations. 3. Multiple, Concurrent Displays: The Operator Interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously view several different types of system displays in overlapping windows to speed building analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously display a graphic depicting an air handling unit, while displaying the trend graph of several associated space temperatures to allow the user to analyze system performance. If the interface is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the BMCS Contractor shall provide at least two operator stations. 4. Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. a. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including portable or panel-mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and downloaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually. b. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported: 1) Level 1 = Data Access and Display 2) Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides 3) Level 3 = Level 2 + Database Modification

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 6 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 4) Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation 5) Level 5 = Level 4 + Password Add/Modification c. A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported at each DDC panel. d. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on. e. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line. 5. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: a. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment b. Adjust setpoints c. Add/Modify/Delete time programming d. Enable/Disable process execution e. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point f. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point g. Enable/Disable Trending for each point h. Override PID Loop setpoints i. Enter temporary override schedules j. Define Holiday Schedules k. Change time/date l. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits m. Enter/Modify analog warning limits n. View limits o. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter p. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load 6. Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and directed to either CRT displays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports: a. A general listing of all points in the network b. List all points currently in alarm c. List of all off-line points d. List all points currently in override status e. List of all disabled points f. List all points currently locked out g. List of all items defined in a "Follow-Up" file h. List all Weekly Schedules i. List all Holiday Programming j. List of Limits and Deadbands 7. Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user- selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information.

B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units and chilled water systems shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. 1. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands. 2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 7 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. a. The BMCS Contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g., fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g., constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols. b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a Drawing program to allow the user to perform the following: 1) Define symbols 2) Position and size symbols 3) Define background screens 4) Define connecting lines and curves 5) Locate, orient and size descriptive text 6) Define and display colors for all elements 7) Establish correlation between symbols or text associated system points or other displays. c. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility. To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multiple DDC panels, including application specific controllers used for DDC unitary or VAV terminal unit control.

C. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control. 1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions: a. Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels b. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations c. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers d. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants e. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point f. Add/Delete/Modify control loops g. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications h. Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar-based programming i. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point j. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point k. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes l. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-references to point data m. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition n. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords o. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages 2. Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, DDC panels, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in- the-blank templates and graphical programming approach. Graphical programming shall allow the user to define the software configuration of DDC control logic for HVAC system control sequences, fan interlocks, pump interlocks, PID control loops, and other control relationships through the creation of graphical logic flow diagrams. a. Graphical Programming: Control sequences are created by using a mouse input device to draw interconnecting lines between symbols depicting inputs, operators (comparisons and mathematical calculations), and outputs of a control sequence. As a minimum, graphic symbols shall be used to represent:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 8 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1) Process Inputs, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure values, status, time, date, or any other measured or calculated system data. 2) Mathematical Process Operators, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, or greater than, equal to, less than, etc. 3) Logical Process Operators such as AND, OR, Exclusive OR, NOT, etc. 4) Time Delays 5) Process Control Outputs such start/stop control points, analog adjust points, etc. 6) Process Calculation Outputs 7) Text file Outputs and Advisories b. Network Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single DDC panel, but shall be able to include data from any and all other DDC panels to allow the development of network-wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to any number of other processes (cascading). c. Sequence Testing and Simulation: A software tool shall be provided, which allows a user to simulate control sequence execution to test strategies before they are actually applied to mechanical systems. Users shall be able to enter hypothetical input data, and verify desired control response and calculation results via graphical displays and hardcopy printouts. 3. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be self-documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be provided in logical, graphical flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily interpreted and modified at any time in the future. 4. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all standalone DDC panel databases shall be stored in at least one personal computer operator workstation. Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel data bases shall be provided. In the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for any reason, the system shall automatically download a new copy of the respective data base to restore proper operation. Data base back-up/Download shall occur over the local area network without operator intervention. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of any or all portions of a DDC panels data base.

D. Standalone DDC panel Local Operator's Terminals: Each DDC panel shall contain an operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data display, and program additions and modifications. 1. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of 6 points with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems. 2. The operator functions provided by the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Start and Stop Points b. Modify Setpoints c. Modify PID Loop Setpoints d. Override PID Control e. Change Time/Date f. Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling g. Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling h. Enter Temporary Override Schedules i. Define Holiday Schedules j. View Analog Limits k. Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits l. Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits m. Enter/Modify Analog Differentials

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 9 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 n. View Point History Files 3. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This capability shall not be restricted to a subset of predefined "global points", but shall provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal and any DDC panel in the network. 4. Operator access at all DDC panel Operator Terminals shall be identical to each other, as well as identical to the PC Operator Workstations. Any password changes shall automatically be downloaded to all controllers on the network. 5. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be provided consistent with a user's password clearance and the types of points being displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error. 6. Context-Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help" manuals and tutorials shall be provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general system operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently displayed menus. 7. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network devices. The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access points at the DDC panel Operator's Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look-up tables.

2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. American Automatrix

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to excessive vibration.

B. Install software in control units and in operator Work station. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 230993.

C. Coordinate wiring requirements with Section 230913 - Part 3 Execution.

D. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 262717. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.

3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Start and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.

B. Provide service engineer to instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems plant and equipment for (1) 8 hour day periods.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 11 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0923 – 12 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEM FOR HVAC © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 230993

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sequence of operation for: 1. VAV air handling unit with return fan and exhaust fans 2. Electrical ventilation 3. Finned tube radiation 4. Miscellaneous supply/exhaust fans 5. VAV terminal units with hot water reheat 6. VAV terminal units without hot water reheat 7. Unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC

C. Section 230913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in other Sections.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Sequence of Operation Documentation: Submit written sequence of operation for entire HVAC system and each piece of equipment.

1. Include at least the following sequences: a. Start-up b. Warm-up mode c. Normal operating mode d. Unoccupied mode e. Shutdown f. Capacity control sequences and equipment staging g. Temperature and pressure control, such as setbacks, setups, resets, etc. h. Detailed sequences for all control strategies, such as economizer control, optimum start/stop, staging, optimization, demand limiting, etc. i. Effects of power or equipment failure with all standby component functions j. Sequences for all alarms and emergency shut downs k. Seasonal operational differences and recommendations l. Interactions and interlocks with other systems 2. Include initial and recommended values for all adjustable settings, setpoints and parameters that are typically set or adjusted by operating staff; and any other control

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 settings or fixed values, delays, etc. that will be useful during testing and operating the equipment. 3. For packaged controlled equipment, include manufacturer's furnished sequence of operation amplified as required to describe the relationship between the packaged controls and the control system, indicating which points are adjustable control points and which points are only monitored. 4. Include operating schedules.

C. Hand-Off-Auto function: HOA switch may be provided by the equipment manufacturer, by Division 26, or as part of a speed control unit (VFD). 1. When furnished integral with equipment, manufacturer shall determine HOA functionality. 2. When HOA function is provided with the VFD, or is furnished and installed by Division 26: a. In Hand position, system shall be under manual control b. In Off position, system shall be in the Safety default position c. In Auto position, system shall be under the control of the BMCS

D. Control System Diagrams: Submit graphic schematic of the control system showing each control component and each component controlled, monitored, or enabled. 1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. 2. Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. 3. Include the system and component layout of all equipment that the control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the equipment is primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls. 4. Include preliminary graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value. 5. Include a key to abbreviations.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and setpoints of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers 1. Hennepin County conducted control system prequalification testing for BACnet integration and has published a list of approved control devices in Appendix A. Only pre- approved control devices listed in Appendix A shall be proposed and installed on Hennepin County projects. 2. Building level network controllers shall have the same model/part number and firmware revision as the pre-approved controllers listed in Appendix A. 3. Control Contractors shall provide all of the “Requirements for use at Hennepin County Buildings” from Appendix A for their approved controllers. 4. Approved Manufacturers that don’t currently have virtualized Web Server supervisor software on the Hennepin County network must include the cost of furnishing and installing Web Server supervisor software in their proposed cost. All Hennepin County network security, software license and installation requirements shall apply to the Web Server software.

B. Approved BAS Installation Contractors 1. Automated Logic – Twin Cities 953 Westgate Drive, Suite 101, St. Paul, MN 55114

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.02 OUTSIDE AIR PROPERTIES

A. Measure properties of outside air (including dry bulb temperature, relative humidity, calculated dew point, CO2 concentration, and static air pressure) unless otherwise noted.

B. Route global outside air pressure within the building to differential pressure sensor locations in minimum 3/8” Type M copper tubing (pressure test tubing as specified).

C. Submit proposed location of Outside Air sensors to Engineer for approval.

3.03 AIR HANDLING UNIT AHU-4 with SF-4 and RF-4

A. System controls for AHU-4: 1. Supply fan SF-4 on/off control, status, and run time 2. Supply fan VFD speed control, status, trouble, and alarm fault. Minimum fan speed 20% (adj.) 3. Supply fan speed controlled by supply air static pressure measured 2/3 of the way in the SA duct run. Initial set point shall be 0.75 inches (adj.) 4. Supply air pressure set point optimized to reset based on cooling and heating demand. 5. Supply fan status by differential pressure across fan

6. Duct high static pressure sensor located in large SA duct main downstream of the AHU. 7. Return fan RF-4 on/off control, status, and run time 8. Return fan VFD speed control, status, trouble, and alarm fault. Minimum fan speed […….]% (adj.) 9. Return fan speed controlled to maintain relief plenum pressure. Initial set point shall be 0.5 inches (adj.) 10. Return fan status by differential pressure across fan 11. Duct low static pressure sensor located in large return main upstream of the return fan. 12. Manual reset safety relay by BMCS 13. Mixed air temperature 14. Supply air temperature set point optimized to reset based on cooling and heating demand. Initial set point shall be 55 F 15. Return air temperature 16. Minimum outside air damper with position feedback 17. Economizer damper with position feedback controlled by enthalpy and dew point 18. Return air damper with position feedback controlled by differential pressure sensor located in mixed air plenum 19. Relief air damper with position feedback controlled by differential pressure sensor located in relief air plenum 20. Outside air temperature (global) 21. Outside air humidity (global) 22. Calculated outside air dew point (global) 23. Calculated outside air enthalpy (global) 24. Outside air reference static pressure (global) 25. Filter differential pressure

B. System controls for hot water heating coils [1 coil]

1. Two way modulating control valve with position feedback [1 valve] 2. Entering and leaving heating water temperature [1 valve] 3. Heating coil leaving air temperature sensors [1 coil] 4. Heating water valves to 100% on low water detection

C. System controls for chilled water coils [1 coil]

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. Chilled water control valve with position feedback 2. Entering and leaving chilled water temperature 3. Cooling coil leaving air temperature sensors [1 coil] 4. Safety low temperature limit switches [1 coil] 5. Chilled water valve open to […] % on low temperature detection

D. Controls furnished and installed by Division 26, with connections by the BMCS Contractor. 1. Duct smoke detectors supply and return air duct for AHU-4.

E. System controls provided by Division 23, and wired by Division 26, monitored by BMCS thru auxiliary contacts. 1. Combination Fire Smoke Damper and position indicator 2. Status shall indicate damper open 3. Status shall indicate damper closed

F. System controls furnished and installed by Division 23; wired by Division 26; control wiring, start-up, and programming by Division 23; and, coordination with the BMCS and TAB Contractors: 1. VFDs for supply and return fans.

G. Alarm Matrix

Alarm Send Operator Alarm Condition Display Type alarm to to Clear

SA duct high press 2 5 6,7 9

RA duct low press 2 5 6,7 9

SF-4 fail 1 5 7 10

RF-4 fail 1 5 7 10

SF-4 VFD fault 1 5 7 10

RF-4 VFD fault 1 5 7 10

Smoke detected 2 5 7 11 Comb Fire Smoke damper closed 1 5 7 9

Freezestat trips 1 4 7,8 11

Damper fail 3 5 6 9

Heating valve fail 1 4 7,8 11

Cooling Valve fail 1 4 7,8 11 Supply temp above set point 1 4 7 9

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 Supply temp below set point 1 4 7 9

Dirty filters 3 5 6 9

* Alarm types: 1-critical; 2-general; 3-maintenance ** Display types: 4-point value or status; 5-alarm message *** Send alarm to: 6-Alarm log; 7-On call staff; 8-facility manager **** Operator to Clear: 9-auto reset when alarm condition clears; 10-manual reset at device; 11-manual reset safety relay

H. AHU-4 Safety Relay 1. See Alarm Matrix above for points connected to the AHU-4 Safety Relay. 2. When safety relay trips, fans SF-4 and RF-4 shall stop, outside and relief dampers close, and return air damper open. 3. Chilled water valve close. 4. Relay and pushbutton reset to be located adjacent to AHU-4. 5. Upon manual reset, AHU system shall return to the previous mode. 6. Safety relay shall prevent reset if Fire Smoke Damper is closed.

I. Occupied Cooling Mode 1. AHU-4 shall be indexed from Unoccupied to Occupied Mode by schedule. 2. In Cool Down mode, the minimum outside air damper, economizer damper, and relief air damper are closed, return damper fully open, and supply and return fans run continuously. 3. When space temperature drops to the Occupied Cooling set point, or cool down period times out, minimum outside air damper opens to admit Occupied minimum of […….…] cfm (adj.). 4. Return fan speed varies to maintain relief plenum pressure 5. Return damper modulates to maintain mixed air plenum static pressure 6. Economizer damper under the control of the Economizer 7. Supply fan speed varies to maintain SA duct static pressure 8. Heating control valves are locked out 9. The chilled water valve is enabled when: a. AHU-4 is on and, b. the economizer is inactive 10. Modulate the two-way chilled water valve to maintain the (variable) supply air temperature set point.

J. Occupied Heating Mode - same as Occupied Cooling Mode except for the following: 1. Cooling control valve shall be locked out 2. Dampers remain in closed position during morning warm up mode 3. The heating control valve is enabled whenever: a. AHU-4 is on and, b. the economizer damper is closed 4. Modulate the two-way heating valves to maintain their respective coil leaving air temperatures (variable).

K. Unoccupied Cooling Mode - same as Occupied Cooling Mode except for the following: 1. AHU-4 supply and return fans shall continue to run 2. AHU-4 minimum outside air damper shall fully close unless call for outside air generated by building pressurization.

L. Unoccupied Heating Mode - same as Occupied Heating Mode except for the following: 1. AHU-4 supply and return fans shall continue to run

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2. Unless call for outside air by building pressurization or CO2 override sequence, minimum outside air damper shall be fully closed.

M. Economizer Mode 1. Economizer mode shall be enabled whenever: a. Outside air enthalpy is less than return air enthalpy and, 2. If AHU-4 is in Economizer Mode, economizer damper shall modulate to maintain mixed air temperature at the supply air temperature set point.

N. Minimum Graphic Display 1. AHU fans, coils, filters, and associated dampers and controls. 2. Ambient temperature, humidity, CO2, enthalpy, and static pressure 3. Warm-up/cool-down and Occupied/unoccupied modes 4. Warm-up/cool-down and Occupied/unoccupied schedule to be user adjustable 5. Log supply, return, and relief air temperatures 6. Log chilled supply and return water temperatures 7. Log supply and minimum outside airflows 8. Log Occupied/Unoccupied runtimes 9. Log all fan runtimes 10. Floor plan showing AHU-4, VAV Terminal Units, Rooms and Room Numbers served, room sensors, and static pressure sensors.

3.04 FINNED TUBE RADIATION

A. Controls 1. Two-way modulating control valve 2. Zone space sensor 3. Space set points not to be occupant adjustable

B. Alarm Matrix for Fin Tube Radiation

Alarm Send Operator to Alarm Condition Display Type alarm to Clear Motorized valve failure 1 5 7 10 Space temp below 60F 1 4 7 10

C. Occupied Mode 1. Zone valve shall modulate to maintain Occupied space heating set point 10 F (adj.)

D. Unoccupied Mode 1. Zone valve shall modulate to maintain Space set back temperature 65 F (adj.)

E. Minimum Graphic Display 1. Zone space temperature 2. Valve position last commanded 3. Occupied/Unoccupied schedule operator-adjustable

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 6 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 4. Occupied/Unoccupied heating set points operator-adjustable 5. Floor plan showing fin-tube radiation, Room and Room No. served, control valves, and room sensor locations

3.05 MISCELLANEOUS EXHAUST FANS

A. Controls for Toilet Exhaust EF-01, EF-04 1. Exhaust fan EF-01, EF-04, on/off control, status, and run time 2. Fan motor contacts

B. Controls for Shower Exhaust EF-02 1. Exhaust fan EF-02 on/off control, status, and run time. 2. Fan motor contacts

C. Controls for Break Room EF-03 1. Exhaust fan EF-03 on/off control, status 2. Fan motor contacts

D. Controls for Garage Exhaust EF-05 1. Space Temperature 2. Exhaust fan EF-03 on/off control, status and runtime 3. Fan motor contacts 4. Motorized intake damper 5. Motorized exhaust damper

E. Controls for Soiled Exhaust EF-06 1. Exhaust fan EF-03 on/off control, status and runtime

F. Controls for Janitor Exhaust EF-07 1. Exhaust fan EF-03 on/off control, status and runtime

G. Controls for Laundry Exhaust EF-08 1. Space Temperature 2. Exhaust fan EF-01, EF-04, on/off control, status, and run time 3. Fan motor contacts

H. Alarm Matrix for Exhaust Fans

Alarm Send Operator Alarm Condition Display Type alarm to to Clear

EF-01,02,03,04 Fan Fail 3 5 6 9

EF-05 Fan Fail 1 5 7 9 EF-05 Damper Position Fail 2 5 6 9 EF-05 Low Space Temp Fail 1 4 7 10 EF-06,07 Fan Fail 3 5 6 9 EF-08 High Space Temp Fail 1 4 7 9

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 7 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 EF-08 Fan Fail 2 5 6 9

I. Exhaust Fans Operation 1. EF-01 thru EF-04 a. Start fan when light switch is activated. b. Stop fan 10 min (adj.) after light switch is turned off. 2. EF-05 a. Fan shall run when CO detector indicates level above setpoint. b. Fan shall run a minimum of 15 mins out of every hour. c. Send alarm when space temp is below 45 F (adj.) d. Intake and Exhaust damper to open when fan is ON, closed when fan is OFF. 3. EF-06 and EF-07 a. Fan shall run continuous. 4. EF-08 a. Revers acting STAT shall activate fan when temp exceeds 85 F (adj.).

J. Minimum Graphic Display 1. Display fans and dampers 2. Display space temperatures 3. Temperature setpoints to be user adjustable 4. Floor plan to show fans, dampers, and sensors

3.06 VAV PRESSURE INDEPENDENT TERMINAL UNITS WITH HOT WATER REHEAT COILS

A. Controls for VAV Box 1. Damper control with position feedback 2. Discharge air temperature sensor 3. Airflow measurement 4. Occupied cooling minimum cfm* 5. Cooling maximum cfm* 6. Heating cfm* 7. Two-way modulating hot water reheat control valve 8. Zone Occupied cooling space set point (74 F adj.) 9. Zone Occupied heating space set point (70 F adj.) 10. Zone Unoccupied cooling space set point (76 F adj.) 11. Zone Unoccupied heating space set point (68 F adj.) 12. Zone Occupancy sensor override* 13. Zone CO2 ventilation override*

B. Controls furnished and installed by Division 23, with connection by the BMCS Contractor. 1. Occupancy sensor.

C. Occupancy Schedule 1. Typical VAV Box is indexed from Unoccupied to Occupied by one of the following: a. User defined zone time schedule b. Occupancy sensor override

D. Occupied Cooling Mode

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 8 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. On a call for cooling, the VAV damper shall modulate between its minimum and maximum positions to maintain the zone cooling set point. 2. Heating valve shall be closed unless noted otherwise.

E. Occupied Heating Mode 1. On a call for heating, the VAV damper shall modulate to its heating position. 2. Heating valve shall modulate to satisfy the zone heating set point. 3. If heating valve is fully open and space temperature continues to fall, VAV box damper shall modulate open until space is satisfied.

F. Unoccupied Cooling Mode 1. VAV box dampers, serving zones with Occupancy Sensor override a. shall fully close whenever space temperature is less than the cooling set up temperature. 2. When space temperature exceeds the set up temperature, VAV damper shall modulate between its closed and maximum positions to maintain the zone cooling set point. 3. Reheat valve shall be closed.

G. Unoccupied Heating Mode 1. VAV box dampers, serving zones with Occupancy Sensor override a. shall fully close when space temperature is above the heating set back temperature. 2. When space temperature drops below the night setback temperature, VAV damper shall open to its heating position. 3. Heating valve shall modulate to satisfy the zone heating set point.

H. Alarm Matrix for VAV Boxes with Hot Water Reheat

Alarm Send Operator to Alarm Condition Display Type alarm to Clear Zone High Space Temp 3 4 6 9 Zone Low Space Temp 3 4 6 9

I. Alarm Setpoints 1. High zone temperature if the zone temperature is greater than the cooling setpoint by 4 degrees F (adj.). 2. Low zone temperature if the zone temperature is less than the heating setpoint by 4 degrees F (adj.).

J. CO2 Sensor Override (Lobby Space) 1. When space CO2 reading exceeds the CO2 set point, VAV box damper shall modulate to its maximum cooling position. 2. Reheat valve shall modulate to maintain space temperature. 3. When space CO2 reading drops below set point, the reheat valve shall close and VAV box damper shall modulate to maintain space temperature.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.07 VAV PRESSURE INDEPENDENT TERMINAL UNITS WITH HOT WATER REHEAT COILS AND RADIATION.

A. Same as 3.06 above, except on heating the VAV box closed to a minimum and the reheat valve and radiation valve shall modulate in sequence to maintain set point.

3.08 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONSTANT VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS WITHOUT HOT WATER REHEAT COILS (TAB-X, TAB-Y, TAB-Z)

A. VAV box controller modulates damper to maintain air volume set point.

B. Display VAV airflow location on graphics.

3.09 UNIT HEATERS AND CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. System Controls for Unit Heater 1. Two-way two-position heating control valve. 2. User defined Zone Occupied/Unoccupied schedule 3. Space temperature sensor a. Zone Setpoint Adjustment to be made by BMCS only b. No occupant adjustment

B. Alarm Matrix for Unit Heaters

Alarm Send Operator to Alarm Condition Display Type alarm to Clear Abnormal fan off 1 4 7 10

Zone Low Temp 1 4 7 10

C. eating Mode 1. On a call for heating, valve shall open and fan run to maintain the Occupied set point 68F (adj.). 2. When heating set point is satisfied, fan shall stop and valve close.

D. Alarm Set Point 1. Zone low temperature 45 F (adj.).

3.10 VAV PRESSURE INDEPENDENT TERMINAL UNITS WITHOUT HOT WATER REHEAT COILS

A. Controls for VAV Box 1. Damper control with position feedback 2. Airflow measurement 3. Zone cooling space set point (85 F adj.) 4. Zone CO2 ventilation override*

B. Controls furnished and installed by Division 23, with connection by the BMCS Contractor. 1. Occupancy sensor.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Occupancy Schedule 1. Typical VAV Box is indexed from Unoccupied to Occupied by one of the following: a. User defined zone time schedule b. Occupancy sensor override

D. Cooling Mode 1. On a call for cooling, the VAV damper shall modulate between its minimum and maximum positions to maintain the zone cooling set point.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 11 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 0993 – 12 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 232113

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe and pipe fittings for: 1. Heating water piping system 2. Chilled water piping system 3. Equipment drains and overflows

B. Valves and miscellaneous accessories: 1. Unions and flanges 2. Strainers 3. Check valves 4. Gate valves 5. Ball valves 6. Butterfly valves

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 078413 – Penetration Firestopping

C. Section 230500 – HVAC Basic Materials and Methods

D. Section 230529 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

E. Section 230548 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment

F. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

G. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation

H. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties.

I. Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006).

C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18).

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 1 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).

E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

F. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2006a.

G. ASTM A 234 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2006a.

H. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.

I. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.

J. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.

K. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

B. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.

C. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.

D. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicated otherwise.

E. Use ball valves in piping 2” and smaller and butterfly valves in piping 2-1/2” for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

F. Use globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

G. Use drain valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.

H. Install but not furnished under this Section: 1. Temperature wells and/or sensors 2. Control valves

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 2 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Welders Certificate: Include welder’s certification of compliance with ASME (BPV IX).

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME (BPV IX)

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing Sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HOT WATER PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, ERW. 1. Fittings: Carbon steel, schedule 40 weld type fittings 2-1/2” and larger. Malleable iron, 150 lb. threaded 2” and smaller. 2. Joints: a. 2” and smaller - threaded, b. 2-1/2” and larger - welded.

B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 88 Type L, Hard Drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver.

2.02 CHILLED WATER PIPING

B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 88 Type L, Hard Drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 3 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver.

2.03 EQUIPMENT CONDENSATE DRAINS AND RELIEF VALVE PIPING

A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 88, Type M Hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver.

2.04 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe sizes 2 Inches and smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: 300 psig malleable iron threaded union, with bronze to iron ground joint 2. Copper Pipe: Bronze ground joint, soldered connection

B. Pipe sizes 2-1/2 Inches and larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, weld flange. Slip-on flanges shall be welded on outside and inside where pipe meets the inner diameter of the flange 2. Copper Piping: 150 psig Cast Bronze 3. Gaskets: Compressed 1/16 inch thick preformed gasket to match flange face

2.05 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. All 2” and smaller copper piping connections to a dissimilar metal shall be made with insulated type dielectric unions or flanges to prevent corrosion and galvanic action.

B. All 2-1/2” and larger copper piping connections to a dissimilar metal shall be made with insulated dielectric flange kits to prevent corrosion and galvanic action. Dielectric flange kit shall consist of a 1/8” phenolic retainer with a Viton sealing ring. Provide one phenolic sleeve and two 1/8” phenolic washers and two 1/8” galvanized steel washers for each bolt.

2.06 STRAINERS

A. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Screwed brass or iron body for 125 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Flanged iron body for 125 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Mueller 2. Dunham-bush 3. Hoffman 4. Armstrong International, Inc.

2.07 SHUT OFF AND ISOLATION VALVES

A. Pipe sizes 2" and smaller, high and low pressure. Bronze body 400 psi WOG full port ball valve, lever handle, chrome plated bronze or stainless steel ball, teflon seat, teflon stuffing box seal, screwed, soldered or union ends. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Apollo Series 77 b. Watts Series B-6080, B6081

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 4 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 c. Milwaukee BA 400

B. Pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger, 125 lbs. and less. Cast iron 175 psi rated butterfly valve with extended neck for insulation, stainless steel shaft, electroless nickel or bronze disc, EPDM seat and shaft seals capable of dead end service at 150 psi differential. Lever operators shall be used on valves less than 6", gear operated on valves 6" and larger. Tapped lug body shall be used on all isolating valves. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 2-1/2" thru 12" DeZurik BGS b. Milwaukee CL223E (6" or larger CL323E) c. 14" and larger DeZurik 632, Milwaukee ML323E

2.08 CHECK VALVE

A. Pipe sizes 2 inch and smaller, bronze body, 125 lb., swing check, soldered or screwed, bronze disc, renewable seat. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Stockham Figure B-309Y or Fig. 319Y b. Milwaukee Model 508

B. Pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger, iron body, bronze fitted, 125 lb. swing check valve. Flanged ends and bolted cap with bronze, disc, disc ring, hinged, seat ring and brass hinge pin. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Stockham Figure G-931 b. Milwaukee Model F-2974

C. Vertical, center guided, flanged: 2" and larger, center guided, non-slam, 125 psi, iron body, bronze disk, stainless steel spring. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. CPV 20D b. Nibco F910 c. Mueller Model 105 MAP

2.09 DRAIN VALVE

A. Drain valves for hydronic systems, core water systems, at risers and low points of mains, shall be bronze body ball valve, 3/4" threaded inlet, 3/4" hose end outlet.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Apollo 78-100 2. Watts B6002CC

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 5 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 232500 for additional requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interference with use of space.

D. Provide a set sleeve with water stop plate at all exterior wall penetrations. Sleeve shall be minimum Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Sleeve inside diameter shall encompass pipe and link seal. Provide link seal as described in Part 2 – Products.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Use cut grooved mechanical couplings and mechanical fasteners only in accessible locations, on condenser and chilled water piping only.

G. Where steel pipe is used provide screwed joints up to and including 2 inch. Weld piping 2-1/2 inch and larger, including branch connections.

H. Make screwed joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with linseed oil or other approved nontoxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

I. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.

J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

K. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.

L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

N. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 083100.

3.03 WELDING

A. Welding: All pipe welding shall be done by licensed and certified pipe welders who are thoroughly trained in electric arc and/or gas welding and experienced in the welding positions and materials required. Certification shall be for type of Work and welding procedure being performed by welder and shall be accomplished in accordance with ASME “Qualification Standard for Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators”. No welds shall be made by any welder until copies of the certification have been submitted to Engineer/Architect.

B. The use of mitered fittings such as mitered tees, mitered elbows, etc., in welded lines will not be permitted. All reductions in pipe size shall be made with manufactured welding reducers. Weld-o-lets are not acceptable. All elbows shall be with manufactured welding elbows. All tees shall be with manufactured welding tees.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 6 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Pipe caps in welded lines may be fabricated from flat steel plate cut round and inserted into the pipe. A sufficient depth to permit a fillet weld equal to the plate thickness. Thread-o-lets are acceptable only for thermometer, pressure gauge, and sensor wells.

D. The pipe ends in all tees, laterals, and reducers shall be carefully prepared to provide for proper weld penetrations in accordance with ANSI Standards.

3.04 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS TESTING

A. Piping: Test hydrostatically at not less than 100 psig or 1-1/2 times the system working pressure, whichever is greater for a period of two hours, prior to application of pipe insulation and final connection to equipment. The testing for proper water flow balancing shall be performed and paid for by this Contractor.

3.05 EQUIPMENT CONDENSATE DRAINS AND RELIEF VALVE PIPING

A. Pipe all relief valve discharge condensate drains to floor drain.

B. Pipe discharge shall be located to allow safe access to equipment should discharge occur.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 7 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2113 – 8 HYDRONIC PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 232114

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pump suction fittings

B. Flow indicators, controls, meters

C. Relief valves

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping

C. Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.

C. Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority having jurisdiction.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls.

F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2114 – 1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing Sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR VENTS

A. Cole #14 key operated with 1/4" copper tubing shall be used on small branch runouts and individual terminal heating units.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman #79 2. ITT Bell & Gossett 3. Taco, Inc. 4. Armstrong International, Inc. 5. American Tube

2.02 VACUUM BREAKER

A. Brass body with 3/4" IPS shank and stem, machined brass seat and Buna-N O-ring.

B. Stainless steel spring adjusted to open at 2" Hq and field adjustable from 1/4" to 20" Hq.

C. Pressure rating: 150 psi maximum.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman #62

2.03 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body construction, EDPM diaphragm, stainless steel springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME rating and labeled.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett 790 or 1170 2. Watts 3. Taco, Inc. 4. Thrush 5. Armstrong

2.04 BALANCE VALVE AND FLOW FITTING

A. Globe valve for balancing and positive shut off, nonferrous metal capable of positive shutoff, with multi-turn adjustment for maximum balance and tamperproof memory stop. Position display window on handwheel.

B. Pressure/temperature readout ports for measurement through a portable meter.

C. Meter - Compatible with balance valve. Portable computerized with quick connections capable of reading flow measurements in gpm.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2114 – 2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 D. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Tour Anderssen a. Valve STAD or STAF b. Meter - CBI meter 2. Mepco – MPV Series with Mepco probes and differential pressure meter 3. Nibco – 1710 Series thru 2” and 737 series 2-1/2” and larger plus digital manometer Figure 1020

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where large air quantities can accumulate provide capped air collection standpipe with keyed air vent.

C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

D. Provide drain valves at all system low points and as indicated.

E. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump.

F. Provide valve drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2114 – 3 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2114 – 4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 232123

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pumps

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230500 – HVAC Basic Materials and Methods

C. Section 230513 - Electrical Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

D. Section 230716 - HVAC Equipment Insulation

E. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping

F. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support requirements and recommendations.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 INLINE PUMPS, SINGLE PHASE MOTORS, 2" SUCTION AND DISCHARGE MAX., 50 FT. HEAD MAX.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2123 – 1 HYDRONIC PUMPS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 A. Construction 1. Body - Iron 2. Impeller - Bronze 3. Shaft - Carbon Steel with aluminum bronze shaft sleeve 4. Seal - Mechanical, carbon seal ring with ceramic seal seat 5. Operating Temperature - 225 degrees F. 6. Working Pressure - 175 psi

B. Motor 1. Type - open drip-proof 2. Overload protection - built-in thermal 3. Bearings - Bronze, sleeve, oil lubricated 4. Characteristics - Non overload on pump curve 5. Voltage as scheduled on the Drawings

C. Capacities - As scheduled on Drawings

D. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Bell & Gossett Series 60 2. Taco 1600 3. Approved equal

2.02 INLINE PUMPS, THREE PHASE MOTOR, 2" SUCTION AND DISCHARGE MAX., 50 FT. HEAD MAX.

A. Construction 1. Body - Iron 2. Impeller - Bronze 3. Shaft - Carbon Steel with aluminum bronze shaft sleeve 4. Seal - Mechanical, carbon seal ring with ceramic seal seat 5. Operating Temperature - 225 degrees F. 6. Working Pressure - 175 psi

B. Motor 1. Type - Open drip-proof 2. Bearings - Bronze, sleeve, oil lubricated 3. Characteristics - Non overload on pump curve 4. Voltage as scheduled on the Drawings 5. All three phase motors for mechanical equipment rated one horsepower and larger shall meet NEMA Premium Efficiency standards NEMA Standard MG1-2003.

C. Capacities - As scheduled on Drawings.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett Series 60 2. Taco 1600 3. Approved equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2123 – 2 HYDRONIC PUMPS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum space recommended by manufacturer.

C. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized check valve on pump discharge. On pumps without variable frequency drives, provide line size check valve, balance valve and shut off valve or a triple duty valve.

D. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.

E. Contractor shall check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.

F. Install base mounted pumps on 4” concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place.

G. Lubricate pumps before start-up.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2123 – 3 HYDRONIC PUMPS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2123 – 4 HYDRONIC PUMPS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 232213

STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe and pipe fittings for: 1. Steam and steam condensate piping system

B. Valves and miscellaneous accessories: 1. Unions and flanges 2. Strainers 3. Gate valves 4. Ball valves 5. Butterfly valves 6. Globe valves 7. Check valves

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 078413 – Penetration Firestopping

C. Section 230500 – HVAC Basic Materials and Methods

D. Section 230529 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

E. Section 230548 – Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment

F. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

G. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation

H. Section 232214 - Steam and Condensate Specialties

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006).

C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

D. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2006a.

E. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2004.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2213 – 1 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. When more than one piping system material is selected, ensure systems components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, unions, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

B. Use unions and flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Use dielectric unions where joining dissimilar materials. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicated otherwise.

D. Use gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

E. Use globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Welders Certificate: Include welder’s certification of compliance with ASME (BPV IX).

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME (BPV IX)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig galvanized malleable iron, threaded

B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on 2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed non-asbestos graphite fiber

2.02 GATE VALVES

A. Steam Valves - Low Pressure (up to 15 psi) 1. Gate Valves - 2" and smaller. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, union bonnet, solid wedge disc. a. Acceptable Manufacturer:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2213 – 2 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1) Powell Fig. 2714 (150#) (threaded) 2. Gate Valves - 2-1/2" and larger. Iron body, bronze trim, outside screw rising stem, bolted yoke-bonnet, solid wedge disc, flanged ends, ASTM 125#. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) Powell Fig. 1793

B. Steam Condensate - Low (up to 15 psi) 1. Gate Valves - 2" and smaller. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, union bonnet, solid wedge disc. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) Powell Fig. 2714 (150#) (threaded) 2. Gate Valves - 2-1/2" and larger. Iron body, bronze trim, outside screw rising stem, bolted yoke-bonnet, solid wedge disc, flanged ends, ASTM 125#. a. Acceptable Manufacturer:

2.03 BALL VALVE – STRAINER BLOW OFF

A. 2” and Smaller - 3 piece full port bronze or carbon steel body, minimum 400 psi WOG ball valve, lever handle, stainless steel ball & stem, glass reinforced PTFE seat with durafill, reinforced pipe stem packing and stem thrust bearing, screwed ends.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Watts Series B-6800SS 2. Apollo 82-100 3. Neles Jamesbury Series 3A

2.04 GLOBE VALVE

A. 2" and smaller: 1. Threaded, union bonnet rising stem, Class 150 bronze body, replaceable stainless steel seat and disc. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Crane 14-1/2P b. Jenkins 2032J

B. 2-1/2” and Larger 1. Iron body, bolted bonnet, OS & Y, replaceable bronze seat & disc, Class 125 flanged. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Crane 351 or Crane 353 b. Jenkins 2342J or 2344J

2.05 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. Bronze body 125 lb., swing check, screwed, bronze disc seat. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Stockham Fig. 319 b. Crane Fig. 36

B. 2 Inches and over 1. Iron body, 125 psi lb., swing check, flanged, bronze disc, renewable seat. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Stockham Fig. G-931 b. Crane Fig 383

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2213 – 3 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Whenever Work is suspended during construction protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 232500.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.

E. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

F. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of pipe level.

G. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

H. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

I. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 083100.

K. Slope steam piping one inch in 40 feet in direction of flow. As above, use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of pipe level.

L. Slope steam condensate piping one inch in 40 feet. Provide drip trap assembly at low points and before control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to nearest condensate receiver. Provide loop vents over trapped Sections.

M. Where uncovered, exposed pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings, they shall be fitted with escutcheon plates. Plates shall be set tight against wall or floor. Plates on other than exposed pipes shall be prime coated.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2213 – 4 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.03 WELDING

C. Pipe caps in welded lines may be fabricated from flat steel plate cut round and inserted into the pipe. A sufficient depth to permit a fillet weld equal to the plate thickness. Thread-o-lets are acceptable only for thermometer, pressure gauge, and sensor wells.

D. The pipe ends in all tees, laterals, and reducers shall be carefully prepared to provide for proper weld penetrations in accordance with ANSI Standards.

3.04 STEAM SYSTEMS TEST

A. All steam and return piping shall be subject to an air test. Low pressure steam and all return and pumped condensate – 75 psi. The pressure shall be maintained for a period of two (2) hours with no drops in air pressure – soap test all.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2213 – 5 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2213 – 6 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 232214

STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Steam traps

B. Steam air vents

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements of Section 019113 – LEED Commissioning Requirements and Section 019114 – LEED Commissioning Plan apply to this Section.

C. Section 230716 - HVAC Equipment Insulation

D. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation

E. Section 232213 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

B. ASTM A 105/A 105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications; 2003.

C. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings; 2004.

D. ASTM A 395/A 395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures; 1999 (Reapproved 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: 1. Provide for manufactured products and assemblies required for this Project. 2. Include product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load served, and features for each specialty. 4. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application, selection, and hookup configuration. Include pipe and accessory elevations.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2214 – 1 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SPECIALTIES © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, servicing requirements, and recommended spare parts lists.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing Sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STEAM TRAPS

A. Steam Trap – Float and Thermostatic: 1. Application: a. Heating Coils b. Steam to Hot Water Heat Exchanger c. Unit Heaters 2. Steam Trap Performance: a. A safety factor of 1-1/2 to 1 shall be used in determining the size of traps for all drip lines, hot water storage heaters and convertors. A factor of 2-1/2 to 1 shall be used in determining the size of traps for all steam heating coils. b. Pressure Differentials: 1) Low Pressure Systems: 1/4 psi 3. Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A 126 cast iron or semi-steel body and bolted cover, stainless steel or bronze bellows type air vent, stainless steel or copper float, stainless steel lever and valve assembly a. Rating: 15 psi WSP b. Features: Access to internal parts without disturbing piping, bottom drain plug. c. Manufacturers: 1) Spirax Sarco 2) Armstrong International, Inc. 3) TLV 4) ITT Hoffman Specialty

B. Steam Traps 1. Application a. End of main and riser drip assembly 2. Manufacturer: a. Steam Guard

2.02 STEAM AIR VENTS

A. Float type thermostatic vent, non-vacuum. Single non-adjustable port

B. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc. 2. ITT Hoffman Specialty

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2214 – 2 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SPECIALTIES © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3. Spirax-Sarco

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install steam and steam condensate piping and specialties in accordance with ASME B31.9.

B. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Steam Traps: 1. Provide minimum 3/4 inch size on steam mains and branches. 2. Install with union or flanged connections at both ends. 3. Provide gate valve and strainer at inlet, and gate valve and check valve at discharge. 4. Provide minimum 10 inch long, line size dirt pocket between apparatus and trap.

D. Remove thermostatic elements from steam traps during temporary and trial usage, and until system has been operated and dirt pockets cleaned of sediment and scale.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2214 – 3 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SPECIALTIES © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 2214 – 4 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SPECIALTIES © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 3100

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal ductwork

B. Flexible ductwork

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

C. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation

D. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories

E. Section 233600 - Air Terminal Units

F. Section 233700 - Air Outlets and Inlets

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a.

B. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2002.

C. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1985, First Edition.

D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all labor and materials to install complete and operational duct systems.

B. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

C. Make connections to equipment, louvers, diffusers, devices, etc. shown on the Drawings.

D. Installed under this section but not furnished: 1. Motorized control dampers 2. Smoke damper/fire smoke dampers 3. Air flow measuring stations 4. VAV Box controllers

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 1 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration.

D. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures for glass fiber ducts.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTWORK - LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE – RECTANGULAR

A. Ventilating ductwork shall be galvanized sheet steel except where specified otherwise, ASTM Specification A-93-59T in gauges as follows, with all sheets over 17" in width being crossbroken.

REQUIRED GAUGES (RECTANGULAR DUCTS) Low Pressure Medium Pressure (Duct Pressure to 1-1/2" S.P. (Duct Pressure 1-5/8" to 5-1/2") Sizes Iron U.S. Aluminum Iron Inches-Width Gauge B&S Gauge U.S. Gauge 4 thru 12 #26 #24 (.02) #24 13 thru 30 #24 #22 (.025) #22 31 thru 54 #22 #20 (.032) #20

B. Ductwork that will be painted shall be made using “paint grip” galvanized steel. Oils shall not be used in the manufacturing process.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 2 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2.02 SHEET METAL WORK - CIRCULAR DUCT

A. All ductwork will be manufactured by the same firm to assure tight fit of all ductwork and components whether circular or rectangular.

B. Ductwork to be painted shall be made with “paint grip” galvanized steel. The forming process shall use a lubricant compatible with the paint to be applied.

C. Round duct shall be manufactured of galvanized steel meeting ASTM-A653 and A924.by the following methods and in the minimum gauges listed below.

Diameter Minimum Gauge Method of Manufacture 3" thru 14" 26 Ga. Spiral Lockseam

D. Spiral duct shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate any leakage under the pressure for which this system has been designed.

E. Fittings and couplings shall be of the following minimum gauges:

Diameter Gauge 3" thru 36" 20 Gauge

F. All fittings are to have continuous welds along all seams. All divided flow fittings are to be manufactured as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded into spiral duct sections.

G. All 90 degree tees and 45 degree laterals (wyes) up to and including 12" diameter tap size shall have a radiused entrance into the tap, produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of weld build-up, burrs or irregularities.

H. Elbows in diameters 3" through 14" shall be two section stamped elbows. All other elbows shall be gored construction with all seams continuous-welded. Elbows shall be fabricated to a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross-section diameter. All elbows, not die-stamped, shall be fabricated according to the following schedule:

Elbow Angle Number of Gores Less than 35 degrees 2 36 degrees over 71 degrees 3 Over 71 degrees 5

I. Where it is necessary to use 2-piece mitered elbows, they shall have turning vanes in accordance with the following schedule:

Diameter Number of Vanes 3" thru 9" 2 10" thru 14" 3

The leading edge of all vanes in ducts over 20" diameter shall be hemmed with 1/2" fold- back. Turning vanes in ducts over 24" shall be reinforced by rods or sectional construction to limit unsupported length of 24". Vanes shall be minimum of 20 gauge.

2.03 COUPLINGS FOR ROUND DUCT

A. Pipe-to-pipe joints in diameters to 50" are by the use of sleeve couplings, reinforced by rolled beads.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 3 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. Pipe-to-fitting joints in diameters to 50" are by slip-fit of Projecting collar of the fitting into the pipe.

C. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar is 2" for diameters through 9" and 4" for diameters 10" and up.

2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE

A. Flexible duct for connections, where shown to diffusers, to registers, or air bonnets shall be made with factory pre-insulated duct composed of a corrosion-resistant reinforcing wire helix permanently bonded and enclosed in Tedlar film, then covered with 1" thick 3/4 lb. density fiberglass insulation blanket sheathed in a vapor barrier laminated to glass mesh.

B. Ductwork must comply with latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be tested as Class 1 Air duct material, UL Standard 181.

C. Engineering data shall be as follows: 1. C factor: 0.23 Btu/hr./sq. ft./degrees F at 75 degrees F 2. Vapor Barrier Permeance: 0.30 GR/24 hr./M sq./MN hq per ASTM Method E96, Procedure A 3. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F to 180 degrees F 4. UL Rated Velocity: 4000 cfm 5. Flame Spread: not over 25 6. Smoke Developed: not over 50

D. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass 2. Glass Flex type OC-41 3. Thermaflex type M-KE 4. Metalfax 5. Wiremold

2.05 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. All ductwork shall have all longitudinal and transverse joints butted and sealed with 3M's or United Sheet Metal's mastic duct sealer products.

B. Crossbreaking. All rectangular ducts whose width is 18" or greater shall have sheet metal surfaces crossbroken. Crossbreaking is not required if the ducts are insulated.

C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.

F. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 4 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 G. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.

H. Duct Area. Where sound insulation is specified and/or shown for ducts, they shall be constructed so the sizes shown on the Drawings are the dimensions inside the insulation.

I. A reduction in duct area because of the installation of sound insulation will not be permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All ductwork shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings. All ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. Ductwork shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the latest edition of ASHRAE Guide and Data Book (Systems and Equipment) Air Duct Design. Gauge of metal and reinforcing shall be in accordance with their table.

B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.

C. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

D. Changes of Duct Locations. Ducts shall be installed substantially as indicated on the Drawings. However, where conflicts occur with other trades, the Architect reserves the right to require the Contractor to make minor changes in duct locations without extra cost to the Owner.

E. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

F. Duct take-off fittings. All take-offs from main trunk ducts shall be of the "divertor" type unless specifically shown otherwise

G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.

I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

J. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 5 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3.02 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Ductwork shall be substantially supported with hangers to structure depending upon local conditions, placing supports according to recommendations of SMACNA along entire length of duct. Upper ends of hangers to be securely fastened to structure or masonry by means of expansion bolts. No wood plug driven in masonry will be permitted. Punching of holes in any way will not be allowed. No nails, wires or cotter pins shall be run through ducts. All necessary hangers, braces, tees, angles and supports will be provided and secured in a satisfactory manner.

B. Horizontal. All ductwork shall be securely anchored to the building construction in a manner to be free from vibration and swaying under all conditions of operation. Ducts 60" x 24" and larger shall be supported with trapeze hangers consisting of rods and angles. Hangers for ducts smaller than 60" x 24" shall be attached to the duct with a minimum of two (2) screws and shall have straps of the same material as the duct in accordance with the following table where; W = Width and D = Depth of the duct.

Galvanized and Stainless Steel Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size 10 ft Spacing 8 ft Spacing W + D STRAP ROD STRAP ROD 96" or Less 1" x 16 GA 3/8" 1" x 18 GA 3/8"

Galvanized and Stainless Steel Round Duct Hangers Minimum Size DUCT MAXIMUM STRAP ROD QTY. DIAMETER SPACING 10" - 24" 12' 1" x 20 GA 1/4" 1

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

A. Ductwork shall be installed with spin-on fittings with integral volume damper for connection to branch duct. Connection to terminal supply device shall be through a coupler specifically designed to lock into device employed. Flexible insulations shall be attached to rigid duct and/or couplers with coupler clamp.

B. Installed lengths of flexible ductwork shall be limited to 5'-0" maximum lengths. When longer distances between terminals and branch ducts are encountered, the balance shall be made up of rigid sheet metal sections of construction hereinbefore specified.

3.04 DRAWINGS

A. In general, the Drawings of the Mechanical Systems and equipment are to scale, however, to determine exact locations of walls and partitions the Contractors shall consult the Architectural and/or Structural Drawings which are dimensioned. Drawings shall not take precedence over field measurements.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 6 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. Drawings of piping and ductwork although shown on scale Drawings are diagrammatic only. They are intended to indicate size and/or capacity where stipulated, approximate location and/or direction, and approximate general arrangement of one phase of Work to another, but not the exact detail or exact arrangement of construction. If it is found, before installation of any or all construction phases, that a more convenient, suitable or workable arrangement of any or all phases of the Project would result by varying or altering the arrangement indicated on the Drawings, the Architect or Engineer may require any or all Contractors to change the location or arrangement of their Work without additional cost to the Owner. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Architect or Engineer.

C. Where discrepancies are discovered after certain portions or phases of any contract have been installed, the Architect or Engineer reserves the right to require any or all Contractors to make minor changes in pipe, duct, fixture or equipment locations or arrangements to avoid conflicts with other Work at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Because the Drawings are to a relatively small scale to show as large a portion as is practical, the fact that only certain features of the system are indicated does not mean that other similar or different features or details will not be required. Contractors shall furnish all incidental labor, material or equipment for the systems in their control so that each system is a complete and operating one unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the detailed body of the specifications.

3.05 DUCT SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for all duct penetrations through walls.

B. Internal dimension of duct sleeve shall be large enough to encompass duct with insulation and packing material.

C. Comply with Division 03.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 7 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3100 – 8 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 3300

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Air turning devices/extractors

B. Duct access doors

C. Flexible duct connections

D. Volume control dampers

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230548 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment

C. Section 230913 – Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC Controls: Control damper operators

D. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings

E. Section 233600 - Air Terminal Units

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2002.

B. NFPA 92A - Standard on Smoke-Control Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.; 2003.

E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.; 2006.

F. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.; 1999.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each control damper.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3300 – 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide requirements for access to fire dampers, F/S dampers, and control dampers.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Record actual locations of access doors.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect dampers from soiling and damage to frames, operating linkages, blades, and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR TURNING VANES

A. Turning vanes shall be well braced and rough or raw edges shall be avoided to prevent objectionable noise; they shall be the double thickness type and shall be the same gauge as the duct in which they are installed. Vanes shall be preassembled on runners before being installed in the elbow. Vanes shall conform to the following table: Inside Outside Duct Vane Blade Blade Runner Width Spacing Radius Radius Width Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Up to 25 1-1/2 centers 2 1 2-1/4 Above 25 3-1/4 centers 4-1/2 2-1/4 4-1/2

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate 2. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 3. Aero Dyne 4. Approved equal

2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Where motorized dampers, fire dampers, control equipment, etc. are installed in ducts, provide access panels made airtight with gasketed edges. Use sponge rubber or felt gasketing material. The panels shall be attached to the duct with cam latches. The access panels shall be of adequate size to permit maintenance of the equipment.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cesco 2. Nailor Industries, Inc. 3. Ruskin Company

2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3300 – 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq. yd. a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide 2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gauge thick galvanized steel

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 233100 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.

C. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment.

D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct takeoff. Additional damper may be required and shall be provided by this Contractor in ducts to balance air system. Branch take-off sizes on Drawings shall be strictly adhered to and if deviations are necessary due to construction conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall be contracted before installation is made.

E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3300 – 3 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3300 – 4 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 3413

HVAC FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Inline Fans - Centrifugal

1.02 DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230513 - Electrical Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

C. Section 230548 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment

D. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation

E. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (R2000).

B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2003.

C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1999 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).

D. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; http://www.amca.org/licenses/search.aspx.

E. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2005.

F. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2005.

G. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3413 – 1 HVAC FANS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99

D. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 degrees F.

E. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete installation instructions.

E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 INLINE FANS - CENTRIFUGAL

A. Inline fans shall be direct or belt driven as scheduled. Provide belt guard on belt driven equipment. The square shaped fan housing shall be of heavy gauge formed steel. One of the sides shall be accessible to the entire drive assembly and wheel allowing for cleaning, inspection or service. The motor shall be mounted on the hinged side exterior isolated from the airstream. The belt and pillow block ball bearings shall be protected from the airstream by an enclosure. The shafts shall be keyed to both the wheel and pulley. The fan inlet shall be a spun venturi throat overlapped by a backward curved centrifugal wheel and spun cone for maximum performance. Fan shall be AMCA Certified. Factory mounted and wired disconnect switch.

B. Provide extended lube lines for all fittings.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3413 – 2 HVAC FANS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2. Peerless 3. Acme 4. Twin City Fan 5. Penn Barry 6. Carnes 7. Jenn Air 8. Cook

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 220548.

C. Furnish all support beams, angles, stands, etc. to install equipment specified in this Section.

D. Provide vibration isolation as specified in Section 230548.

E. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge to ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

F. Provide sheaves required for final air balance.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3413 – 3 HVAC FANS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3413 – 4 HVAC FANS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 233600

AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Variable volume terminal units

B. Integral heating coils

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC

C. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping

D. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties

E. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings

F. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories

G. Section 233700 - Air Outlets and Inlets

H. Section 238216 - Air Coils

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2002.

B. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings which indicate air flow, static pressure, and NC designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 to 4 inch wg.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support and hanging details, and service clearances required.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3600 – 1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONSTANT AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS WITH REHEAT (TAB)

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Enviro-Tech 2. Trane 3. Anemostat 4. Titus 5. Krueger 6. Metal Aire 7. E. H. Price

B. Terminal units shall be ARI certified of size and capacity as shown and scheduled on the Drawings.

C. Cabinets shall be constructed of not lighter than 22 gage, zinc-coated steel. Internal surfaces shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with one inch thick glass fiber material surface- treated to prevent erosion and having U. L. approval meeting NFPA 90A. Provide access panel in constant volume box prior to reheat coil for cleaning.

D. Air volume damper shall be constructed to prevent air leakage in excess of 2% of rated air quantity at 1" inlet static pressures.

E. Automatic damper operator shall be furnished by Temperature Control Contractor and installed at factory and thoroughly tested for proper performance.

F. Performance of units shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 36-72 and ADC Standard 1062R4 with no ductwork between the unit discharge and sound room.

G. Provide automatic flow controller to maintain nominal air quantity with variations in static pressure up to 2.0" over recommended static pressure for duct design. (Pressure independent control.)

H. Comply with requirements of Section 238216 for hydronic coils.

2.02 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS WITH REHEAT (TAB)

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3600 – 2 AIR TERMINAL UNITS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Enviro-Tech 2. Trane 3. Anemostat 4. Titus 5. Krueger 6. Metal Aire 7. E. H. Price

B. Terminal units shall be ARI certified of size and capacity as shown and scheduled on the Drawings.

C. Cabinets shall be constructed of not lighter than 26 gage, zinc-coated steel. Internal surfaces shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with 1" thick or greater of 1-1/2 lb. density glass fiber material surface-treated to prevent erosion and having U. L. approval meeting NFPA 90A. Provide access panel in VAV box prior to reheat coil for cleaning.

D. Air volume damper shall be constructed to prevent air leakage in excess of 4% of rated air quantity at 3" inlet static pressures.

E. Automatic damper operator shall be furnished by Temperature Control Contractor and installed at factory and thoroughly tested for proper performance.

F. Performance of units shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 36-72 and ADC Standard 1062R4 with no ductwork between the unit discharge and sound room.

G. Provide automatic flow controller to maintain nominal air quantity with variations in static pressure up to 2.0" over recommended static pressure for duct design. (Pressure independent control.)

H. Comply with requirements of Section 238216 for hydronic coils.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.

C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.

D. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 233100.

E. Install heating coils in accordance with Section 238216.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3600 – 3 AIR TERMINAL UNITS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3600 – 4 AIR TERMINAL UNITS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 3700

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Diffusers

B. Registers/grilles

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this Project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS AND AIR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Diffusers other than stainless steel shall be prime coated and finished with baked-on white enamel finish. Grilles and registers shall be aluminum or steel prime coated and finished with baked-on white enamel finish. The various grilles, registers and diffusers are indicated on the Drawings by alphabetical letters according to the schedule on Drawings.

B. This Contractor shall determine frame styles by referring to the Architectural Drawings. Where ceilings are exposed grid lay-in type, frame styles shall be lay-in type.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Titus 2. Tuttle & Bailey 3. Krueger 4. J. J. Register 5. E. H. Price

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3700 – 1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Intake/Triage - DD Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 3700 – 2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Intake/Triage - DD Package © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 23 74 13 – PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Packaged rooftop air handling units.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 019113 – General Commissioning Requirements

C. Section 230513 – Electrical Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

D. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (R2000).

B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2003.

C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1999 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).

D. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2005.

E. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2005.

F. ARI 410 - Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2001.

G. ARI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1999.

H. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: 1. Published Literature: Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames. 3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power,

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 7413 – 1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package UNITS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 RPM. 4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity. 5. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Color Samples for Air Handling Unit Screen Panels: Submit paint chart with full range of colors available for selection by Architect.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions.

F. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.

B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

C. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. General 1. The packaged variable air volume, variable supply air temperature, rooftop air handling unit will be mounted on the roof and will consist of one return/exhaust air fan, economizer section, MERV 8 filter bank, heating water coil, chilled water cooling coil and one supply air fan.

B. Unit Construction 1. Outdoor unit roofs shall incorporate a standing seam on the exterior to ensure a rigid roof construction and prevent water infiltration. Roof assembly shall overhang all walls by 1.5- inch minimum to prevent sheeting from roof to side panels. Rain gutters shall also be provided over all doors shorter than total unit height to direct rain away from the door assembly. Outdoor roofs shall be sloped, not less than 0.125 inches per foot, for water drainage. Where outdoor units are shipped in multiple sections, provide standing-seam joiners at each split with adhesive, hardware, and cover strips for field joining by the installing contractor. 2. All unit panels shall be 2" solid, double-wall construction. Unit panels shall be provided with a mid-span, no-through-metal, internal thermal break. Casing thermal performance shall be such that under 55°F supply air temperature and design conditions on the exterior of the unit of 88°F dry bulb and 73°F wet bulb, condensation shall not form on the casing exterior. 3. All outdoor AHU interior casing panels will be made of galvanized steel. External surface of unit casing will be coated with water-based polyurethane paint. Factory-painted units will be able to withstand a salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117 for a minimum

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 7413 – 2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package UNITS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 of 500 consecutive hours and shall meet the following requirements following the salt- spray test: 4. Casing Deflection: The casing shall not exceed 0.0042 inch deflection per inch of panel span at 1.00 times design static pressure. 5. Floor Construction: The unit floor shall be of sufficient strength to support a 300.0 lb. load during maintenance activities and shall deflect no more than 0.0042 inch per inch of panel span. 6. Unit base: a. Manufacturer to provide a full perimeter integral base frame to support and raise all sections of the unit for proper trapping. b. All outdoor unit base frames shall be galvanized steel with welded construction. c. Where indicated, provide a roof curb for supporting the unit on the roof. Roof curb will be at a sufficient height to properly trap unit. Unit base height to be included in total height required for proper trap height. 7. Insulation: Panels shall be insulated with foam insulation and provide a minimum thermal resistance (R) value of 13 ft²-h-ºF/Btu throughout the entire unit. Insulation shall completely fill the panel cavities in all directions so that no voids exist and settling of insulation is prevented. Panel insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A. 8. Drain Pan: a. Provide stainless steel drain pans. In sections provided with a drain pan, the drain pan shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1. To address indoor air quality (IAQ) the drain pan shall be sloped in two planes promoting positive drainage to eliminate stagnant water conditions. Drain pan shall be insulated, and of double wall construction. The outlet shall be the lowest point on the pan, and shall be of sufficient diameter to preclude drain pan overflow under normally expected operating conditions. All drain pans connections shall have a threaded connection, extending a minimum of 2-1/2" beyond the unit base, and shall be made from the same material as the drain pan. b. Drain pan located under a cooling coil shall be of sufficient size to collect all condensate produced from the coil. c. As a minimum the drain pan(s) shall extend beneath all cooling coil sections. 9. Access Door Construction: a. Access doors shall be 2" double wall construction. Interior and exterior door panels shall be of the same construction as the interior and exterior wall panels respectively. All doors shall be provided with a thermal break construction of door panel and door frame. Gasketing shall be provided around the full perimeter of the doors to prevent air leakage. b. Surface mounted handles shall be provided to allow quick access to the interior of the functional section and to prevent through cabinet penetrations that could likely weaken the casing leakage and thermal performance. Handle hardware shall be designed to prevent unintended closure. c. Access doors shall be hinged and removable for quick easy access. Hinges shall be interchangeable with the door handle hardware to allow for alternating door swing in the field to minimize access interference due to unforeseen job site obstructions. Door handle hardware shall be adjustable and visually indicate locking position of door latch external to the section. Door hinges shall be galvanized. d. All doors shall be a minimum of 60" high when sufficient height is available or the maximum height allowed by the unit height. e. Door handles shall be provided for each latching point of the door necessary to maintain the specified air leakage integrity of the unit. Outward swing doors are provided with a single handle linked to multiple latching points. f. Access doors shall be provided for all sections except the coil sections.

C. Economizer Section 1. Unit shall be capable of supporting the damper assemblies for outside, return, and exhaust air.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 7413 – 3 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package UNITS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2. Dampers shall modulate the volume of outdoor, return, or exhaust air. The dampers shall meet the requirements for very low leak dampers in Section 233300.

D. Filter Section 1. A section shall be provided to support the filter rack as indicated throughout the unit. 2. 2-inch pleated media filters made with 100% synthetic fibers that are continuously laminated to a supported steel-wire grid with water repellent adhesive shall be provided. Filters shall be capable of operating up to 625 fpm face velocity without loss of filter efficiency and holding capacity. The filters shall have a MERV 8 rating when tested in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2. 3. Differential Pressure Gage: A differential pressure gage shall be flush-mounted with casing outer wall with probes piped to both sides of the filter bank to indicate status. The gage shall be diaphragm-actuated dial-type and shall maintain a +/- 5 percent accuracy within operating temperature limits of the air handler. Range shall be 0 - 2.0 in. w,g, 4. Dirty Filter Switch: A differential pressure switch piped to both sides of the filter shall indicate filter status.

E. Coil Sections 1. The coil sections shall be provided complete with coils and coil holding frames. 2. The coils shall be installed such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casings. 3. If two or more cooling coils are stacked in the unit, an intermediate drain pan shall be installed between each coil and be of the same material as the primary drain pan. Like the primary drain pan, the intermediate drain pan shall be designed being of sufficient size to collect all condensation produced from the coil and sloped to promote positive drainage to eliminate stagnant water conditions. The intermediate pan shall begin at the leading face of the water-producing device and be of sufficient length extending downstream to prevent condensate from passing through the air stream of the lower coil. Intermediate drain pan shall include downspouts to direct condensate to the primary drain pan. The outlet shall be located at the lowest point of the pan and shall be sufficient diameter to preclude drain pan overflow under any normally expected operating condition. 4. Water Coils: See Section 238216 – Air Coils.

F. Condensate Overflow Switch 1. A float switch conforming to UL 508 shall be factory-installed in the drain pan that will detect a high condensate water level and be used to shut off the air handling unit in the event that the primary drain is blocked. The float switch shall be located at a point higher than the primary drain line connection and below the overflow rim of the drain pan. 2. Sensor shall be a 1,000 ohm, platinum 385 curve, resistive temperature detector (RTD).

G. Access/Inspection Section 1. Multiple access sections shall be provided to allow additional access/inspection of unit components and space for field-installed components as needed. An access door shall be provided for easy access. All access sections shall be complete with a double-wall, door. Interior and exterior door panels shall be of the same construction as the interior and exterior wall panels, respectively. All doors shall be provided with a thermal break construction of door panel and door frame.

H. Direct-Drive Plenum Fan Sections 1. The fan type shall be provided as required for stable operation and optimum energy efficiency. The fans shall be multiblade-type direct-drive plenum fans. Motor bearing life of the direct-drive plenum fan shall be not less than L-10 250,000 hrs. Fans shall be certified as complying with AHRI Standard 430 for airflow performance. Fans shall be tested and rated in-accordance with AHRI Standard 260 for sound performance.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 7413 – 4 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package UNITS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 2. On units supplied with plenum fans, expanded metal door guard(s) shall be supplied on the access door(s) to the fan and those downstream access door(s) where unintended access to the plenum fan could occur. 3. Fan assemblies including fan, motor and sheaves shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes at all bearing supports. Manufacturer must ensure maximum fan RPM is below the first critical speed. 4. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration type isolators inside cabinetry. 5. Fan motors shall meet the requirements of Section 230513. 6. All supply fans and return fans shall be provided with variable frequency drives (VFD). VFD’s shall meet the requirements as indicated in Section 230514.

I. Lights and GFCI Duplex Receptacle: Provide factory wired LED lights to a single pilot light switch mounted to the exterior of this air handling unit for a 120V/1 phase connection by Division 26. Lights are to be located in each Section, and a duplex GFCI receptacle shall be mounted near the supply fan Section. Provide a dedicated 120-volt circuit to power a 15 ampere lighting and GFCI receptacle circuit. Wiring for units with shipping splits shall be done in the field as the responsibility of the installing Contractor.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Trane 2. Daikin 3. York

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Bolt Sections together with gaskets.

C. Install flexible duct connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork and air handling unit sections. Ensure that metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

D. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.

E. Hydronic Coils 1. Hydronic Coils: Connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflow arrangement). 2. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top. 3. Provide manual air vents at high points complete with stop valve. 4. Ensure water coils are drainable and provide drain connection at low points.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 7413 – 5 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package UNITS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 7413 – 6 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package UNITS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 238101

TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Finned tube radiation

B. Unit heaters

C. Cabinet unit heaters

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230513 – Electrical Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

C. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls

D. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping

E. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate cross Sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations. 2. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output provided. 3. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access doors in radiation cabinets required for access or valving.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8101 – 1 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNIT Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FIN TUBE RADIATION

A. Fin tube elements shall be steel fin and steel tube or non-ferrous fin and copper tube of capacity and sizes as rated by IBR and as scheduled on the Drawings. The active finned lengths, not overall element length, shall be as noted.

B. Fin tube elements shall be supported with noiseless slide cradle hangers with nylon or ball bearing rollers. The hangers shall be firmly attached to the building structure and shall be spaced a maximum of 48 inches on center.

C. For wall mounted radiation, the covers shall be rigid with snap-lock or tongue and grooved without screws through the top and front and shall have wall seal continuous metal hanger using full backplate, and shall be firmly attached to the building structure. Backplates shall be 18 gauge minimum.

D. Tops and fronts of covers shall be 16 gauge minimum and louvers shall be pencil-proof. Covers shall be run from wall to wall unless shown otherwise. Cabinet cover shall be prime coated and factory finished with baked enamel. Color shall be as selected by Architect.

E. Provide all joiners, trim pieces, wall sleeves, access doors at all valves and balancing cocks, corners, end caps and column covers required to make a complete installation as shown. All components shall be firmly and neatly attached to provide a finished appearance.

F. Pedestal type shall be low profile with 16 gauge slip joint type enclosure with end caps, extended anodized aluminum outlet and side panels. Cabinet cover shall be prime coated and factory finished with baked enamel. Color shall be as selected by Architect.

G. Manufacturers: 1. Sigma 2. Sterling 3. Vulcan

2.02 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Cabinet unit heaters shall have heating coils of copper tubes, non-ferrous fins encased in metal frame with cast iron header. Cabinets shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with fronts secured by key-operated locks. Cabinet cover shall be prime coated and factory finished with bake enamel, color shall be as selected by Architect / Engineer. Manufacturers:

B. Elements shall be designed and tested for 150 pound working pressure. The supports for the heating elements shall be adjustable so the elements can be pitched in the cabinets to allow for proper venting.

C. Fans shall be double inlet centrifugal with balanced wheels and shall be selected for quiet operation. RPM shall not exceed those listed. Fan drives shall be V-belt or multi-speed direct

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8101 – 2 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNIT Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 drive. V-belt shall be high temperature type. Motors shall be 120 volt, 60 hertz, single phase with built-in automatic reset and overload protection.

D. Cabinet unit heaters shall be types and have capacities as listed on the Drawings when using 60 degrees F air inlet temperature.

E. Units for wall mounting shall have inverted flow. Supply air shall discharge at base of unit.

F. Provide disconnect switch mounted and wired to motor.

G. Manufacturers: 1. Sigma 2. Sterling 3. Vulcan

2.03 UNIT HEATERS

A. Types and capacities shall be as shown and scheduled on the Drawings. Capacity shall be based upon 60 degrees F entering air.

B. Heating elements shall be copper tube expanded into aluminum fins, supported in cabinets. Core shall be tested at not less than 150 psi.

C. Fans shall be propeller type and statically balanced. Motor shall be single speed unless otherwise noted, with integral overload protection and with a disconnect switch factory mounted on cabinet. Fan shall be protected by an OSHA approved guard. Large motors are to be resilient mounted.

D. Cabinets shall be heavy gauge steel with prime coat finish over rust preventative. All horizontal unit heaters shall have horizontal discharge louvers and refer to schedule if double deflection louvers are used on some heaters.

E. Manufacturers: 1. Sigma 2. Sterling 3. Vulcan

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Do not damage equipment or finishes.

C. Finned Tube Radiation: Locate on outside walls and run cover wall-to-wall unless otherwise indicated. Center elements under windows. Where multiple windows occur over units, divide element into equal segments centered under each window. Align cabinet joints with window mullions. Install wall angles where units butt against walls.

D. Unit Heaters: Hang from building structure, with pipe hangers anchored to building, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom unless otherwise indicated.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8101 – 3 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNIT Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 E. Cabinet Unit Heaters: Install as indicated. Coordinate to assure correct recess size for recessed units.

3.02 CLEANING

A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.

B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8101 – 4 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNIT Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package METHODS © IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 SECTION 238216

AIR COILS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water heating coils

B. Water cooling coils

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation

C. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties

D. Section 232214 - Steam and Condensate Heating Specialties

E. Section 232300 - Refrigerant Piping

F. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings

1.03 REFERENCES

A. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Product Data: Provide coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions.

D. Certificates: Certify that coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors.

B. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8216 – 1 AIR COILS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WATER COILS

A. Tubes: 5/8 inch OD seamless copper arranged in parallel or staggered pattern, mechanically expanded into fins, silver brazed joints.

B. Fins: Aluminum or copper continuous plate type with full fin collars. Fin surface shall cover 100% of primary surface.

C. Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced mounting flange with 3/8 inch bolt holes on 3 inch centers. Provide tube supports for coils longer than 36 inches.

D. Headers: Seamless copper tube with silver brazed joints.

E. Configuration: Left or right hand as required. Drainable, with threaded plugs in headers for drain and vent.

F. Air vent extended to exterior of A.H.U.

G. Drain valve on bottom coil extended to exterior of A.H.U.

H. Fin Spacing: as scheduled

I. Testing: Air test under water to 200 psi for working pressure of 200 psi and 220 degrees F.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Daikin 2. Trane 3. York

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

B. Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1. Support coil Sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angle frames and secure to casings. 2. Provide frames for maximum three coil Sections. 3. Arrange supports to avoid piercing drain pans. 4. Provide airtight seal between coil and duct or casing.

C. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges.

D. Install coils level.

E. Make connections to coils with unions and flanges.

F. Hydronic Coils

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8216 – 2 AIR COILS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 1. Hydronic Coils: Connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflow arrangement). 2. Provide shut-off valve on supply line and lockshield balancing valve with memory stop on return line. 3. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top. 4. Provide manual air vents at high points complete with stop valve. 5. Ensure water coils are drainable and provide drain connection at low points.

G. Cooling Coils 1. Provide drain pan and drain connection; fabricate from 20 gage galvanized steel, extend 3 inches from face of entering air side, 6 inches from face of leaving air side, and 4 inches from face of eliminators. Pipe drain pans individually to floor drain with water seal trap.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8216 – 3 AIR COILS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 23 8216 – 4 AIR COILS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 SECTION 26 0500 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions) and Division 1, General Requirements, govern Work of this Section.

B. Work included in Division 26, 27, and 28 of the specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials unless otherwise specified, and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of the complete electrical system as required by these specifications or shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. The work shall also include the completion of details of the electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems indicated on the drawings or specified herein.

1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Contractor shall examine the site and become familiar with all local conditions prior to submission of the bid. Contractor shall be considered to accept all visible conditions existing at the site at the time of bidding and no extra compensation will be allowed for difficulties encountered which are existing and visible at the site at time of bidding.

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The entire installation shall meet all requirements of the most recently adopted edition of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, and amendments thereto and all State and local regulations as they may apply. Standards of the following associations or organizations shall be followed and applied where applicable as minimum requirements.

ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act SBC - State Building Code OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NBFU - National Board of Fire Underwriters UFC - Uniform Fire Code IBC - International Building Code IFC - International Fire Code NEC - National Electrical Code

B. Electrical clearances shall be maintained at both electrical and mechanical equipment to comply with the NEC and the local AHJ interpretation of required equipment clearances. This contractor shall insure that other disciplines are aware of those requirements and that their equipment is installed accordingly.

C. Contractor shall adhere to all city and Hennepin County standards.

1.04 PERMITS AND LICENSES

A. Permits and licenses applicable to the electrical work shall be secured and paid for before actual work is started. Perform any requirements stipulated therein.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0500 – 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 26 05 05 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical demolition

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work shall be as specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED AND DO NOT INDICATE EVERY BOX, CONDUIT, OR WIRE THAT MUST BE REMOVED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID AND VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS.

B. Where walls, ceilings, structures, etc., are indicated as being removed on general or electrical drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all electrical equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc., from the removed area.

C. Where ceilings, walls, structures, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others, this Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, storage, and replacement of equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc.

D. Where mechanical or technology equipment is indicated as being removed on electrical, mechanical, or technology drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for disconnecting the equipment and removing all starters, VFD, controllers, electrical equipment, raceways, wiring, etc. associated with the device.

E. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend conduit and wire to facilities and equipment that will remain in operation following demolition. Extension of conduit and wire to equipment shall be compatible with the surrounding area. Extended conduit and conductors to match existing size and material.

F. Coordinate scope of work with all other Contractors and the Owner at the project site. Schedule removal of equipment and electrical service to avoid conflicts.

G. Bid submittal shall mean the Contractor has visited the project site and has verified existing conditions and scope of work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Owner before turning off power to circuits, feeders, panels, etc. Coordinate all outages with Owner.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0505 – 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package REMODELING

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. Assume all equipment and systems must remain operational unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings.

D. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, structures, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

E. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service.

F. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service.

G. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service.

H. Existing Egress lighting System: Maintain existing system.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1 of Specifications and this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring and raceway to source of supply. Existing conduit in good condition may be reused in place by including an equipment ground conductor in reused conduit. Reused conduit and boxes shall have supports revised to meet current codes. Relocating conduit shall not be allowed.

D. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Remove all associated clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with raceway removal.

E. Disconnect and remove outlets and devices that are to be demolished. Remove outlet or devices’ associated back box, supports, and conduit and conductors back to source.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. Ballasts in light fixtures installed prior to 1980 shall be incinerated in EPA approved incinerator or disposed of in EPA certified containers and deposited in an EPA landfill certified for PCB disposal or recycled by permitted ballast recycler. Punctured or leaking ballasts must be disposed of according to Federal Regulations under the Toxic Substance Control Act. Provide Owner and Architect/Engineer with a Certificate of Destruction to verify proper disposal.

H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Patch openings to match existing surrounding finishes.

I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide junction boxes and access panel as appropriate.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0505 – 2 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package REMODELING

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. Extended conduit and conductors to match existing size and material.

K. Disconnect and remove security and special system boxes supports and conduit as required by demolition work executed by security and special systems contractor.

L. HID and fluorescent lamps, determined by the Toxicity Characteristic Leachate procedure (TCLP), to be hazardous waste shall be disposed of in an EPA-permitted hazardous waste disposal facility or by a permitted lamp recycler.

M. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

N. Floor slabs may contain conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for taking any measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This includes x- ray or similar non-destructive means. Where conduit is in concrete slab, cut conduit flush with floor, pull out conductors, and plug conduit ends.

O. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper investigation.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

C. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning as indicated on the drawings. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts, and broken electrical parts. Replacement parts shall match specified components for new luminaires of same type when applicable. Reinstall luminaire and connect to circuiting as indicated on drawings.

D. ELECTRICAL ITEMS (E.G., LIGHTING FIXTURES, RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, CONDUIT, WIRE, ETC.) REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1 of Specifications.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0505 – 3 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package REMODELING

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0505 – 4 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package REMODELING

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the furnishing, installation and connection of the low voltage power and branch circuit wiring.

B. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be provided, installed and connected to perform the functions specified in other sections of these specifications.

C. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, communication and signal wiring shall be provided, installed and connected to perform the functions specified in other sections of these specifications.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 31 - Earthwork

B. Section 260500 - General Requirements

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Building Wire/Cable: Aetna, American, Anixter, Cablec, Capital, Carol, Collyer, General Cable, Manhattan, Pierce, Perelli, Seicor, Southwire or Superior Essex.

B. Twist Connectors: Heyco, Ideal, 3M or T & B.

C. Plastic Tape: AMP, Eagle, 3M or Okonite.

D. Connectors Mechanical: Burndy, Greaves, Square D, or T & B.

E. Prefabricated, wirenut “pigtails”: Ideal Industries, Inc. “Term-a-Nut”, or equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cable and Wire: 1. Cable and wire shall be in accordance with NEMA, ICEA, UL and NEC and as hereinafter specified. 2. Conductors:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0519 – 1 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 a. Shall be annealed copper. b. Shall be single conductor or stranded conductor for sizes No. 12 and smaller. Where stranded conductors are utilized for branch circuit wiring to devices final connection, the termination onto screw terminals shall use single conductor wire with pigtails to stranded wire. c. Shall be stranded for sizes No. 10 and larger. d. Size shall be not less than shown on the drawings. Minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG. 3. Insulation: Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, insulation shall be as follows: a. XHHW, or dual rated THHN-THWN. Provide XHHW-2 type insulation for branch circuits routed on a roof. b. Isolated power system wiring: Shall be type XHHW with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less. 4. Multi-wire Prefabricated Power Cables shall only be used for 6 foot light fixture whips.

5. Color code: a. All secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows: 208/120 Volt Phase Black A Red B Blue C White Neutral

All No. 12 and No. 10 branch circuit conductors including the neutral shall have solid color compound or solid color coating. b. No. 8 AWG and larger phase conductors shall have either: 1) Solid color compound or solid color coating. 2) Stripes, bands, or hash marks of colors specified above. 3) Colored pressure-sensitive plastic tape. Tape shall be applied in half overlapping turns for a minimum of three inches for all terminal points and in all junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs, manholes and handholes. Tape shall be 3/4-inch wide with colors as specified above. The last two laps of tape shall be applied with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable stating size and insulation tape. c. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the existing wiring systems. d. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.

B. Splices and joints 1. Shall be in accordance with UL and NEC. 2. Branch circuits, No. 10 AWG and smaller: a. Connectors shall be solderless, screw-on, pressure cable type, 600 volt, 105 degrees C, with integral insulation. They shall be approved for copper and aluminum conductors and shall be reusable. b. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires. c. The number, size and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturers packaging shall be strictly complied with. 3. Feeder Circuits: a. Connectors shall be indent, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type. Material shall be high conductivity and corrosion-resistant. b. Connectors for cable size 250 MCM and larger shall have not less than two clamping elements or compression indents. c. Splices and joints shall be insulated with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage and temperature. Insulation shall be not less than that of the conductors being joined.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0519 – 2 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

C. Control Wiring: 1. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except minimum size may be No. 14 AWG. 2. Wire size shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under in-rush conditions will not adversely affect operation of the controls.

D. Communication and Signal Wiring: 1. Shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturers of the communication and signal systems. 2. Shall not be less than shown on the drawings. 3. Wiring shown on drawings is for typical systems. Provide wiring as required for the systems being furnished. 4. Multi-conductor cables shall have the conductors color coded.

E. Wire Lubricating Compound: 1. Shall be suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with and shall not harden or become adhesive. 2. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein.

B. Install all wiring in raceway systems.

C. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, and pull boxes.

D. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight.

E. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train and tie the cables in individual circuits.

F. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground between the wire and conduit, where the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound.

G. Wire Pulling: 1. Provide suitable installation equipment to prevent cutting or abrasion by conduits during pulling of feeders. 2. Ropes used for pulling feeders shall be made of suitable nonmetallic material. 3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors. 4. All cables in a single conduit shall be pulled in together.

3.02 SPLICE INSTALLATION

A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0519 – 3 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, install wiring and connect to perform the functions shown on the drawings and specified in other sections of these specifications.

B. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems.

C. Where power supply circuits are not shown for systems, connect them to the nearest panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation.

D. Install a locking device on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental de-energizing of the systems.

E. System voltages shall not exceed 120 volts and shall be lower voltages where shown on the drawings or required by the NEC.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0519 – 4 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Equipment Grounding 1. All metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, equipment housings and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be grounded for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below)

C. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Grounding, fittings and devices: Burndy, Crouse Hinds, Kearney, Square D, T & B, Thompson Lightning Protection.

B. Exothermic connections - Cadweld or Thermoweld; installed by factory certified personnel.

2.02 GROUNDING WIRES

A. Shall be UL and NEC approved types, copper, with THW insulation color identified green, except where bare conductors are shown on the drawings, or specified.

B. Wire size shall not be less than shown on the drawings and not less than required by NEC Article 250-66 or Article 750.122.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERALLY

A. Grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified.

3.02 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A. Switchboards

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0526 – 1 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. Connect the feeder green grounding conductors to the ground bus in the enclosure with suitable pressure connectors. 2. Connect metallic conduits, which terminate without mechanical connection to the housing, by grounding bushings and ground wire to the ground bus. 3. Connect metallic conduits 2 inch diameter and larger with grounding bushings and grounding conductor to the ground bus.

B. Conduit Systems 1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. Ground continuity shall be established by using standard couplings, connectors and fittings and jumpers at all grounding type wiring devices, motor and ground terminals. 2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain a grounding conductor. 3. Conduit provided for mechanical protection and containing only a grounding conductor shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

C. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install green grounding conductors as follows: 1. All feeders and branch circuits. 2. All wiring systems consisting of flexible metal conduit. 3. All items of equipment where the final connection is made with flexible metal conduit shall have a grounding wire. 4. All additional locations and systems as shown on the drawings.

D. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures and Panelboards 1. Bond the grounding wires to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets and other enclosures through which the ground wires pass (except for special or isolated grounding systems). 2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination. 3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs for terminating the ground wire.

E. Motors, Starters, and Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) 1. Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter housing for ground wire termination and install ground wire between. 2. Make ground wire connections to ground bus in motor control centers. 3. For VFD’s provide equipment ground wire from drive to motor and from drive to power source. Size ground wire per NEC unless otherwise noted on drawings. Do not run branch circuit to motor and drive in same conduit.

F. Receptacles: Receptacles shall have a ground wire terminate directly on green ground terminal, and shall be connected to the outlet box.

G. Lighting Fixtures: Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires from the fixture.

H. Electrical Equipment: Fixed electrical equipment shall have a ground lug installed for termination of the green ground conductor.

3.03 GROUND RESISTANCE

A. The grounding system shall be tested to insure that the ground resistance does not exceed 5 ohms between any point in the ground system.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0526 – 2 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the furnishing, installation and connection of conduit, fittings and boxes to form complete, coordinated, grounded or non-metallic ungrounded raceway systems. Raceway is required for all wiring unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise.

B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 7 - Fire Stopping

B. Section 260500 - General Requirements

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems

E. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Conduit: Allied, Republic, Wheatland, Alflex, Carlon, Calbrite, Calbond, or Robroy.

B. Surface Metal Raceway: Airey-Thompson, Walker or Wiremold.

C. Metallic outlet junction and pull boxes, fittings and wireways: Appleton, Gedney, Midland Ross, Killark, Raco, Square D, Hoffman, Red Dot, Thomas and Betts, Carlon or Steel City.

D. Non-metallic junction and pullboxes, fittings: Scepter or equal.

E. Fire Stops: General Electric Pensil 851 silicone foam, T & B Flame Safe, Dow Corning silicon RTV foam, 3M Fire Barrier, W.R. Grace Polycel 100, Chase Foam CTC PR-855, or STI Spec- Seal.

F. Water Stop Seals: O-Z/Gedney “WSK or CSM” and O-Z/Gedney “CSB” or equal conduit sealing bushings.

2.02 MATERIAL

A. Conduit 1. Rigid steel: Fed. Spec. WW-C-581. 2. Rigid intermediate steel conduit, IMC: UL 1241 and Fed. Spec. WW-C-58l.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 1 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Fed. Spec. WW-C-563. It shall not be used with cable rated above 600 volts. 4. Flexible steel conduit, commercial greenfield: Fed. Spec. A-A-55810 Type 4. 5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall consist of flexible galvanized steel tubing over which is extruded a liquid-tight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Conduit shall be provided with a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. 6. Direct burial plastic conduit: Fed. Spec. W-C-1094, type II or type III. Conduit shall be l Schedule 40 PVC or high density PE. Utilize low Volatile Organic Compound (V.O.C.) internally and external of building. 7. Surface metal raceway: Fed. Spec. W-C-582.

B. Conduit Fittings 1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings: a. Fittings shall be standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows. Fed. Spec. W-F-408 shall apply, except material shall be steel only. IMC couplings may be integral retractable type. b. Locknuts shall be of the conduit type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure. c. Bushings shall be of the non-metallic or metallic insulating type and consist of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted. d. Erickson-type and set-screw couplings may be used to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Set screw fittings shall be approved for concrete installation and be case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. e. Sealing fittings shall be of the threaded cast iron type. Sealing fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. In concealed work, each fitting shall be installed in a flush steel box with blank coverplate having the same finish as that of other electrical plates in the room. 2. Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a. Fed. Spec. W-F-408 shall apply, except material shall be steel only. b. Couplings and connectors shall be set screw type with two screws each. Couplings for conduit sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger shall be set screw type with four screws each. Set screws shall be case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive ground. Provide gland and ring compression type in damp locations. c. Indent type connectors are not permitted. d. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of pot metal are not permitted. 3. Flexible steel conduit, greenfield, fittings: a. Fed. Spec. W-F-406 shall apply, except material shall be steel only. b. Shall be multiple point type, threading into the internal wall of the conduit convolutions or set screw type. 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings: a. Fed. Spec. W-F-406 shall apply, except material shall be steel only. b. Shall be of a type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats. 5. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings: As recommended by the conduit manufacturer. 6. Expansion and deflection couplings: a. 467 and UL 514 shall apply. b. Shall accommodate, 1.9 cm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and shall allow 30 degree angular deflections.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 2 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

c. Shall include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors. d. Shall be watertight, corrosion-resistant, threaded for and compatible with rigid or intermediate metal conduit. e. Jacket shall be flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.

C. Conduit Supports 1. All parts and hardware shall be zinc-coated or have equivalent corrosion protection. 2. Pipe Straps: Fed. Spec. FF-S-760, type 1, Style A or B. 3. Individual Conduit Hangers: Shall be designed for the purpose, and have pre-assembled closure bolts and nut and provisions for receiving hanger rod. 4. Multiple conduit trapeze hangers shall be not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 12 gauge steel, cold formed, lipped channels. Hanger rods shall be not less than 3/8-inch diameter steel. 5. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325. Anchors shall be self- drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion anchors. 6. Where hangers or supports are attached to beams, trusses or other structural supports, the attachments shall be fireproofed equal to supporting members.

D. Surface Metal Raceways 1. Surface metal raceways installed for branch circuits and signal conductors shall be one- piece and shall consist of base and cover section, zinc plated or galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, with full complement of fittings, boxes, adapters to conduit, transitions, etc. Raceway and components shall comply with U.L.-5 and shall be designed to accommodate pulling conductors through the raceway.

E. Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes 1. Shall meet UL-50, UL-514 and Fed. Spec. W-J-800. 2. Outlet boxes shall be at least 1-1/2 inches deep, galvanized code gauge steel. a. For ceiling outlets, boxes shall be 4 inch octagonal, unless specified or required otherwise. Provide 3/8 inch fixture stud for attachment of lighting fixtures where required. b. For wall outlets in stud walls, boxes shall be 4 inch square with plaster ring, with number of gangs for devices shown. c. For wall outlets in masonry, tile or concrete surfaces, boxes shall be 4 inch square with corner type extension rings, and with number of gangs for devices shown. d. For poured concrete construction, boxes shall be concrete tight, and UL listed for concrete installation. e. For surface exposed wall or ceiling outlets, boxes in unfinished areas and equipment rooms shall be 4 inch square or multi-gang boxes with matching raised covers. Boxes in finished areas and where indicated shall be cast FS type with covers similar to those specified for finished plates. f. Cast boxes or fittings for vaportight or explosion-proof locations shall have suitable mounting lugs or feet cast integral with the fitting body. g. For exterior or interior wet or damp locations, boxes shall be cast aluminum type with weatherproof cover. h. For exposed surface metal raceway, such as Wiremold, Plugmold or one-piece raceways, boxes shall be special prefinished type to match raceway system, of gangs to accommodate devices shown, and with covers similar to those specified for finished plates. Verify finish with architect or interior designer. Surface metal raceway shall not be used in wet or damp locations.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 3 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

i. Pull boxes shall be code gauge galvanized steel, of size required for proper conductor installation, with screwed covers.

F. Fire-Stop Material 1. Material shall be intumescent materials consisting of silicone foam sealant, caulk, putty or composite sheet materials, applied in accordance to manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seals for floor, exterior wall and roof shall also be watertight.

G. Sleeves 1. Provide sleeves for all cables passing through walls or floors. 2. Provide sleeves for all conduits passing through masonry and poured concrete walls. Poured concrete walls may be core drilled in lieu of cast-in-place sleeves. 3. Sleeves shall be consistent with fire barrier construction requirements. 4. Sleeves shall be new steel schedule 40 pipe or of greater strength.

H. Wireways: Wireways shall include hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown on drawings. Wireways shall be painted inside and outside with baked enamel finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting of Holes: 1. Holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures shall be cut with a diamond bit core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Engineer as required by limited working space. 2. Holes shall be located so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs, beams or pre- stressed cables. 3. Holes shall be laid out in advance. The Structural Engineer shall be advised prior to drilling through structural sections, for determination of proper layout. 4. Core drilling of holes through post-tension slabs or beams shall not be made until all cables in the immediate vicinity have been located by visual, magnetic, x-ray or other non-destructive means. Core drilling shall be withheld a minimum of three inches from the cables to insure the cables are not broken or damaged due to the coring operation. 5. Shot-in anchors for securing steel studs, conduit hangers, etc. to post-tension slabs or beams shall have a maximum of one-half inch penetration into the slab at areas where cables approach either the top or bottom surfaces of the slabs or beams.

B. Fire-Stops 1. Where conduits, wireways and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, or floors, install a fire-stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Fire-stop material shall be packed tight and completely fill clearances between raceways and couplings. 2. Floor, exterior wall and roof seals shall also be made watertight. 3. Where conduits pierce the roof, refer to architectural specifications and drawings for detail.

C. Waterproof Penetration 1. When conduits pass thru waterproofed building roofs, foundation walls or floors, install waterproof sleeves with waterproofing materials compatible with the waterproofing system installed on the respective surface being penetrated.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 4 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

2. All sleeves through exterior building walls shall prevent water migration and shall be double sealed on the inside and outside of the wall with sealing bushings and stainless steel hardware. Service entrance feeders shall have an additional sealing bushing installed on the inside of conduit to waterproof seal the entrance cable.

D. Sleeves 1. Provide sleeves for all conduits, raceways, cables, ducts or pipes that pass thru walls, concrete slabs, concrete columns or concrete bridging. Provide sleeves whether or not specifically indicated. 2. Provide sleeves passing thru walls, slabs, beams, bridging, or columns, which are 1/2 to 1 inch greater in inside diameter than external diameter of the electrical materials passing through the sleeves. Provide for conduits of diameters 2 inches in diameter or greater. 3. Sleeves through walls shall extend full thickness of wall, cut flush with finished surface. 4. At sleeves through exterior building walls, provide water stop seals between sleeves and or masonry wall material or electrical materials (cables or conduits) passing through sleeves. 5. Permanent sleeves through floor slabs shall extend two inches above finished floor. In mechanical equipment rooms or rooms containing liquid, sleeves shall extend two inches above the floor. Provide concrete curb around group of conduits, raceways, cables, etc. to provide a four inch high watertight barrier at the floor.

3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation shall be in accordance with UL, NEC and as hereinafter specified unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Do not install conduit in stairwells, elevator shafts, or elevator equipment rooms unless conduit is feeding equipment and devices for these rooms or areas. Conduit shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. Where conduit is installed exposed those areas shall be reviewed with the owner and architect prior to installation and as then installed as otherwise directed in these specifications.

B. Size: Minimum size of conduit shall be 1/2-inch. Size shall be in accordance with the NEC, but not less than shown on the drawings. Branch circuit homeruns shall be minimum 3/4 inch size. Branch circuit homeruns shall be defined as the conduit from the panelboard to the first outlet device. This does not apply to motor branch circuits.

C. Conduit installation shall be as follows: 1. Installed as complete runs before pulling in cables or wires. 2. Flattened, dented or deformed conduit is not permitted and shall be removed and replaced. 3. Installed so they will not obstruct head room, walkways or doorways. 4. Cut square with a hacksaw, reamed, burrs removed and drawn up tight. 5. Mechanically and electrically continuous. 6. Supported within one foot of all changes of direction and within one foot of each enclosure to which connected. 7. End of empty conduit to be closed with plugs or caps at rough-in stage to prevent entry of debris until wires are pulled in. 8. Tightening set screws with pliers will not be permitted. 9. Conduits shall be secured to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes by bonding type locknuts. Rigid and IMC conduit installations shall have a locknut on the outside and locknut and bushing on the inside of the enclosure. EMT installations may have a single locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Conduit connections shall not be made to junction box covers.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 5 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

10. Install a pull wire in all empty conduits consisting of one #12 steel or copper wire or heavy duty nylon cord for small conduits and nylon rope for large conduits. 11. Aluminum conduit shall not be used. 12. Seal conduit at all building entrances to exterior equipment such as building mounted lighting, receptacle, and roof top units with suitable compound to prevent the infiltration of moisture and gasses.

D. Conduit Bends: 1. Shall be made with standard conduit bending machines. 2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets and for straightening stubbed out conduits. 3. Conduits shall not be bent with a pipe tee or vise.

E. Layout and Homeruns: 1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, substantially as shown on the drawings. 2. Deviations shall be made only where necessary to avoid interferences and as approved by the Engineer. 3. Where conduit is not shown, provide conduit complying with the N.E.C. per electrical contractor discretion and field conditions. Provide maximum of 3 circuits per homerun, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

3.03 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls 1. 600 Volts and Below a. Conduit shall be rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Types shall not be mixed indiscriminately in the same system. 2. Branch circuit conduits, and conduits feeding ceiling lighting shall not be supported by the suspended ceiling lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air conditioning ducts. Branch circuit conduits serving equipment mounted above or in the ceiling system only, may be fastened to the ceiling support members. All other raceway systems and components shall be independently supported from the structure. 3. Recessed lighting fixtures shall be connected to conduit runs with not over six feet of 1/2" flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.

3.04 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A. 600 Volts and Below 1. Conduit shall be rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Types shall not be mixed indiscriminately in the same system.

B. Conduit shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

C. Horizontal runs shall be installed close to the ceiling or beams and secured with approved conduit straps.

D. Horizontal or vertical runs shall be supported at not over eight foot intervals.

E. Surface Metal Raceways: 1. Surface metal raceways shall be used only where shown on the drawings and shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to the building lines, complete with fasteners, fittings and extensions as required for a complete raceway system. Raceway shall be sized to accommodate number of conductors indicated or required.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 6 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

3.05 BELOW GRADE INSTALLATION

A. 600 Volts and Less. 1. Conduit shall be PVC or high density PE, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specifications. a. Provide Schedule 40 (minimum) below non-paved areas and schedule 80 below paved areas. b. Conduit sweeps or extensions out of the ground or above the floor slab and risers shall be Schedule 80 or PVC coated rigid steel conduit if concealed and only galvanized rigid steel conduit if exposed. c. 90 degree bends underground shall be Schedule 80 PVC or PVC coated rigid steel conduit. 2. Conduit shall be marked at uniform intervals to indicate the kind of material, direct burial type and the UL approved label. 3. Proper conduit fittings and terminations shall be installed as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. 4. Tops of conduit shall be: a. Not less than 24 inches and not less than shown on the drawings below finished grade. b. Not less than 30 inches and not less than shown on the drawings below road and other paved surfaces. 5. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities to avoid damaging them. 6. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly. 7. Do not kink the conduits. 8. Seal conduits, including spare conduits at building entrances and at outdoor terminations for equipment with a suitable compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases. 9. Where metal conduit is shown on drawings, install threaded heavy wall rigid steel galvanized conduit or type A20 rigid steel galvanized conduit coated with 20 mil bonded PVC, or rigid steel or IMC, PVC coated or standard coated with bituminous asphaltic compound.

3.06 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS

A. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, conduits shall be rigid steel, IMC, or Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. PVC may be used where specifically indicated on drawings.

B. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air conditioned spaces or similar spaces.

C. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, conduit below concrete slabs in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers shall be (PVC) rigid steel or IMC. Metallic conduit shall have a factory coating of 20 mil bonded PVC or shall be field coated on the outside with asphaltum before installation. Couplings and damaged areas of coating shall be completely coated after installation. If PVC is installed, all elbows and all stub-ups through slab shall be PVC coated rigid steel or IMC.

3.07 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

A. Flexible metal conduit or Greenfield shall be used for connections to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission. Provide separate insulated copper ground wire within the conduit. Use liquid-

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 7 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

tight flexible metal conduit for all pump motor connections and areas where exposure to wet conditions is possible.

3.08 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Conduits 3 inches and larger, rigidly secured to building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, shall be provided with expansion and deflection couplings. The couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Conduits smaller than 3 inches shall be provided with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint, and connected by 15 inches of slack flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above may be installed.

C. Expansion and deflection couplings shall also be installed where shown on the drawings.

3.09 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION

A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.

B. Pipe straps or individual conduit hangers shall be used for supporting individual conduits.

C. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported by trapeze hangers. Trapeze hanger shall be designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 200 pounds. Each conduit shall be attached by U-bolt or other approved fastener.

D. Conduit shall be supported independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars, angle supports, etc., except as specifically approved by the Engineer.

E. Solid Masonry and Concrete: Fasteners shall be as follows: 1. New Construction: Generally, steel or malleable iron concrete inserts in concrete prior to pouring. 2. Already In-place Construction: a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 1/4-inch bolt size and not less than 1-1/8 inch embedment. b. Power set fasteners shall be approved, and not less than 1/4-inch diameter with depth of penetration not less than three inches. c. Anchors or fasteners attached to concrete ceilings shall be vibration and shock resistant.

F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. Bolts supported only by plaster are not acceptable.

G. Metal Structures: Fasteners shall be machine screw or devices specifically designed and approved for the application.

H. Attachments by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking is not permitted.

I. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 8 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

J. Spring steel type supports or fasteners shall be permitted for concealed 1/2" EMT only serving equipment mounted above or in the ceiling system only.

K. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings. Supports for cable and wire shall have fittings which include internal wedges and retaining collars.

3.10 BOX INSTALLATION

A. Boxes for concealed conduits shall be flush mounted, set plumb, level and true with surrounding materials and shall be set back no more than 1/8 inch from the finished surface. Both sides of boxes shall be secured.

B. Boxes for exposed conduits and metal raceways shall be mounted plumb, level and true with surrounding materials and shall have no projecting edges or corners.

C. Covers shall be provided for all boxes and shall be of a design to fit the particular box and location. Covers shall be aligned with the walls and finishes. Where these covers are to receive a finish coat of paint, this contractor shall furnish covers with one coat of primer. In finished spaces, covers shall be similar to those specified under finished plates.

D. Standard 4-11/16 inch square boxes shall be used for outlets where required for additional wire and connector space.

E. Pull boxes and junction boxes are generally not indicated on drawings except for special requirements. This contractor shall install pull and junction boxes as required to facilitate wire pulling. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed in accessible locations and shall not be installed in finished spaces without prior approval of the Engineer. Pull boxes shall be permanently labeled to identify the system and wiring within.

F. Remove only knockouts required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.

G. Outlet boxes in the same fire-resistive wall or fire-resistive partition shall not be mounted back- to-back but shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24 inches minimum. Where outlet location requirements require back-to-back installation a firestopping method approved by the local authority shall be utilized.

H. Outlet boxes in the same sound insulated wall shall not be mounted back-to-back but shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24 inches minimum.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 9 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0533 – 10 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

SECTION 260538

WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tests and services to install complete wire basket support systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein for project.

B. Wire basket support systems are defined to include, but are not limited to straight sections of continuous wire mesh, field formed horizontal and vertical bends, tees, drop out, supports and accessories.

C. The term "cable ladder" is defined to mean the same thing as cable tray.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

C. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

1.03 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings which constitute a part of these specifications indicate the general route of the wire basket support systems. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, routing, etc., is required.

B. Specifications and drawings are for assistance and guidance, but exact routing, locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor is directed to make field surveys as part of his work prior to submitting system layout drawings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data for wire basket support system showing its complete layout and in accordance with Division 1. 2. Submittal Drawings: Submit drawings of wire basket and accessories including connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, brackets, splice plates, splice bars, grounding clamps and hold down plates showing accurately scaled components. 3. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on wire basket support system including, but not limited to, types, materials, finishes and inside depths.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, wire basket support systems to be installed shall be as manufactured by Cooper B-Line, Inc. [or engineer-approved equal.]

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0538 – 1 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide wire basket of types and sizes indicated; with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, connector plates, splice plates and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards; and with the following additional construction features.

B. Materials and Finishes: Material and finish specifications for each wire basket type are as follows: 1. Zinc Plated: Straight sections shall be made from steel meeting the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A510 and shall be electro-plated zinc in accordance with ASTM B633 SC2. Support accessories shall be coated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC3. All threaded components shall be coated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC1. 2. Paint: Brackets and Straight sections shall be painted Telco Gray over Zinc plated. 3. Pre-Galvanized Zinc: Wall brackets and other pre-galvanized accessories shall be coated with zinc in accordance with ASTM A653.

2.03 TYPE OF WIRE BASKET SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. All straight section longitudinal wires shall be straight (with no bends).

B. Wire basket shall be made of high strength steel wires and formed into a standard 2 inch by 4 inch wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. All wire ends along wire basket sides (flanges) shall be rounded during manufacturing for safety of cables and installers.

C. Wire basket sizes shall conform to the following nominal criteria: 1. Straight sections shall be furnished in standard 118 inch lengths and as required on drawings. 2. Wire basket shall have 2 inch usable loading depth by 12, or 18 inches wide as shown on drawings and as required by owner.

D. All fittings shall be field formed as needed.

E. All splicing assemblies shall be the bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. Hardware shall be either zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC2 or AISI Type 304 Stainless Steel.

F. Wire basket supports shall be center support hangers, trapeze hangers or wall brackets as required by the manufacturer.

G. Trapeze hangers or center support hangers shall be supported by 1/4” or 3/8” diameter rods.

H. Special accessories shall be furnished as required to protect, support and install a wire basket support system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install wire basket as indicated; in accordance with recognized industry practices (NEMA VE-2 2001), to ensure that the cable tray equipment complies with requirements of NEC, and

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0538 – 2 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

B. Coordinate wire basket with other electrical work as necessary to properly interface installation of wire basket cable tray with other work.

C. Provide sufficient space encompassing wire basket to permit access for installing and maintaining cables. Install bottom of basket 4” above lay-in ceiling with minimum of six inches clearance on sizes and 12 inches clearance above basket to nearest obstruction.

D. Hang or support the wire basket system as recommended by the manufacturer. Indicate the number, spacing and type of supports and/or hangers on the shop drawings. Install the wire basket system so that it can at least sustain a working (allowable) load of 60 lbs. per linear foot with a load safety factor of two (2.0) at each 10' span, when tested in accordance with NEMA load test standards for wire basket system.

E. Install wire basket system so the resistance of connections between adjacent sections of wire basket does not exceed 0.00033 ohms. Where the wire basket system is interrupted install a No. 6 AWG bare copper grounding jumper and suitable lugs to ensure ground circuit continuity. Provide a #6 AWG copper ground wire from cable tray to ground bar.

F. Connect all conduits connected to or terminated to the wire basket system with approved conduit termination devices with locknuts and grounding bushings or by clamping the conduit to the wire basket system and installing bonding jumpers with suitable connectors.

G. Install the wire basket so it does not interfere with the "lift-out" feature of lay-in ceilings or block access panels through the ceiling or into equipment, and so there is adequate access for the installation of all cable and wiring.

H. Do not penetrate fire, smoke, water or sound barriers with wire basket systems. Locate such barrier from the architectural drawings and make transitions to conduit when passing through the barrier. Provide firestopping.

3.02 TESTING

A. Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections, and to demonstrate compliance with specified maximum grounding resistance. See NFPA 70B, Chapter 18, for testing and test methods.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0538 – 3 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0538 – 4 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS FOR Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work included in this section includes the identification of electrical equipment as specified and indicated on the drawings.

B. This Contractor shall coordinate a meeting with the owner’s designated representative(s) at the beginning of construction and prior to the fabrication and installation of nameplates and labeling of the electrical systems. Agenda shall include a review of these specification requirements and verification of nomenclature, nameplate styles and colors and labeling requirements required for electrical equipment for this project. Contractor shall document their meeting and submit meeting notes for review and approval by the project Engineer and Owner.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

C. Section 262416 - Panelboards

D. Section 262812 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

E. Section 262913 - Enclosed Controllers

1.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide identification devices for electrical systems and equipment as follows: 1. Provide typewritten card directory describing circuits in each panelboard. Provide new typewritten directories for existing panelboards wherein circuits have been modified. 2. For switch and protective equipment in the power distribution equipment, transformers, relay cabinets, panelboards, terminal cabinets, motor control stations, motor starting equipment, individually provide engraved black laminated plastic plates with white lettering. For power distribution equipment on emergency power provide engraved red laminated plastic plates with white lettering. Characters shall be minimum 3/16" and the inscription shall be centered on the plate. Attach plates with self-tapping screws or adhesive. 3. For motors, communications and signal systems pull and/or junction boxes, provide orange flexible plastic tapes, Dymo Industries, Inc., or equal. 4. Identification nameplates shall be in accordance with the following examples:

Device Typical Legend Secondary Switchboards Panelboard, LV101, MCC#1,etc. Panelboards* HV101, LV101, ELV101, etc. Motor Starters M1; Gen. Supply Fan S1, etc. Terminal Cabinets PA1, TEL1, N/C1, FA1, etc. Transfer Switches Critical Branch, etc. Comm & Signal Systems** PA, TEL, N/C, FA, etc.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0553 – 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

Device Legend Location Secondary Switchboards Device Cover Panelboards Hinged Door Transformer Transformer Case Motor Starters Starter Cover Terminal Cabinets Inside Surface, Hinged Door Motors Motor case near nameplate Comm, Alarm & Signal Box Cover Junction Boxes

*Locate designation on outside surface of panel door in equipment rooms, e.g., electrical closets, mechanical/electrical equipment rooms. Locate designation on inside surface of panel door in finished and occupied rooms.

**Where the boxes are located above suspended ceilings or exposed in unfinished areas, the designation shall be on the front or outside of the cover; and where located in finished spaces, the identification shall be on the inside of the cover.

5. Where conductors of two or more feeder circuits are present in any one pull box or junction box, the conductors shall be identified with tags firmly affixed to the conductors. The tags shall be of fiber or bakelite, at least 1/16" in thickness and 3/4" in diameter, with stamped or engraved characters 3/32" high to indicate the circuit designation. 6. Short Circuit Rating and ARC Flash Warning labels shall be per NEC requirements. 7. Install short circuit rating on all panelboards and distribution equipment. 8. Install ARC FLASH WARNING signs on all panelboards and power distribution equipment. Signs at a minimum shall contain:

9. All feeder terminations shall be identified as to phase for each conductor using tags described in Paragraph 3 above or may be identified with colored paint or colored electrician's tape. 10. Where the engraving of wiring device plates is called for on the drawings, the plates shall be machine engraved and the letters filled with black enamel. Characters shall be at least 3/16" high.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0553 – 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SYSTEMS

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the furnishing installation and connections for a lighting control system as indicated on the drawings and as described herein. It is the intent of this section to provide an integrated, energy saving lighting control system including Lighting Controllers, Lighting Control Devices, Occupancy Sensors, and Daylight Sensor Controls from a single supplier. Contractor is responsible for confirming that the panels, control devices and sensors interoperate as a single system.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System

C. Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below)

D. Section 262726 – Wiring Devices

E. Section 265100 - Lighting

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1. 2. Submit catalog cuts for lighting controllers, power packs/relays, and control devices including wiring diagrams prepared specifically for this project. 3. Submit floor plans showing lighting controllers, control switches, occupancy and daylighting sensor locations. 4. Submit wiring diagram showing areas controlled by time-of-day. 5. Submit wiring diagram of typical room control.

B. Pre-installation coordination meeting notes with the lighting control vendor.

C. Pre-installation programming review coordination meeting notes with the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Cooper Controls, Sensor Switch, light (Acuity), Leviton, or pre-bid approved equal.

B. With both a factory representation and supplying distributor in the local project area.

2.02 ROOM/AREA LIGHTING CONTROLLERS and POWER PACK RELAY

A. Provide fully assembled and tested at locations as indicated on the drawings and as required. Provide relays as required. System shall contain:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 1 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. Controller: capable of controlling time-of-day functions for corridors, hallways, assessment rooms, laundry, lobbies, waiting areas, Public Toilets, and living room area as shown on plans. Provide quantity of power packs as required and for functioned shown on plans. In rooms/areas with time-of-day control, local control switches shall provide override of ‘off’ function for a period of two hours. 2. Controller shall communicate over IP Local Area Network (LAN). 3. Contractor shall coordinate with owner for time on/off functions for each area being controlled, and number of zones required. 4. Power Supply Module a. The incoming line power shall connect to a single dual-rated 120/277 VAC, 60 Hz, +10, -15% power supply transformer. b. A secondary fuse and/or inherent impedance limitation shall protect the Class 2 circuitry. c. Provide a dedicated circuit(s) to power lighting control. Obtain circuit from nearest lighting panel. d. Interface with occupancy/vacancy detectors, photosensors and switch and dimming controls. e. Relays shall be latching type. f. Locate power pack in electrical closet. 5. Time controller capable of multiple time settings, with auto setting for daylight savings. 6. BACnet capable. 7. Capable of supporting 500 devices. 8. BAS interface.

B. Control Capabilities 1. Override Control a. System shall be capable of overriding time function to allow lights to be turned on once time controller has turned them off.

2.03 OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSORS (DUAL TECHNOLOGY ONLY)

A. Sensors shall be provided with a field selectable option to convert sensor operation from automatic-ON/OFF to manual-ON automatic -OFF. Sensors that are used along with switching are to be set for manual-ON automatic –OFF (Vacancy Mode) or 50%-ON automatic OFF. Sensors that are not used with switching are to be set to operate as automatic-ON/OFF or as indicated on the drawings or programming schedule.

B. Passive infrared sensors shall provide high immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held radios) and EMI (electrical noise on the line).

C. Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic or noise detection technologies for occupancy detection. Upon activation, detection by either technology shall hold lighting ON.

D. Ultrasonic sensors shall utilize advanced signal processing to adjust the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space.

E. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 40 kHz ± 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable.

F. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems, LED drivers and rated motor loads.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 2 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 G. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

H. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit tampering. Sensors only using “smart adaptive” technology to automatically adjust time delay and sensitivity settings are not allowed.

I. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation.

J. Where specified, sensors shall offer daylighting foot-candle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting.

K. Sensor shall have a time delay adjustable from 30 seconds to 30 minutes. Set initially to turn lights OFF after 20 minutes.

L. Automatic line voltage wall sensor switch shall have the following features: 1. Shall be a dual technology sensor and shall be a 3 wire, self-contained control system that replaces a standard toggle switch. Sensor shall have ground wire for safety. Switching mechanism shall be latching air gap relay, compatible with electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent and inductive loads. 2. Sensor shall operate at either 120 VAC or 277 VAC. 3. Sensor shall have no minimum load requirement and shall be capable of switching 0 to 800 watt ballast or tungsten or 1/6 hp @ 120 volts, 60 Hz; 0 to 1200 watts for ballast or 1/3 hp @ 277 volts, 60 Hz. 4. Where specified, sensor shall have a built-in light level feature adjustable from 2 to 200 foot-candles that holds lighting OFF when a desired foot-candle level is present. 5. For safety, sensor shall have 100% off switch with no leakage current to load in OFF mode. 6. For safety, in the event there is an open circuit in the AC line such as a ballast or lamp failure, the sensor shall automatically switch to OFF mode. 7. Where specified, sensor shall utilize two relays, with dual switch controls for dual level lighting control. Relays shall be capable of simultaneously controlling independent lighting loads or circuits. The second relay shall be isolated, allowing for two-circuit control of area lights. If sensor is equipped with a light level sensor, only the second relay is controlled by the sensor for day light control.

M. Automatic low profile flush mounted ceiling or surface wall mounted sensor(s) shall have the following features: 1. Shall be dual technology. 2. Sensor shall operate at either 24 VDC OR 24 VAC and use a power pack or operate at line voltage at either 120 VAC or 277 VAC and shall not require a power pack. Coordinate voltage type with light fixture schedule and balance of room controls. 3. Where specified, sensors shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10 to 300 foot-candles. 4. Sensors shall have a “manual ON/OFF” ” or “50% ON/Automatic OFF” function that is controlled by installing local wall control(s). Were drawings indicate local wall control(s), provide low voltage control(s) for the control function. 5. For high ceiling applications, provide an extended coverage sensor. 6. For low temperature or high humidity applications, provide a sensor rated for application. 7. For each area controlled by sensors, provide an isolated relay module or contact on sensor with normally open and closed contacts for use by HVAC control. Coordinate

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 3 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 quantity, location and final control connection requirements with Sequence of Operations specification section 230993 and with the building automation system (BAS) contractor. 8. Refer to drawings for either flush or surface mounted configuration of devices.

2.04 DAYLIGHTING SENSORS

A. The sensor shall be a self-contained control device that detects changes in light levels. The sensor shall adjust the light levels by raising or lowering the light level, by controlling fixture 0 to 10 volt dimming or 1% dimming (as required per room being controlled). Coordinate with light fixture and room lighting control as to type of control to be provided.

B. The sensor shall be either a closed loop device that measures both the daylight contribution and the controlled electric light contribution or an open loop device that measures just the daylight contribution. Type of device will be determined by the application.

C. The sensor shall be a low voltage device, powered by 24 VDC or 24 VAC voltage supplied by a power pack.

D. The sensor shall have a linear response with greater than 1% accuracy over the sensed range.

E. The sensor shall have a control range of 10-100 foot-candles.

F. To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%.

G. Sensor styles for indoor and skylight/atrium installations to be ceiling mounted or as required and as shown on drawings. Verify sensor mounting location(s) with Architect prior to installation.

H. Outdoor sensors shall be weatherproof and located as shown on drawings.

I. Provide dual zone sensors where indicated.

2.05 LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCHES

A. Switching to be accomplished with specification grade low voltage switching devices. Where one or two zones are indicated, install a single on/off device per indicated zones in a ganged cover plate.

B. Where more than two zones are indicated, install a single multiple push button control device with on/off controls per indicated zones in a single-gang cover plate or as indicated on the drawings. Provide integral labels on device indicating zones being controlled, verify naming configuration with the Owner.

C. See wiring device specification section for device color and for type of cover plate.

2.06 LIGHTING CONTROL DIMMERS

A. Dimming to be accomplished with a 1% dimming device. Where one or two zones are indicated, install a single on/off/raise/lower device per indicated zones in a ganged cover plate.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 4 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 B. Where more than two zones are indicated, install a single multiple push button control device with on/off/raise/lower controls per indicated zones in a single-gang cover plate or as indicated on the drawings. Provide integral labels on device indicating zones being controlled, verify naming configuration with the Owner.

C. See wiring device specification section for device color and for type of cover plate.

2.07 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL RELAY

A. Provide emergency lighting control relays where required to allow control of emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting. Relays to be U.L. 924 listed for switching between normal and emergency power to lights.

B. Normally-closed electrically-held relays to be wired in parallel with a wall control, occupancy sensor or lighting control panel. Controlled emergency lighting will be automatically shunted on during a power outage.

C. Locate relays in accessible ceiling space above doorway to room or area where lighting is being controlled.

D. Provide wiring diagrams indicating interconnections between relay and lighting controls.

E. Provide two spare relays for the Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with NEC, manufacturer’s written instructions, and as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify all voltage requirements before ordering material to assure proper operation with the electrical system. Provide single or two-pole relays as required by local types.

C. Provide control wiring between lighting control devices and lighting controllers. Size and wire type shall be as per manufacturer’s requirements.

D. Install all lighting control wiring in conduit except when installed in an accessible ceiling spaces. Provide plenum rated cables when installed in ceiling plenum spaces. Comply with specification Section 260519 requirements for cable installation.

E. Occupancy/Vacancy sensor installation 1. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room. 2. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 5 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 F. Daylight sensor installation 1. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide the correct technology, locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper coverage of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. The locations of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room. 2. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components.

G. All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements.

H. Individual room lighting control modules to be installed in the rooms being controlled. Multiple rooms controlled from one control module or cabinet is not allowed. Control equipment to be located above the ceiling in an accessible location at the entry door inside of the room being controlled. In open office or core areas, install all lighting control modules or cabinets in the nearest electrical closet or as indicated on the drawings.

I. It is the contractor’s responsibility to arrange for a pre-installation meeting with the Owner, at the Owner's facility, to review and verify the operational programming for the lighting control system. This Contractor shall document their meeting and submit meeting notes for review and approval by the project Engineer and Owner.

J. It is the contractor’s responsibility to arrange for a pre-installation meeting with the lighting controls manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility, to verify the placement of sensors, wiring and installation criteria for the lighting control system. This Contractor shall document their meeting and submit meeting notes for review and approval by the project Engineer and Owner.

3.02 SYSTEM START UP AND COMMISSIONING

A. Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician on site to confirm proper installation and operation of all lighting control system components. The startup requirement is intended to verify: 1. That all occupancy/vacancy and daylighting sensors are located, installed, and adjusted as intended by the factory and the contract documents. 2. The occupancy/vacancy sensors and daylighting sensors are operating within the manufacturers specifications. 3. The sensors and relay panels interact as a complete and operational system to meet the design intent. 4. Manufacturer to provide a written statement to the Engineer and owner verifying that the system meets the above requirements prior to Engineers final inspection.

3.03 SYSTEM TRAINING AND PROGRAMMING

A. Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician on site to program and train owner personnel in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system including all occupancy sensors and daylighting controls. The manufacturer is to provide Owner training for not less than two 2-hour periods.

B. In addition to the initial programming and training, provide a follow up visit for not less than one 2-hour period within the next year after acceptance of the system by the Owner. Visit to

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 6 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3.04 SYSTEM VERIFICATION

A. In the presence of the Owner, Engineer, or their designated representative and the lighting control system equipment manufacturer, make a thorough inspection and test of the complete lighting control system.

3.05 MANUALS

A. Submit complete operating and maintenance manuals in the format required by Division 1 to include: 1. "As installed" set of complete wiring diagrams and floor plans locating all of the devices. 2. Information required to operate the equipment and system. 3. Information for testing, repair, trouble shooting and recommended maintenance intervals. 4. Provide a replacement parts list and name and address where available.

B. “As installed” Bill of Materials to include catalog cuts of all components of the lighting control system.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 7 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0926 – 8 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the furnishing, installation and connection of panelboards.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding of Electrical Systems

C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1. 2. Submit shop drawings for all panelboards. a. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, wiring diagrams and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Panelboards: Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, Square D.

2.02 PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC and as shown on the drawings.

B. Provide standard manufactured products. All components of panelboards shall be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of all panelboards to be of the same manufacturer.

C. All panels shall be dead front safety type. Arrange sections for easy removal without disturbing other sections.

D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers.

E. Panels shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed and flush or surface mounting all as scheduled on the drawings.

F. All panelboards shall come with clear plastic covered, typed circuit directory mounted in a metal cardholder. Schedule shall identify circuits by room number using final room numbers furnished by the Owner.

G. Circuit breaker panelboards shall have the following features:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2416 – 1 PANELBOARDS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 1. Non-reduced size copper bus bars, and connection straps bolted together and rigidly supported on molded insulators. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of branch circuit devices. 2. Full size neutral bar mounted on insulated supports. 3. Ground bar with sufficient terminals for all grounding wires. 4. Provide isolated ground bar for panelboards supplying isolated ground type receptacles. 5. Buses braced for the available short circuit current, but not less than 10,000 amperes symmetrical for 120/208 volt system. Panels shall be fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 6. All breakers arranged so that it will be possible to substitute a two-pole breaker for two single pole breakers and a three-pole breaker for three single pole breakers, when frame size is 100 amperes or less. 7. Design interior so that protective devices can be replaced without removing adjacent units, main bus connectors and without machine drilling or tapping. 8. Where designated on panel schedule as "space", include all necessary busing, device support and connections. Provide all devices continuous such that all devices are grouped together, and all spares are grouped together to eliminate the need to move devices when future multiple pole devices are added. Provide blank cover for each space. 9. In two section panelboards, the main bus in each section shall be full size. The first section shall be furnished with sub-feed lugs on the line side for cable connections to the second section.

2.03 CABINETS AND TRIMS

A. Cabinets - Circuit Breaker Type: 1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards. Cabinets for distribution panels may be factory primed and suitably treated with a corrosion-resisting paint finish meeting UL standard for outdoor applications. 2. Back and sides shall be of one piece formed steel. Cabinets for distribution panels may be of formed sheet steel with end and side panels welded, riveted or bolted as required. 3. Provide minimum of four interior mounted studs and necessary hardware for "in" and "out" adjustment of panel interior. 4. Cabinets for two section panelboards shall have both sections bolted together, arranged side by side, and shall be the same height. Flush mounted cabinets should be 1-1/2 inches apart and coupled by conduit nipple. 5. Gutter sizes in panel boxes, on all sides, shall be in accordance with the NEC. Cabinets containing through feeders shall have the gutter space increased by the amount required for auxiliary gutters in the NEC.

B. Trims - Circuit Breaker Type 1. Fabricate trim of sheet steel consisting of frame with door attached by concealed hinges. Provide flush or surface trim as shown on the drawings. 2. Flush trims shall overlap the box by at least 3/4-inch all around. 3. Surface trim shall have the same width and height as the box. 4. Secure trims to back boxes by indicating concealed trim clamps. 5. Provide a welded angle on rear of trim to support and align trim to cabinet. 6. Provide separate trims for each section of multiple section panelboards. Trims and doors of sections shall be of the same height.

C. Doors - Circuit Breaker Type 1. Provide door-in-door type with flush latch and manufacturer's standard lock. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have a vault handle and a three point catch, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. 2. In making switching devices accessible, doors shall not uncover any live parts.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2416 – 2 PANELBOARDS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 3. Provide concealed, butt hinges welded to the doors and trims. 4. For magnetic contactors incorporated in panelboards, provide separate doors for the contactors. 5. Furnish panelboards with latch and manufacturer's standard lock, except panels with doors over 48 inches in height. 6. Provide keyed alike system for all panelboards to match existing in building.

2.04 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Breakers shall be UL listed and labeled, in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as herein specified.

B. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt-on type for 120/208 volt system. 1. Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall have minimum interrupting rating as follows: a. 120/208 volt panelboards: 10,000 amperes symmetrical. 2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time, and instantaneous magnetic trips for 100 ampere frame or less. Magnetic trip shall be adjustable from 3X to 10X for breakers with 600 ampere frames and higher. Factory setting shall be HI, unless otherwise noted.

C. Breaker features shall be as follows: 1. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material. 2. Silver alloy contacts. 3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole. 4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms. 5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator. 6. Electrically and mechanically trip free. 7. An operating handle, which indicates ON, TRIPPED and OFF positions. 8. Line connections shall be bolted or plug in as specified above. 9. An overload on one pole of a multi-pole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of the breaker to open. 10. For circuit breakers being added to existing panelboards, coordinate the breaker type with existing panelboards. Modify the panel directory. 11. Shall be switch rated when used to control lighting circuits. 12. Shall be ground fault circuit interrupted type where circuits/loads supplied are required per N.E.C. to be ground fault protected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as herein specified. Coordinate with other divisions to insure that piping, ductwork, etc., is not installed in violation of NEC or local authority requirements for equipment clearances.

B. Balance the loads on all phases and rearrange branch circuiting if required, for balancing.

C. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected. Coordinate the sizes of cabinets with designated closet space.

D. Mount the panelboard so that maximum height of circuit breakers above finished floor shall not exceed 78 inches. For panelboards which are too high, mount panelboard so that the bottom of the cabinets will not be less than six inches above the finished floor.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2416 – 3 PANELBOARDS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 E. Circuit numbers indicated on the drawings are shown for the purpose of clarifying the grouping of outlets. The actual number assigned to the circuit in the panelboard shall suit the busing and branch circuiting to the panel. Panelboard schedule shall identify circuits using final room numbers furnished by the Owner.

F. Identify the panelboard name and power supply source on the inside of door. Power supply source nameplate nomenclature shall be as follows: “Feeder Power Supply for “Panel xxx” Originates at Panel xxx”. Provide nameplates on outside in unfinished and electrical rooms and inside door for finished areas.

G. Where new panels are to be installed in existing backboxes, backboxes shall have rust and scale removed from inside. Paint inside of backboxes with rust preventive paint before the new panel is installed. Provide new front cover and doors for these panels.

H. Existing panelboards indicated to be reused shall include the following: 1. Connect new circuits to existing circuit breakers. 2. Replace certain existing circuit breakers with new sizes and number of poles as required or indicated. 3. Provide new typed circuit directories.

I. Flush mounted panelboards shall be provided with empty conduits stubbed up to an accessible location. Provide one 3/4" C for every three pole breaker spaces, spares or combination.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2416 – 4 PANELBOARDS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring devices.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1. 2. Submit sample of receptacle and coverplate. 3. Submit sample of floor outlet. 4. Obtain shop drawings from furniture, casework and prewired fixed furniture vendors for coordination review for connection method and wiring requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Receptacles and Switches - Cooper (#5362), Hubbell (#5362), Leviton (#5362A), and Pass & Seymour (#5362A).

B. Wall Plates - Hubbell, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, and Cooper.

C. Metal surface raceways - Wiremold.

D. Floor boxes and service fittings - Raceway Components, Walker, T & B, Steel City - Midland Ross, Hubbell, Lew.

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex receptacles shall be extra hard usage, industrial specification grade rated 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole 3 wire, Nema 5-20R grounded type with impact resistant nylon face and back body polarized parallel slots, one-piece brass strap with integral ground contacts, automatic ground clip, break-off feature for two circuit operation and provisions for back and side wiring of #14 - #10 AWG copper wire. Receptacles shall be in accordance with the latest applicable Federal Specification W-C-596 and NEMA Standard Publication.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2726 – 1 WIRING DEVICES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

RATING NEMA HUBBELL REMARKS NO. NUMBER 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex 5-20R 5362 One Piece Ground Strap and Contacts, Self-Test Feature 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex 5-20R GFR5362SG Industrial Grade, Self-Test Feature, and Tamper-Resistant 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex 5-20R SG-63H Safety Receptacle (Tamper Proof) 30A-125/250V,3P-4W 14-30R 9430A Dryer 50A-125/250V,3P-4W 14-50R 9450A Range 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex 5-20R GF-5362 Ground Fault 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex 5-20R IG-5362 Isolated Ground 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex IG5352-S Surge Suppressor-IG with Isolated Ground 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex 5-20R P&S Plug load controllable 5362CH Half controlled 20A-125V,2P-3W duplex 5-20R Cooper Safety Receptacle (Tamper combination, USB charge SV/DC- TR 7756 Proof) with two USB charging 3.1A ports

C. Receptacles on normal power shall have white bodies.

D. Receptacles on emergency circuits shall have red bodies with red coverplates. Isolated ground receptacles shall have orange bodies.

E. Special purpose receptacles are shown on the plans and identified by NEMA designation number or receptacle type (see symbol sheet for specific NEMA type.)

F. Safety receptacles shall limit access to energized contacts. Provide safety receptacles for pediatric, psychiatric, nursery, dwelling units and other locations as required by National Electric Code and as indicated on the drawings.

G. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacle: Provide within six feet of all sinks, in maintenance garage areas, for all exterior receptacles, for all vending machines, kitchen area and other areas as required by National Electric Code. Provide self-test feature for all GFCI type receptacles. Provide tamper-resistant style for hospital grade GFCI type receptacles.

H. Provide panel and circuit number on each receptacle and light switch coverplate.

2.03 SWITCHES

A. Standard switches shall be specification grade, toggle type side and back wired, rated 20 ampere 120/277 volt. Switches shall be color coded and in accordance with latest applicable Federal Specification W-S-896 and NEMA WD-1. Color to match receptacles.

B. Switches are identified below by Hubbell catalog number; other brands used shall be equivalent or better.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2726 – 2 WIRING DEVICES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

Switch Rating Hubbell No. 20 ampere - single pole, double pole, 3 way, 4 way 1221 Series 20 ampere - single pole, double throw, maintained contact 1385/1386

2.04 DEVICE COVERPLATES

A. All flush mounted outlets shall be equipped with finishing coverplates. Provide ganged plates for receptacle or switch groupings.

B. Plates shall be:

1. Smooth high impact thermoplastic with white finish. 2. Weatherproof covers for duplex receptacles shall be installed with an outlet enclosure clearly marked "SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS WHILE IN USE". There must be a gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface, and between the cover and base to assure a proper seal. The enclosure must employ stainless steel mounting hardware and be constructed of die cast aluminum. The outlet enclosure shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Enclosure must be manufactured by Intermatic Corporation, Cooper, or equal. Mount receptacle vertically.

C. Coverplates for surface mounted boxes in unfinished spaces shall be raised cover galvanized steel manufactured for the purpose.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Pilot lights, other than three phase motor starter pilots shall be neon lamp and red-prism rated for voltages at which applied.

2.06 METAL SURFACE RACEWAYS (MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES)

A. Federal Specification W-C-582 and UL 5 shall apply.

B. Thoroughly clean, phosphatize and paint the steel enclosures at the factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish.

C. Spacing of the receptacles along each strip shall be as indicated on the drawings.

D. Wires within the strips shall not exceed the wire capacities recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Installation fittings shall be provided for the strips being installed including bends, offsets and elbows.

F. Metal surface raceways shall be as follows. Wiremold numbers are used to identify sizes and features required. 1. No. G-3000 1-17/32" x 2-3/4" with snap-on cover and finish as directed by architect. Provide grounding type duplex receptacles and plates as specified under RECEPTACLES and PLATES this section.

2.07 POKE-THRU OUTLETS (FB-1)

A. Furnish and install all material for a fire-rated poke-thru as indicated on the electrical drawings and described in this section. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Thru-floor fitting and junction boxes.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2726 – 3 WIRING DEVICES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

C. If installed in a carpeted area, the carpet must be cut out according to the dimensions of the above-floor service fitting.

D. The thru-floor fitting shall be UL classified with a fire rating of 1 to 4 hours to accommodate power, telephone and data service in a single unit. The thru-floor fitting shall contain a factory- attached junction box. The thru-floor fitting shall be of a single length design capable of accommodating a floor thickness range 2-1/2" x to 7". Provide extra length units when necessary. The integral fire barrier must incorporate a cold smoke barrier to prevent the passage of smoke when heat is not present and containing intumescent organic material to seal unit during fire condition.

E. The fire-rated poke-thru shall be: 1. Wiremold RC9 series or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings.

3.02 RECEPTACLES

A. When installed as split-wired connect top receptacle to switched circuit.

B. Provide automatic receptacle control for 50% of all receptacles located in private offices when shown on the drawings or where required by code. When double duplex receptacles are shown on the drawings in these rooms and noted as switched the left receptacle shall be wired to a switched circuit in room that shall be controlled by the occupancy sensor in that room. Provide engraved coverplate with notation “switched” above left receptacle.

C. Receptacles supplied by GFCI type circuit breakers shall be labeled as “Ground Fault Protected”.

D. Receptacles noted as "AB" (Above Backsplash) shall be mounted in the vertical plane three (3) inches above the counter backsplash. Where vertical mounting is not possible mount in the horizontal plane three (3) inches above the counter backsplash. Coordinate exact height of counter backsplash above finished floor with architectural elevations and construction trades installing floor cabinetry backsplash. If no backsplash, then mount three (3) inches above countertop.

E. Weatherproof receptacle outlet boxes shall be mounted horizontally when required by the cover configuration so cable access is on the bottom.

3.03 SWITCHES

A. Mount switches at strike side of doors.

B. Provide outlet box barriers between switches occurring in the same multi-gang box when voltage between adjacent switches exceeds 300 volts.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2726 – 4 WIRING DEVICES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

A. All plates shall be straight and true and snug fit the wall.

3.05 METAL SURFACE RACEWAYS (MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES)

A. Install and connect insulated green ground wire in all metal surface raceways. Install raceways and fittings parallel and perpendicular to the building lines, complete with all necessary fittings for a complete raceway system.

3.06 POKE-THRU OUTLETS

A. Provide core-drilled holes in concrete floors sized to exactly fit poke-thru device.

B. The Architect or Structural Engineer must be consulted before drilling any holes to verify exact locations and requirements.

C. Provide x-ray location service for post-tensioned concrete slabs.

D. Obtain dimensional drawings from the Architect for floor outlet locations prior to installation.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2726 – 5 WIRING DEVICES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2726 – 6 WIRING DEVICES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work under this section includes the equipment and complete installation for enclosed switches and circuit breakers as specified and indicated on the drawings complete with fuses for all HVAC and electrical equipment.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems

D. Section 262416 - Panelboards

E. Section 262813 - Fuses

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1, for each disconnect switch size including rejection fuse clips and enclosure types specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Safety switches - Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens-ITE, Square D.

B. Circuit breakers - General Electric, Siemens-ITE, or Square D.

2.02 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Low voltage fusible switches 600 amps and less shall be in accordance with UL File E2875, NEMA KSI, NEC and Fed. Spec. W-S-865C.

B. Shall be equipped with cartridge fuses as shown on the drawings or as required.

C. Shall have the following features: 1. Switch mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-break type, rated for system voltage. 2. Copper blades, visible in the OFF position with an arc chute for each pole. 3. Spring loaded fuse clips with factory or field installed rejection device for Class R fuses. 4. External operating handle shall indicate ON and OFF position and shall have lock-open padlocking provisions. 5. Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the door only when the switch is in the OFF position, defeatable by a special tool to permit inspection. 6. Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which includes a neutral conductor.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2812 – 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package BREAKERS

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 7. NEMA Type I enclosure except outdoors and damp or wet locations provide NEMA Type 3R. 8. Electrical interlock when used in conjunction with separately derived control circuit.

D. Safety switches shall be Heavy Duty type HD and horsepower rated.

2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Where separately enclosed molded case circuit breakers are shown on the drawings, provide circuit breakers in accordance with the applicable requirements of those specified for panelboards, specification Section 262416.

B. Enclosures are to be of the NEMA types shown on the drawings. Where the types are not shown, they are to be the NEMA type most suitable for the environmental conditions where the breakers are being installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Provide fusible safety switches or enclosed disconnects sized as required or as shown for all motors and fixed equipment.

B. Non-fused safety switches may be used for maintenance disconnects only where permitted by code.

C. A safety switch or other disconnect shall be provided adjacent to each motor and fixed equipment, except where the power distribution center is not over 50 feet distant and within sight from the motor.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2812 – 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package BREAKERS

FUSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work under this section includes the furnishing of all fuses for all HVAC and electrical equipment.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 262812 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

C. Section 262913 - Enclosed Controllers

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.

B. Submit time current curves for all fuses being supplied as part of this project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Fuses - Bussmann/McGraw Edison, Brush, Mersen (formerly Ferraz-Shawmut) or Littelfuse.

2.02 FUSES

A. Furnish and install secondary fuses in all fusible equipment sized as shown on the drawings.

B. All fuses shall be current limiting non-renewable type with 200,000 ampere AIC interrupting capacity and shall not be shipped installed in fusible equipment.

C. Fuses shall be by the same manufacturer of the types specified below. Bussmann fuse references are listed to establish type and quality.

D. Fuses 600 amperes and less shall be U.L. Class R, rejection type fuses.

Time Delay Time Delay Fast Acting

Class RK-1 Class RK-5 Class RK-1 Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Low-Peak Fusetron Limitron LPN-RK-250V FRN-R-250V KTN-R-250V

E. Apply specific fuses as follows:

Motors Fusetron Equipment Fusetron Elevators Fusetron

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2813 – 1 FUSES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

F. Provide a minimum of three additional spare fuses of the type, size, and rating for each set installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FUSES

A. The size, voltage and fuse type furnished for each device shall be indicated inside the cover of that device with pressure sensitive tape.

B. Spare fuses shall be turned over to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2813 – 2 FUSES Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work under this section includes furnishing, installing and connecting all enclosed controllers as indicated and scheduled on the drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems

D. Section 262812 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

E. Section 262813 - Fuses

F. Divisions 21, 22, and 23 - All sections regarding motorized equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Enclosed controllers - Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens-ITE, Square D.

2.02 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

A. Motor starting switches, MSS, shall be snap action toggle switch type in NEMA 1 enclosure, which clearly indicate ON, OFF, and TRIP position, complete with thermal overload protection. Motor starting switches, installed in finished areas or control panels shall be flush mounted. Pilot lights where needed as indicated on drawings shall be LED type with clear or amber lens.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

A. Provide all starters and disconnects for all motor and electrical equipment as shown in the motor schedule and on the drawings.

B. Motor starting equipment, including remote control and/or indicating stations, shall be identified in accordance with Section 260553.

C. Starters shall be by the same manufacturer.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2913 – 1 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

E. Verify motor feeder sizes, fuse sizes, rotation, etc., recommended by equipment manufacturer before installing. Make motor connections with a maximum of 24" Greenfield or Sealtite and separate ground wire.

F. For fractional horsepower motors on mechanical equipment, provide horsepower rated disconnect switch and thermal overload protection, as required by NEC. Overload units shall be sized approximately 125% full load motor current. Check and coordinate all thermal protective devices with the equipment they protect.

G. For motor feed through VFDs, provide branch circuit to VFD and from VFD to motor. Where VFDs are furnished by others, provide mounting as per manufacturer's written installation instruction. Provide disconnects for each VFD that is not furnished with a disconnect.

H. Provide temporary wiring if necessary, for permanent building heating system equipment put in service by the Heating Contractor after building is enclosed. Verify requirements with Division 14.

I. Furnish and install a nonfused disconnect switch at each motorized unit not supplied with a switch for maintenance purposes.

J. For package mechanical equipment scheduled on drawings provide a disconnect switch, unless provided by Mechanical Contractor, at the unit and make a power connection to the integral mounted starter/control panel provided with the unit. Disconnect shall be fused unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All automatic controls and associated wiring will be provided complete integral with the unit. For rooftop units, provide fused weatherproof disconnect switch, unless provided by Mechanical Contractor 15, and 20A, 120V weatherproof ground- fault protected service receptacle mounted on the unit housing on a separately derived circuit.

K. Install double duplex receptacle outlet at each wall hung water cooler such that the receptacle will be concealed behind the cooler enclosure. Provide GFCI protected circuits for electric water coolers. Install 120V receptacle for dryer at each temperature control compressor location.

L. Install and connect automatic fan shutdown systems in supply and return air systems of 2000 cfm or larger as indicated on the drawings and specified in Section 283101.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 2913 – 2 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the furnishing, installation and connection of all light fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts where shown on drawings and as listed in the fixture schedule.

B. Definitions: The terms “lighting or light fixture(s)”, as used in this specification and on the drawings, shall mean the same as “luminaries” as defined in the National Electrical Code.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below)

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

D. Section 260926 – Lighting Controls

1.03 ALLOWANCES

A. Where allowances are indicated on the drawings or in specification, refer to Division 0 & 1, and section 260500 for additional requirements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1. 2. Submit shop drawings for all light fixtures and lamps. a. Catalog data and/or shop drawings for fixtures shall include photometric data from an independent testing laboratory. b. Catalog data and/or shop drawings for lamps including mercury content for each lamp. c. Submit specific I.E.S. files and data sheets for all fixtures. Information must include delivered and nominal lumens and fixture watts. d. Submit floor plans showing location of each remote driver and the related light fixture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Light fixtures: As listed in the Light Fixture Schedule with fixture description, fixture series and fixture criteria indicated. Where conflict in information occurs on the fixture schedule fixture criteria shall take precedence and contractor shall contact engineer prior to bidding for clarification of item(s). Fixtures provided shall have both factory representation and supplying distributor in the local project area.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 5100 – 1 LIGHTING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2.02 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Shall conform to the drawings and fixture schedule, NEC Article 410 and to UL-57, "Electrical Lighting Fixtures".

B. Construction 1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true and straight, unless intentionally curved, and parallel to each other as designed. 2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring. 3. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner. 4. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the fixtures is in the installed position, and latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools. 5. Fixtures with louvers or light transmitting panels shall have hinges, latches and safety catches to facilitate safe, convenient cleaning and relamping. Vaportight fixtures shall have pressure clamping devices in lieu of the latches. 6. Lighting fixture closures, lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc., shall be retained in a secure manner by screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance. 7. The manufacturer shall apply his standard finish, unless otherwise specified, over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt, and other deposits. Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering or flaking. 8. Interior light reflecting fixtures shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectance except where otherwise shown on the drawings. 9. Exterior finishes shall be as shown in the fixture schedule.

C. Row Fixtures: Where continuous row fixtures are specified, it shall be understood that the capital letters next to the outlet identifies all fixtures in the row and all rows are made up of either four or eight foot long fixtures in combination to complete the row. The channels shall be eight feet long when available but all plastics, hinged doors and louver sections shall not exceed four feet long.

D. Thermal Protection 1. Recessed fixtures shall have thermal protection or shall be type IC in insulated ceilings. Fixtures shall have a UL label and identification to indicate "thermally protected" or "Type IC". The thermal protector shall be mounted in the fixture and not in the junction box.

E. Individual Light Fixture Disconnect 1. Provide a disconnection means of individual lights for maintenance purposes.

F. Grounding 1. Provide all lighting fixtures with a specific means for grounding their metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.

G. Light Transmitting Components for Fixtures 1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic clear plastic unless specified otherwise in the fixture schedule. Shall have a thickness not less than 1/8”. 2. Unless otherwise specified, lenses and diffusers shall be retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 5100 – 2 LIGHTING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

© IMEG 19001982.00 12/10/2019 H. Remote LED driver enclosure 1. Provide driver enclosure per NEC for LED fixtures utilizing remote drivers. Provide damp location rated enclosures where required by driver location. 2. Location of remote drivers shall be shown on shop drawings and as-built drawings.

2.03 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements: 1. 120/277 VAC 60 Hz operation. 2. LED optics, individual LED modules shall not be visible. 3. Face color and mounting configuration as indicated on the drawings and on the fixture schedule. 4. Provide arrows as shown on drawing and as required by egress routes.

2.04 LED LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaire 1. Comply with IES LM-79-08 Approved Method for measuring lumen maintenance of LED light sources for complete luminaire testing. 2. Comply with IES LM-80-08 Approved Method for electrical and photometric measurement of SSL product. 3. LED luminaires shall deliver a minimum lumens per watt and lumen output as indicated on the fixture schedule. 4. Drivers shall be solid state UL listed and be universal voltage 120-277 VAC at 60 Hz input with a maximum input wattage as indicated in the fixture schedule. 5. The LED driver shall be fully dimmable with continuous dimming without perceivable flicker over a range of 100% to 10% and shall be controlled by a 0 to 10V signal unless otherwise indicated on the fixture schedule. Coordinate control requirements with dimming equipment being provided. 6. Luminaires shall have internal thermal protection. 7. Luminaires shall have a minimum CRI of 80 unless indicated otherwise. LED color temperature shall be as indicated in the fixture schedule. 8. LED package(s)/module(s)/array(s)/driver(s) used shall deliver a minimum 70% of initial lumens for a minimum of 50,000 hours. 9. Luminaires shall be fully accessible from below ceiling plane for changing drivers, power supplies and arrays. 10. Thermal management shall be passive by design. 11. Remote LED drivers shall be enclosed in Class 1, Class 2, or NEMA 3R enclosures as required.

2.05 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Light Fixture Schedule on drawings.

2.06 ADDITIONAL LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Include in the bid all requirements for the installation of the following light fixture including parts, labor, wiring, etc. 1. Two (2) additional type (E1 or E2) exit signs each to include fifty (50) feet of conduit and wire.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 5100 – 3 LIGHTING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Fixtures, in general, have been specified for the particular type of ceiling on which they are to be installed. The Contractor, however, is responsible for verifying the ceiling construction details and furnishing and installing fixtures suitable for the respective ceiling types. Provide plaster frames where applicable.

B. All suspended type fixtures shall be mounted at heights shown. Mounting heights of ceiling suspended fixtures shall be measured from the finished floor to the bottom of the fixture closures or reflector, and wall mounted fixture height shall be to bottom of fixture unless noted otherwise.

C. Provide adequate supports for all recessed, surface mounted and suspended type fixtures. Such supports shall be anchored to channels in the ceiling construction, using listed clips, to the structural slab or to structural members above the suspended ceiling. Lay-in fixtures shall be supported by ceiling grid system and from structure as follows: Provide a minimum of two, #12 gauge, galvanized support wires attached at each corner of the lay-in fixtures. Support wire may be slack and shall be independently secured to building structure above fixtures. Tag or color support wire to distinguish from ceiling support equipment.

D. Provide supplemental support, blocking, etc., within walls at wall bracket mounted light fixtures, whereby both outlet box and/or fixture shall be securely anchored in place.

E. All recessed type fixtures in lay-in ceilings shall have flexible metal conduit connections permitting the fixture to be lifted out. Maximum flexible conduit shall not exceed six feet. One to four light fixtures may be served by a single common outlet box.

F. All fixtures shall be hung straight and true and as design of fixture and accepted practice dictate. All fixtures shall be cleaned before the final acceptance. All fixtures shall be in perfect operating condition at the completion of the job. All necessary devices and auxiliary fittings required for a complete and workmanship installation shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor.

G. Provide and install required fixture retainers or clips for fixtures installed in suspended ceilings.

H. Be responsible for installing fixtures in unobstructed locations in equipment rooms to provide the best possible lighting. Coordinate installation with Mechanical Contractor, Elevator Contractor and other trades.

I. Provide substantial supports for heavy fixtures. Provide wood blocking, threaded rod or steel brackets fastened to joists or other structurally sound members as necessary.

J. All square or rectangular light fixtures shall be orientated in the same direction in the same room, corridor or definable space.

K. Contractor shall label each remote driver location.

3.02 BALLAST REMOVAL

A. The Contractor shall obtain the service of a sub-contractor qualified for the disposal of existing lighting ballasts containing PCB's and or DEHP and shall arrange for disposal at an EPA listed and approved incinerator or a ballast recycler.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 5100 – 4 LIGHTING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

A. All existing light fixtures and lamps removed shall become the property of this contractor and removed from site unless directed otherwise by the Owner or Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall contact owner at the beginning of the project to determine any light fixtures required to be salvaged.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 5100 – 5 LIGHTING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 5100 – 6 LIGHTING Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1.05 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION LIGHT AND POWER

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

B. Building Interior Facilities 1. Extend the construction light and power system throughout the new building construction and provide all interior construction light and power. 2. Install the power distribution system within the construction, and the construction lighting and receptacle branch circuits within the building as required to facilitate the project construction schedules. 3. Furnish, install and maintain lighting and receptacle outlets as required to facilitate construction demands. 4. Install the lighting and receptacle outlet throughout the floor or area in an arrangement suitable to the Architect/Engineer and to the other trades. 5. Lighting outlet spacing shall not exceed thirty feet on center and shall have a maximum 1800 watt loading per 20 ampere circuit. 6. Receptacle outlet spacing shall not exceed 50 feet on center and shall have a maximum of six receptacles per 20 ampere circuit.’ 7. Within the existing building renovated areas, existing lighting and receptacles may be used in lieu of a temporary system, however, shall be supplemented where required to maintain minimum outlet spacing specified above or when required to provide sufficient electrical power required for work. a. All existing receptacles shall be replaced by GFCI receptacles, modified, added to, or protected by GFCI circuit breakers when these are used for construction power.

C. Materials 1. Materials for the construction light and power system need not be new and need not conform to the provisions found elsewhere in these specifications relating to materials for the permanent installation. However, material shall be in good condition and of quality to assure adequate operation and safety of use and shall have the listed approval of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. where applicable. 2. Temporary receptacles, except where noted otherwise, shall be 15 ampere, 120 volt, duplex grounding type with ground fault interruption, and shall be installed in suitable outlet boxes with plates. 3. Temporary lights, except noted otherwise, shall consist of medium base rubber pigtail type light sockets or of porcelain lamp holders on suitable outlet boxes. 4. Temporary conductors where open wiring is permitted shall be copper or aluminum and except for grounding conductor shall be insulated. Sizes of feeder wiring/conduit shall be as per load. Sizes of branch circuit conductors shall be No. 12 AWG minimum size, except where the branch circuit length exceeds 200 feet shall be increased. Splices of temporary conductors shall be soldered or shall utilize approved types of mechanical connections and all splices shall be insulated by taping or other approved methods. 5. Materials furnished by the Electrical Contractor for the preceding temporary system shall remain his property and shall be removed where there is no longer any need for temporary light and power.

D. Installation 1. Installation of the construction light and power system shall comply with requirements of applicable codes and ordinances as they relate to such temporary wiring. 2. Except as otherwise provided here, completed portions of the permanent installation or materials for use in the permanent installation shall not be used in the temporary work without specific permission of the Architect/Engineer.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0500 – 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3. Grounding shall comply with applicable codes relating to permanent work. Grounding terminals of receptacles and non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment of the construction light and power system shall be connected to the common grounding conductor at the service through metallic conduits or through grounding conductors installed with circuit conductors. The permanent grounding system may be utilized for the temporary system. 4. Overload protection for circuits and equipment of the construction light and power system shall comply with applicable codes relating to permanent work. Load protection centers and other protective equipment shall be furnished and installed as shown on the electrical drawings or as required by field conditions. 5. Each individual subcontractor shall provide his own extension cords as required for use of temporary electrical service. Extension cords must conform to Industrial Commission safety requirements.

E. Loads 1. The maximum individual load which may be connected to the system is as follows: a. 120 volt, 1 phase, 1.5 kva load. b. 240 volt, 2 phase, 3.0 kva load. 2. Parties wishing to use electric welders and other equipment requiring power over loads defined above shall provide and pay for additional temporary service required. Coordinate with the General Contractor. 3. Personnel and material lifts, cranes, etc. shall have separate temporary power provided by others.

1.06 INSPECTION

A. The installation shall be made by persons licensed and skilled in the trade and shall be done under the supervision of a master electrician. The work will be inspected by the local or other authorized electrical inspection agency.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Materials List, Cost Breakdown, Progress Schedules and Substitutions. 1. Comply with requirements of Division 1. 2. Provide individual submittals for each specification section consisting of separately bound paper files or electronic files to allow proper logging in of shop drawing submittals. Submittals received as combined paper files or electronic files will be returned to contractor for proper processing. Provide a separate transmittal with each specification section submittal.

1.08 ALLOWANCES

A. Where allowances are indicated, they shall include the following: sales tax, delivery and freight chargers, lamps, installation material, contractor markup, overhead, and material, commissions, etc. Labor shall be included in the base bid.

1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0500 – 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1.10 QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new, free from defects and shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or other nationally recognized testing laboratory as conforming to its standards in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type of material or equipment.

B. All materials and finishes shall be adequately protected during construction from moisture, temperature extremes and physical abuse. All materials shall be assembled in a workmanlike manner in accordance with current recommended standard practice.

C. Miscellaneous equipment, pull boxes, junction boxes, fittings, and expansion joints, necessary to complete the work satisfactorily shall be furnished and installed even though not specifically shown on drawings.

1.11 DIMENSIONS AND CORRELATION

A. For the purpose of clarity and legibility the drawings are essentially diagrammatic and are intended to indicate size, capacity and location but not exact details or arrangements of construction. Architectural, mechanical and structural drawings shall be examined so that all details of the project are understood and work procedures known before bidding and installation. Any discrepancies between Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings shall be reported in writing to the Architect/Engineer. Exact locations and details shall be obtained from dimensioned drawings but shall not take precedence over field dimensions.

B. Cooperate with other contractors for proper anchorage, placement and accomplishing of all work. Interference between the work of the various contractors shall be resolved before installation. In the event of conflict of space requirements or location with other trades, refer the matter to the Architect/Engineer for decision.

1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching excluding finish painting, required for electrical work shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be kept to a minimum by the proper placement of the materials. General Contractor will perform all finish painting.

B. No cutting shall impair the strength of any part of the building. No cutting or drilling shall be done without the Architect/Engineer's permission and instruction.

C. Workmen employed to do the patchwork shall be tradesmen skilled in the particular trade involved. The quality of the workmanship must be of the best, and work shall restore the structure and surfaces to a new condition or to match the existing adjoining work, using materials and methods consistent with the general construction requirement specification.

D. Comply with all requirements of Division 1 and Division 9.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0500 – 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1.13 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND CONCRETE

A. Provide all trenching, excavation and backfill required for the electrical work. Repair all streets, sidewalks, curbs or paved areas damaged because of electrical work. All sub-surface and finished surfaces shall be constructed equal to existing condition of adjacent materials. Sodding and seeding of grass areas will be performed by the General Contractor.

B. Where concrete work is provided by Division 26 concrete shall have a compression strength of 3000 psi at 28 days per ISO 3893:1997 classification standard unless otherwise noted.

C. Comply with requirements of Division 31.

1.14 CLEANING

A. Clear away debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from work and operations, leaving the job and equipment furnished under contract in a clean and first-class condition.

B. Equipment Cleaning 1. Exterior enclosure surfaces of electrical equipment shall be wiped or vacuum cleaned to remove construction debris and dust. 2. Enclosure interiors of electrical equipment, light fixtures, etc., shall be cleaned to remove construction debris and dust. 3. Accessible elements of disconnecting and protective devices of equipment and the like shall be exposed to compressed air less than 15 psi and vacuum cleaned prior to being energized.

C. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

1.15 PAINTING

A. Painting of exposed conduits, pull and junction boxes, and panelboards and terminal cabinets will be by the General Contractor.

B. Refinish and restore to their original condition electrical equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of paint or enamel. Materials and workmanship shall be equal to the requirements of Section 09900.

1.16 FAULT COORDINATION and ARC FLASH ANALYSIS

A. The electrical contractor shall provide short circuit/coordination study and arc flash risk assessment/analysis for portions of the electrical distribution system shown on drawings from the normal power source, and the emergency/standby source to all distribution equipment.

1.17 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS

A. All work hereunder shall, upon completion be subjected to such tests as are required under industry standards and/or specified herein, and acceptance of the work by Owner shall be contingent upon satisfactory completion of these tests.

B. All portions of the work shall be subjected to a careful and thorough visual inspection to detect insofar as possible, any erroneous or loose connections, damaged components, presence of foreign objects or materials, poor workmanship, incorrect rating of overcurrent protective devices, or other abnormal conditions.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0500 – 5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

C. Tests required before energization of systems: 1. Ground resistance tests. 2. Insulation resistance tests for feeders, 600 volt or less, with megger applying a test potential of 500 volts D.C. 3. Operational checks to demonstrate proper functioning of lighting equipment, controls, proper rotation for motors, proper operation of meters, instrumentation, metering, etc. 4. Tests for special systems, fire alarm, etc., shall be performed by the vendor's qualified representative. These tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and written test reports shall be provided. Submit system operational certification letter from the manufacturer.

D. Demonstrate and instruct the essential features of all electrical control, special systems, communication systems and generation systems upon completion of satisfactory testing. The demonstration and instruction shall be held as a responsibility of the contractor by authorized manufacturer's personnel in the presence of the Owner or his designated representatives and the Architect/Engineer to show functions, locations and relationships to the drawings. 1. Instructions shall be provided for the following equipment and systems:

Electrical Distribution System Emergency Lighting and Power System Fire Alarm System Lighting Control Systems Motor Controls Communication/Signal Systems

1.18 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

A. Maintenance Manuals and Record Drawings. 1. Comply with requirements of Division 1.

1.19 WARRANTIES

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1 and General Conditions where required.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 26 0500 – 6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 283101

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work under this section includes the equipment, wiring and complete installation of new devices connected to the existing fire alarm and detection system in the building as indicated on drawings and specified herein.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - General Requirements

B. Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600V and Below)

C. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

D. Division 21 - Fire Suppression

E. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1. 2. Submit shop drawings for all fire alarm and detection devices, control panels, relays, all panel module devices and all other equipment specified in this section. Provide a point- to-point wiring diagram specifically for this project with all devices shown with proper wire counts, annunciation, power connections, battery calculations, wire types and sizes. 3. Submit names and credentials of NICET installers to be assigned to this project. 4. Submit duct detector manometer test report. 5. Submit as required to local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) for fire permit application. 6. Upon completion of project, submit U.L. Central Station Fire Alarm System Certificate, fire alarm certification complying with NFPA 72 Record of Completion, NFPA 72 Test and Inspection Form and any local authority requirements. 7. Red fire alarm conduit EMT, Allied Tube and Conduit or equal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Silent Knight (Honeywell), Farenhyt IFP-2000 to match existing.

B. Provide system manufacturer’s certification that all new components have been tested and will operate along with existing components. Verify that all circuits are loaded to no more than manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Installation of the fire alarm system shall be by a National Institute of Certification of Engineering Technology (NICET) Level 2 certified installer with a NICET Level 3 foreman reviewing the installation of the rough-in and during final testing.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 1 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 2.02 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and place in operating condition new components for the existing fire alarm system. All units of equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (U. L.) per NFPA 71 and 72 for fire alarm signaling use and shall consist of a control unit, alarm initiating devices, alarm indicating devices and auxiliary control devices as required, specified herein, or shown on drawings, and wired in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to make a complete and workable system as hereinafter described.

B. The fire alarm control panel shall provide an automatic smoke and temperature sensor sensitivity self-test once per minute and shall comply with NFPA 72 requirements for a test of sensitivity ranges.

C. An open, short or ground condition of any Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), Initiating Device Circuit (IDC), or Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) or loss of battery standby or normal AC power shall cause an audible trouble signal to sound and a warning light to come on at the control panel, and the event to be recorded into the historical log. The trouble light shall stay on until the trouble condition is corrected and the trouble silence switch is manually reset at the control panel.

D. The system shall operate on and be supervised by 24 VDC power, separately fused at the control panel.

E. Wiring style type shall be as follows: 1. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) shall match existing. 2. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) shall match existing. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall match existing.

F. Fire alarm wire shall be as follows: 1. Fire alarm system wire type and sizing as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. MC type fire alarm cabling is not allowed.

2.03 FIRE ALARM PANEL

A. The existing control panel is a Silent Knight (Honeywell), Farenhyt IFP-2000. Locate new devices as indicated on drawings. 1. Provide additional batteries as required to for 24 hour battery backup with 5 or 15 minutes of alarm at the end of the standby period per existing system requirements. 2. Auxiliary relays shall be provided within the panel for 24 VDC [VAC] door holder circuits. a. Power door holders from fire alarm system and size power supply to maintain door holder operation in the event of a power failure for 30 seconds. 3. All programming functions shall be contained in non-volatile memory. 4. Provide NAC as required by quantity of devices with no circuit exceeding 75% of its capacity. Provide separate circuits for audible and for visible devices. 5. Provide IDC as required by quantity of devices with no circuit exceeding 75% of its capacity. 6. Provide SLC as required by quantity of devices with no circuit exceeding 75% of its capacity.

2.04 INITIATING APPLIANCES

A. Manual Pull Stations: Addressable, semi-flush, single action operation with breakrod feature. Station shall be designed so that once operated, it must be key opened to be restored to normal. Stations shall have reset locks of tumbler type keyed alike to control panels. Key shall be used to operate station for drill or test.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 2 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 B. Thermal Sensors: Thermal sensor shall be self-restoring, rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with or without rate-of-rise sensing, complete with intelligent addressable base. Rate-of-rise detection shall be selectable for either 15 degrees F, or 20 degrees F per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing, and programmable to operate at 135 degrees F, or 155 degrees F. Sensors may be programmed as a utility device to monitor for temperature extremes from 32 degrees F to 155 degrees F such as freeze warnings or to alert for utility problems. Provide 135 degrees F fixed temperature heat sensor in elevator shaft/equipment rooms. Heat sensors located in an area where automatic sprinkler heads are installed shall have a lower temperature rating of 30 degrees F less than the sprinkler head temperature rating in that area. Provide 200 degrees F fixed temperature heat detector with addressable monitor module in mechanical room/high temperature areas.

C. Area Smoke Sensors: Photoelectric, smoke density measuring sensor, environmentally self- compensating, with intelligent addressable base. The sensor shall be interchangeable with ionization, or thermal sensors using the same base type. Their light source shall be a pulsed infrared LED. Internal detector circuits shall be shielded against electrical interference and shall be resistant to transients, "noise" and RF interference. Smoke sensors shall be able to be field tested without the use of real or artificial smoke. The sensitivity for each sensor shall be field selectable in seven settings from 0.2% - 3.7% per foot smoke obscuration from the control panel. Smoke sensor shall display “dirty detector” at the control panel without reducing sensitivity. The control panel shall provide automatic, once per minute, individual sensor sensitivity test with peak value reporting. Detector shall match existing.

D. Duct Smoke Sensor Housings: Intelligent addressable photoelectric smoke sensors. 1. Duct housing shall contain the same type photoelectric sensor as the area smoke sensors. 2. Provide an addressable control module at each motor controller for AHU shut down. 3. Provide a remote alarm indicator/test switch at a visible/accessible location adjacent to sensor, or on wall directly below unit, and provide label indicating the AHU served by duct sensor. 4. Duct sensor shall receive operating power from fire alarm control panel. 5. Duct sensor shall be reset at the fire alarm control panel or annunciators.

E. Sprinkler Flow: Flow switches and gate valves shall be furnished under the mechanical contract. These units shall have contacts suitable for use with fire alarm systems. Provide addressable monitor modules for each switch.

F. Auxiliary Relays: Provide addressable control modules to shut down HVAC units and close fire/smoke dampers any time fire alarm system is in alarm mode. Locate addressable control modules within three feet of damper motors, motor starters, and other equipment being controlled per NFPA 72.

G. Elevator Recall: Elevator recall system shall be maintained.

2.05 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Audible-Visible: Interior general alarm notification signals shall be combination horn/strobes. Visible portion will be 1 Hz synchronous xenon strobes with clear lens and red fire lettering. Horn/strobes shall be wall mounted where shown on drawings. 24 VDC Horn output shall provide 93 dBA at 10 feet with a modulated frequency output of 2400 to 3700 Hz sweep. Strobes must meet ADAAG, NFPA 72, and ANSI 117.1 requirements for spacing and effective intensity. Audible-Visible units shall match existing.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 3 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 B. Visible Only: Interior general alarm notification signals will be 1 HZ synchronous xenon strobes with clear lens and fire lettering. Strobes shall be wall, or ceiling mounted where shown on drawings. Strobes must meet NFPA 72, requirements for spacing and effective intensity.

C. Door Holders: Semi-flush wall mounted on a single gang box with stainless steel armature as required by door. Door holders to be 24 VDC, operation powered from fire alarm panel. Provide a minimum 25% spare capacity per each door holder circuit. 1. Zone door holder circuits as one zone per floor.

D. Remote LCD Annunciators: Flush mounted. Located where indicated on drawings. 1. 80 character back lit alpha numeric liquid crystal display unit. 2. Selectable “Enable” Key Switch to activate all switch functions. 3. All status LEDs, switches, and audible sounder identical to FACP. 4. Reset and Silence capabilities. 5. Four programmable control switches with associated LEDs. 6. Keyboard.

2.06 ADDITIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES

A. Include in bid all requirements for the installation of the following additional devices including parts, labor, wiring, etc.: 1. Two (2) additional audible/visibles to include fifty (50) feet of conduit and wire per device. 2. Two (2) additional area smoke sensors to include fifty (50) feet of conduit and wire per device.

B. Unused additional devices will be turned over to owner at end of project as spares and a credit provided for conduit, wiring, and labor.

2.07 REMOTE NAC (SIGNAL EXPANSION) POWER SUPPLIES

A. Remote NAC power supplies may be used at manufacturer option but must comply with the following: 1. Locate NAC power supplies in electrical closets only. 2. 120 VAC Power connection to dedicated circuit breakers from the emergency power panelboards, wire and conduit are to be included with in bid. 3. Locate an area smoke sensor in room where NAC power supply is located per NFPA 72, 1-5.6 requirements. 4. Each NAC circuit shall not exceed 75% of its rated capacity.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install all fire alarm system wiring in conduit as recommended by the manufacturer. Fire alarm conduit shall have a bright red top coating (factory applied) to provide distinct identification of fire alarm circuitry.

B. Install all fire alarm system wiring in conduit except when installed in accessible ceiling spaces. IBC 909 control systems shall be installed entirely in conduit, no exposed cable is allowed. Fire alarm conduit shall have a bright red top coating (factory applied) to provide distinct identification of fire alarm circuitry. Provide plenum rated fire alarm cables when installed in ceiling plenum spaces. Comply with specification Section 260519 requirements for cable installation. Fire alarm wiring installed without conduit shall be installed using J-Hooks or similar mounted at six foot on center.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 4 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 C. Paint all fire alarm junction box covers red in color and label “Fire Alarm”.

D. All wiring shall be verified as to size and number of conductors with the manufacturer. All wiring shall be color coded, type and size as recommended by the manufacturer and as required by NFPA 72 and NEC 70 (National Electric Code).

E. Fire alarm conductor termination’s in control panel and annunciator panels to be made on terminal strips with separate point for each conductor. All such strips to be number identified as shown in wiring diagram attached to inside of door of control panel. Connect wiring neatly to terminal strips. Connect or clip with nylon cable straps. Set up termination of cabling so that sections of the system may be isolated or shorted out for servicing.

F. Wiring diagram submitted with fire alarm shop drawings shall be full system point-to-point, with address point numbers, with all connections shown.

G. From control modules provide connection to motor controllers and related equipment for fan system control and damper control. Provide 120 volt power to each smoke damper from a dedicated circuit from each floor connected to a life safety panel or normal panel if life safety is not available. Provide disconnect at each damper motor.

H. Provide connections to all sprinkler water-flow switches as required to connect to fire alarm system. Refer to Division 21 drawings for device locations and quantities.

I. Provide full width sampling tubes for duct smoke sensors, located to achieve optimum results for sensing smoke in ductwork and readily accessible for testing, observation and maintenance purposes. Test each duct detector with a manometer per NFPA requirements to verify that proper air flow sensing is achieved thru each duct detector per manufacturer's requirements. Submit results with fire alarm certification per NFPA 72. Detectors installed or located improperly shall be reinstalled at Contractor's expense. Coordinate with Sheet Metal Contractor for optimum results.

J. Provide plastic dust cover over smoke sensor heads for duration of construction. Remove covers at time of final acceptance testing of system and turn over to the Owner.

K. Provide coordination with all subcontractors for systems that require interface wiring with the fire alarm system. These include, but are not necessarily limited to, temperature control, sprinkler fire protection and energy management systems. The fire alarm wiring diagrams shall include details of this interface wiring to dampers, EP switches, motor starters, etc.

L. Maintain existing fire alarm system operations at all times during the course of the project. At no time shall the fire alarm system be left inoperable. Provide fire watch when building fire alarm system is down.

M. Provide a permanent machine printed label on each addressable device with SLC circuit and device number. Owner’s approval required prior to installation of labels

N. All sensor bases located within 10’ of floor shall have their locking device engaged to prevent unauthorized removal of sensor heads.

3.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Text display shall comply with the following: 1. Point labels shall be approved by the owner and local AHJ prior to final programming. 2. Accessible without the use of security codes.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 5 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 B. Program the fire alarm system control panel as follows: 1. Alarm mode: Initiation of fire alarm manual station or automatic actuation of thermal sensor, smoke sensor, sprinkler flow switch, dry system flow, or other approved alarm initiating device shall cause the following: a. Alarm lamp illuminated in control panel and annunciator panel along with alphanumeric display of alarm condition and record to historical log. b. Audible alarm signal synchronous temporal tone throughout entire building. c. Visual alarm signals synchronous 1 Hz flash throughout entire building. d. Transmit alarm signals to central monitoring station. 2. Trouble mode: a. Operating power failure, ground faults or opens on SLC, IDC, and NAC circuits or other supervised circuits connected to control panel cause an audible trouble signal and trouble lamp to light, and record to historical log, until circuits are restored to normal. b. Audible trouble signal capable of being silenced by trouble signal silencing switch, but lamp remains illuminated and alphanumeric display until circuit is returned to normal. c. Restoring circuits to normal after silencing switch has been operated causes lamp to extinguish and audible signal to resound until silencing switch is returned to normal. d. Closing of sprinkler tamper switch causes separate supervisory signal. e. Low pressure switch for dry pipe system causes supervisory signal and supervisory lamp to light until restored to normal condition. f. Transmit trouble and supervisory signals to central monitoring station. 3. Additional fire alarm control requirements: a. Sprinkler valve and post indicating valves activate fire alarm supervisory signal when operators are off normal position. b. Magnetic door holders shall release throughout building on alarm unless scheduled or specified otherwise. c. Duct smoke detectors in addition to initiating an alarm at fire alarm panel shall shut down associated fan system and close associated dampers. d. Elevator lobby and elevator equipment room smoke detectors initiate elevator recall per ANSI and NFPA requirements. e. Water Flow switch activation shall cause domestic water valve to close.

3.03 SYSTEM VERIFICATION

A. In the presence of the owner, engineer, or their designated representative, have the fire alarm equipment manufacturer make a thorough inspection and test of the complete fire alarm system including all components such as manual stations, thermal sensors, smoke sensors, monitor and control modules to ensure the following: 1. Complete functional system test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local AHJ requirements. 2. Installed in accordance with the functions and performance specified and as shown on drawings. 3. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Regulations covering supervision of components are adhered to. 5. Make necessary changes to conform to items 1 through 4 with assistance of the manufacturer. 6. Provide written certification of completed system to include duct detector manometer test report in compliance with NFPA 72 and local AHJ requirements. 7. Provide one additional system reprogramming at no charge of system nomenclature, sensor sensitivity, and/or system functions if so desired by the owner or local AHJ. Provide owner with a copy of a sensor sensitivity report to include peak value of each sensor. This reprogramming shall occur at any time during the 12 month warranty period.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 6 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 3.04 MANUALS

A. Submit complete operating and maintenance manuals in the format required by Division 1 to include: 1. "As installed" set of complete wiring diagrams. 2. Information required to operate the equipment and system. 3. Information for testing, repair, trouble shooting and recommended maintenance intervals. 4. Provide a replacement parts list and name and address where available. 5. “As installed” Bill of materials to include catalog cuts of all components of the fire alarm system and devices, and a system point list to include: device address, custom label, sensitivity setting, and peak value.

3.05 BRANCH CIRCUIT

A. Provide handle lock on circuit breaker(s) serving each fire alarm panel and paint circuit breaker handle(s) red. Label circuit breaker number and location inside fire alarm and NAC panels.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 7 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 28 3101 – 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package © IMEG 19001982.00 11/26/2019

SECTION 27 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Communications equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for pathways and cables. 3. Pillow seals for sleeves. 4. Common communications installation requirements.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of communications equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. Connecting pathways, cables, wireways, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for communications items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

2.02 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing pillows, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. Provide pillows to seal all sleeves in fire-rated walls and all sleeves over 1” in diameter.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270500-1 Common Work Results for Communications Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, gypsum walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 4 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide a minimum of 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable, unless larger size is indicated.

H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pathway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal pathway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270500-2 Common Work Results for Communications Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.03 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION 27 05 00

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270500-3 Common Work Results for Communications Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Horizontal Communications cables are shall be distributed with J-Hooks above ceilings where practical. Utilize EMT where exposed or otherwise not accessible.

B. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 6. Metallic surface pathways. 7. Hooks. 8. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 9. Polymer-concrete handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit . 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for the following: 1. Surface pathways 2. Wireways and fittings. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 4. Underground handholes and boxes.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-1 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Metal raceway of circular cross section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. 2. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 3. Republic Conduit. 4. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 5. Wheatland Tube Company.

C. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Set screw or compression. 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Nonmetallic raceway of circular section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-2 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 3. Kraloy. 4. RACO; Hubbell. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

C. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated

E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

F. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.

G. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

H. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.03 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway with a circular cross section, approved for plenum installation unless otherwise indicated.

B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with TIA-569-D.

2.04 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal trough of rectangular cross section fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts, and with hinged or removable covers.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

C. General Requirements for Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Comply with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 2. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-3 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

B. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 3. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.

D. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.06 SURFACE METAL PATHWAYS

A. Description: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers, complying with UL 5.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. MonoSystems, Inc. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

D. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-4 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

E. Comply with TIA-569-D.

2.07 SURFACE NONMETALLIC PATHWAYS:

A. Description: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. MonoSystems, Inc. 3. Panduit Corp. 4. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 5. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Finish: Texture and color selected by Architect from custom colors.

D. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.

E. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Comply with TIA-569-D.

2.08 HOOKS

A. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for telecommunications cable.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. MonoSystems, Inc. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with TIA-569-D.

E. Galvanized steel.

F. J shape.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-5 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2.09 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Description: Enclosures for communications.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 5. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 6. MonoSystems, Inc. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 8. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 11. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

1. Comply with TIA-569-D. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for use in wet locations. 3. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. 4. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. 5. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

D. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

E. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

F. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-6 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: a. Material: Plastic. b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.10 POLYMER-CONCRETE HANDHOLES

A. Description: Molded of sand and aggregate; bound together with polymer resin; and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

C. General Requirements for Polymer Concrete Handholes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 1. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 2. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS".

F. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

G. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-7 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC,. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Pathway locations include the following: a. Any space subjected to vehicle traffic; provide IMC within 60” AFF. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT or J-Hooks. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway or EMT. 8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable: General-use, optical-fiber-cable pathway EMT. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel units in commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size for copper and aluminum cables, and 1 inch for optical-fiber cables.

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-8 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3. EMT: Use set-screw or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA/BICSI 568. 3. TIA-569-D. 4. NECA 101

B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 270528.29 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling" for sleeves and sleeve seals for communications.

F. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

G. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

H. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

I. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

J. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

L. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-9 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Comply with requirements for expansion joints specified in this article. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from nonmetallic conduit and fittings to IMC and fittings before rising above floor.

M. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

Q. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path.

R. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

S. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Secure pull wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare alongside pathways in use.

T. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

U. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-10 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

V. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway- sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

W. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

X. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

Y. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Z. Hooks: 1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity limits. 2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or support rods. 3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings, luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical and communications equipment. 4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c. 5. Provide a hook at each change in direction.

AA. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-11 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

BB. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

CC. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same vertical channel.

DD. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

EE. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

FF. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

GG. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe of less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete around conduit for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."

3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-12 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."

3.06 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 270528

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 270528-13 Pathways for Communications Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Telecommunications service entrance pathways. 5. Grounding.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 27 13 13 Section "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 2. Division 27 13 23 Section "Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 3. Division 27 15 00 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 4. Division 28 05 13 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. LAN: Local area network.

C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271100-1 Communications Equipment Room Fittings Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site inspection.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271100-2 Communications Equipment Room Fittings Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics. 2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 4. Straps and other devices.

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high, and 2-1/4 inches deep.

2.02 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

2.03 EQUIPMENT FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co. 3. AMP; a Tyco International Ltd. company. 4. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 5. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 6. Belden 7. Ortronics, Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The) 10. Hoffman.

B. General Frame Requirements: 1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard, 19-inch panel mounting. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

C. Floor-Mounted Racks: 84”H x 20.3”W Modular-type, steel construction. 1. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug, and a power strip. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271100-3 Communications Equipment Room Fittings Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

D. Cable Management for Equipment Frames: 1. Wall mounting Double hinge for easy equipment access – basis of design Hoffman EWMW242425 2. Type 1 - UL2416 3. 12 gauge Steel construction. 4. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 5. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 6. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. 7. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum height of two rack units each.

2.04 POWER STRIPS

A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363. 1. Rack mounting. 2. Six, 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R receptacles. 3. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 4. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground. 5. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost. 6. Close-coupled, direct plug-in line cord. 7. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position. 8. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 13 kA per phase. 9. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449 clamping voltage for all 3 modes shall be not more than 330 V.

2.05 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Provide a telecommunications Ground Bus Bar in each Telecommunications (Voice and/or Data) Room: 1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide by 12” long with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. 3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.06 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271100-4 Communications Equipment Room Fittings Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

C. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.

D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.02 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."Comply with TIA/EIA-569- A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.03 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems.” Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identification requirements. See Evaluations for discussion of TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration.

C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

END OF SECTION 27 11 00

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271100-5 Communications Equipment Room Fittings Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 27 13 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. One Category 6 twisted pair cable. 2. Twisted pair cable hardware, including plugs, jacks, patch panels, and cross-connects. 3. Grounding provisions for twisted pair cable. 4. Cabling identification products. 5. Source quality control requirements for twisted pair cable.

B. One Cat 6 cable shall be installed from the Main Electrical Room to the Telecommunications Enclosure Located in the East Mezzanine.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. LAN: Local area network.

E. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.04 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Copper backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross- connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-1 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD.

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. Cabling administration Drawings and printouts. 3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations. b. Telecommunications pathways. c. Telecommunications system access points. d. Telecommunications grounding system e. Cross-connects. f. Patch panels. g. Patch cords.

4. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

C. Twisted pair cable testing plan.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. 3. Plugs: Ten of each type. 4. Jacks: Ten of each type.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, cabling administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Commercial Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-2 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair for open and short circuits.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA- 568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B.

2.02 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2.03 GENERAL CABLE CHARACTERISTICS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with the applicable standard and NFPA 70 for the following types:

1. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685 or Type CMP in listed cable routing assembly. 2. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMP or Type CMR in listed plenum or riser communications raceway.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-3 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

C. RoHS compliant.

2.04 CATEGORY 6 TWISTED PAIR CABLE

A. Description: One, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 2. Siemon. 3. Berk-Tek 4. Hitachi 5. Panduit 6. Commscope

C. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6 cables.

D. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.

E. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).

F. Cable Rating: Plenum.

G. Jacket: White thermoplastic.

2.05 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE

A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate twisted pair copper communications cable.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. CommScope, Inc. 2. Siemon 3. Belden 4. Panduit 5. Leviton

C. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Twisted pair cable hardware shall meet the performance requirements of Category 6. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. 3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. 4. Source Limitations: Obtain twisted pair cable hardware from same manufacturer as twisted pair cable, from single source.

D. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-4 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

E. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

F. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Features: a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels. b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors. c. Replaceable connectors. d. 24 or 48 ports.

2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch equipment racks. 3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

G. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:

1. Male; eight position (8P8C); color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable. 2. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.

H. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:

1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable. 2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate. 3. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 4. Marked to indicate transmission performance.

I. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 3’-7’, as needed for installation; terminated with an eight-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2.06 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A.Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

2.07 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with TIA-607-B.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-5 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA-568-C.1.

C. Factory test cables according to TIA-568-C.2.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

3.02 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays, except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in non-plenum accessible ceiling spaces, attics, and gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables, except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install cables parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, cabinets, and racks specified in Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."

B. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for communications raceways. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

C. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-6 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3.04 INSTALLATION OF COPPER BACKBONE CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA/BICSI 568.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.1. 2. Comply with BICSI's "Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM)," Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section. 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation, and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Pulling and Installing Cable" Section. Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.0 and TIA-568-C.2. 2. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend cable, not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with recommendations from BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual" and TIA-569-D for separating unshielded copper communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-7 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways, power lines, and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.05 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with "Firestopping Systems" Article in BISCI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."

3.06 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to the "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter in BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."

B. Comply with TIA-607-B and NECA/BICSI-607.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing at least a 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.07 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-8 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire- resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

E. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if wire color is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each terminal strip, and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group, extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device, with the name and number of a particular device. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and -connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-B requirements for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-568-C.1.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-9 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

F. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, printed, and submitted.

G. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

H. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 271313

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-10 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 27 13 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. 9/125 micrometer single-mode, inside plant optical fiber cable (OS2). 2. 50/125-micrometer armored OM4, optical fiber cabling. 3. Optical fiber cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 4. Cabling identification products.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. LAN: Local area network.

E. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.04 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Optical fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross- connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.

C. A 6 Strand OS2 and a 6 Strand OM4 shall be installed in conduit between the Comm Extension Room #1114 and IT room 1407. Fiber connectors will be LC OM4 fusion splice pigtails or use splice on connectors. Basis of design Pandit - FRME1, Fiber adapter panel - FAP6WAQDLCZ, Splice on connectors - FLCS2/9SOCPXAQ

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-1 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD. 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following: a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations. b. Telecommunications pathways. c. Telecommunications system access points. d. Telecommunications grounding system. e. Cross-connects. f. Patch panels. g. Patch cords. 5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

C. Fiber optic cable testing plan.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For optical fiber cable, splices, and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Plugs: Ten of each type. 3. Jacks: Ten of each type.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by BICSI. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-2 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

C. All Material will be supplied from the same Manufacturer in order to supply a 20 Year Manufacturer Warranty.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA- 568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.

D. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B.

2.2 9/125 MICROMETER SINGLE-MODE, INSIDE PLANT OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (OS2)

A. Description: Single mode, 9/125-micrometer, 12 strand, single loose tube, optical fiber cable.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Superior Essex. 2. General Cable.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-3 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3. Belden. 4. Siemon

C. Conductive cable shall be armored type.

D. Maximum Attenuation: 0.4 dB/km at 1310 nm; 0.4 dB/km at 1550 nm.

E. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Yellow. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-D. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.

F. Comply with TIA-492CAAB for detailed specifications.

G. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.

H. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.

I. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: 1. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262; Type OFNP in listed plenum communications raceway; or Type OFNP, or Type OFNR in metallic conduit.

2.3 50/125 MICROMETER MULTIMODE, INSIDE PLANT OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (OM4) A. Description: Multi-mode, 50/125-micrometer, 12 strand-fiber, Armored, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Superior Essex. 2. General Cable. 3. Belden. 4. Siemon

C. Conductive cable shall be armored type.

D. Maximum Attenuation: 3dB/km at 850 nm; 1dB/km at 1300 nm.

E. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches .

F. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.

G. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-4 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

H. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: 1. Plenum-Rated: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Belden 2. Seimon Co. 3. Ortronics 4. Panduit

B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware: 1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA- 604-2-B for Type ST connectors, TIA-604-3-B for Type SC connectors, TIA-604-10-B for Type LC connectors, TIA/EIA-604-12 for Type MT-RJ connectors, and TIA-604-5-D for Type MPO connectors. Comply with TIA-568-C.3. 2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.25 dB.

2.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with TIA-607-B.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-B and TIA-568-C.3.

C. Factory test pre-terminated optical fiber cable assemblies according to TIA-526-14-B and TIA- 568-C.3.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-5 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for pathways specified in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 301.

B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.3. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all cables; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 6. Bundle, lace, and train cable to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 9. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. 10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. 11. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

C. Open-Cable Installation:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-6 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire- resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-7 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA 606-B, for the following: 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-568-C.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction according to TIA-526-14-B, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than those calculated according to equation in TIA-568-C.1.

C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 271323

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271323-8 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 27 25 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SCOPE

A. Provide new devices indicated on plans with a new patch panel in new racks. Horizontal cables shall be routed as indicated on the Data Jack Schedule shown on plans.

1.03 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pathways. 2. UTP cabling. 3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 4. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 5. Cabling system identification products.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. LAN: Local area network.

E. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.05 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-1 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

B. Each Data outlet (open triangle) shown on the plans shall have data jacks and cables as indicated in schedule (unless noted otherwise).

C. Each Wireless Access Point outlet (open triangle w/ WAP) shown on the plans shall have data jacks and cables as indicated in schedule (unless noted otherwise).

D. Each Camera location shown on the plans shall have data jacks and cables as indicated in schedule (unless noted otherwise).

E. Each Intercom “IC” shown on the plans shall have data jacks and cables as indicated in schedule (unless noted otherwise).

F. Provide cabling for 2 analog phone lines from the main server room to the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

G. Each outlet box shall be a minimum of 4” x 4” x 2¼” with a single gang mud ring and faceplate. All devices shall be modular. Each outlet box shall have 1” conduit stubbed to above accessible ceiling space with a nylon bushing, unless indicated otherwise.

H. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in the horizontal cross- connect.

1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with Category 6 transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-C.2, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner 2. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords. 3. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-2 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

C. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size and outlet configuration.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

H. As-Builts: Provide complete electronic and hard copies of as-built drawings (floor plans) indicating all horizontal cabling, devices, labeling, and backbone cabling.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration Drawings, by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-3 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Provide (6) complete voice/data outlets to be installed during construction. Exact locations to be determined in the field, estimate 200’ from telecom room. Each outlet shall have two data. A credit of $300.00/outlet shall be required at Project Close-Out for any unused outlets.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Provide 1” metal conduit sleeves from main corridors to every room requiring voice/data devices. Sleeves shall be located above accessible ceiling and bushed on both ends. Low-voltage installer shall determine exact locations and quantities.

C. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support for cabling between the Cross-Connect the work area outlet shall be accomplished with metal j-hooks. Plenum rated plastic Velcro straps, zip-ties, etc... will not be allowed.

2.2 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden - 3600 2. Superior Essex – NextGain Category 6eX 3. Siemon – System 6 – 9c6p4 4. General Cable -GenSpeed 6000E

B. Description: Enhanced Category 6, 100-ohm, 23 AWG 4-pair UTP, with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Category 6. 4. Shall meet IEEE 802.af and IEEE 802at for PoE applications 5. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-4 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following. 1. Panduit Corp. 2. Ortronics 3. Siemon 4. Belden

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Terminate all cables in rack-mounted patch panels. Do not install wall-mounted blocks.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. Provide (48) port panels with 25% spare capacity. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair plus 25% spare capacity.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in lengths as required; terminated with eight- position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Outlets: Provide Jacks and Cables per 1.05 of this Section. 1. Metal Faceplate: Satin Stainless Steel. Coordinate with Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. 3. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-5 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

C. Data outlets for Wireless access points shall have (2) Cat 6A cable and device terminated in separate patch panels. WAP location supply either surface mount box, 6A Data Jack and a patch cord or a Cat6A field term plug – basis of design Panduit FP6X88MTG

2.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

B. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

D. All Material will be supplied from the same Manufacturer in order to supply a 20 Year Manufacturer Warranty.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in 1” minimum, metal raceways except above accessible ceiling spaces. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable only. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-6 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

E. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms. 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. Where applicable, conduits shall enter room at a location to correspond with ladder racking in room. 2. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 3. Extend conduits 4 inches above finished floor. 4. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 9. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. 10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-7 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

C. UTP Cable Installation. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation. 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources. 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 3. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

D. Use firestopping pillows only. Do not use fire caulk.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Administration Class: 2.

B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration.

C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-8 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspection

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B and TIA/EIA- 568-C.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-9 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.

C. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted in accordance with the BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.

END OF SECTION 271500

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 271500-10 Communications Horizontal Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SECTION 27 51 19 SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electronic noise generators, amplifiers, wiring, loudspeakers, controls, and auxiliary components to generate, amplify, distribute, and reproduce digitally synthesized and stabilized pink background noise to improve speech privacy in zones of coverage.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Test and Calibration Conditions: Spaces completely furnished but unoccupied, lights and HVAC systems on, HVAC system testing and balancing completed, ceiling components in place.

B. Covered Spaces: Spaces above which masking speakers are installed.

C. Pink Noise: Random noise signal with equal energy in each octave.

D. Sound Masking: Covering up of one sound by another.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. 3 zones of Sound masking as shown on plan.

B. Zones: Multiple-zone coverage.

C. Channels: Single channel of masking sound to each zone.

D. Channels: Separate channel of masking sound to each of two groups of speakers in each zone.

E. Signal Levels: Individually adjustable for each of 14 one-third octave bands centered at 200 through 4000 Hz, for sound-masking noise channels.

F. Sound-Power Level Produced by System: Match NC 40 contour between 400 and 2000 Hz, with smooth roll-off above and below those frequencies.

1. Initial Level: 40 dB, A-weighted. 2. Final Adjusted Level: 40 to 50 dB, A-weighted. Determine final level for each space individually by measurement as specified in Part 3. 3. Measurements: Made under calibration conditions.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-1 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

G. Maximum Local Variance of Sound-Power Level: 6 dB for the 500-Hz octave band and 3 dB for the 1000-, 2000-, and 4000-Hz octave bands for 75 percent of the locations in covered spaces.

H. Maximum Average Range of Sound-Power-Level Deviation: 2 dB in the 250-, 2000-, and 4000-Hz octave bands and 1.5 dB for the 500- and 1000-Hz octave bands for all locations.

I. Directional Effect: People in covered spaces under calibration conditions cannot determine source of masking sound.

J. Uniformity with Respect to Time: One-minute time-averaged sound-pressure level of any octave band of masking sound from 250 to 8000 Hz remains constant in any space to within a standard deviation of 2 dB when measured over a 30-minute period.

K. Sound Quality: No audible hum or noise from this system in covered spaces when noise generators are off and power amplifiers are on with input volume controls set at 50 percent.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each component. Include nationally recognized testing laboratory listing data.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and elevations showing minimum clearances and installed features and devices for system components. Show types and locations of masking speakers and their wiring connections, channel assignments, and axis orientations. Show ducts, beams, and other significant sound-reflecting and -absorbing elements in ceiling space and show locations of partitions below ceiling. Include a diagram showing interconnection of major system components for each zone and channel and indicating grounding connections. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Certificates: For sound-masking equipment and components, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

E. Record of Final Field Tests and Measurements: Include final tuned tap and control adjustment settings of system.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sound-masking equipment and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include data for each type of product, including all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer of sound-masking equipment. Refer to Division 01 Section "References" for definition of an experienced installer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A prime system manufacturer who maintains or sponsors a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at Project site with a 24-hour maximum response time.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct testing of sound-masking systems according to ASTM E 548. Required experience includes having tested a minimum of five different systems within the last five years, each system similar in size and complexity to Project system.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-2 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package D. Source Limitations: Obtain equipment components from a single source who assumes responsibility for compatibility of items used.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with UL 813, unless a more stringent standard is specified in Part 2.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate quantity and arrangement of speaker assemblies with ceiling space configuration and with components occupying ceiling space, including structural members, pipes, air-distribution components, raceways, cable trays, recessed lighting fixtures, and other items.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra products described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sound-Masking Speaker Assemblies: One for each 10 of each type used, but no fewer than one. 2. Fuses: Five for each type used, but no fewer than one.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or a pre-approved equal: 1. Atlas Sound LP. 2. Soft dB 3. Dynasound, Inc. 4. Lencore Acoustics Corp. 5. Moeller, K. R. Associates Ltd.

2.02 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Components: Modular plug-in, heavy-duty, industrial-grade integrated circuit devices.

B. AC Supply Voltage Tolerance: 105 to 130 V with no degradation of system performance.

C. Protection from Power Line Surges: Integral surge suppressors listed under UL 1449; complying with IEEE C62.41, Category B; and with the following features: 1. Suppression Level: 300 V. 2. Maximum Response Time: 5 nanoseconds. 3. Circuit: Multistage, using inductors and silicon-avalanche zener diodes or equivalent.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-3 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 4. Indicator Lamp: Neon or light-emitting diode located on control panel and arranged to extinguish on failure of protection. 5. Fuses: Externally accessible.

D. Component Housings: Suitable for mounting in standard 19-inch equipment racks, with connections at rear and controls either on rear panel or protected by a screw-fastened security cover.

2.03 NOISE GENERATOR AND FILTER UNITS

A. Pink Noise Generator: Output octave bands from 30 to 4000 Hz.

B. Filters for One-Third Octave Bands: Adjustable from 10 dB of boost to 10 dB of cut at each center frequency.

C. High-Pass Filter: Approximate range of cutoff adjustment is 37 to 400 Hz.

D. Low-Pass Filter: Approximate range of cutoff adjustment is 3.4 to 20 kHz.

E. High-Cut Filter: Approximate range of cutoff adjustment is 180 to 9000 Hz with slope varying to 12 dB per octave.

2.04 PROGRAMMABLE AUDIO-LEVEL CONTROL UNIT

A. Automatic Sound-Power-Level Changes: Six system channel changes, four times per day, and capable of different time settings for each day of week.

B. Level Changes: Programmable from front panel of unit, and automatically incremented over a period long enough for sound-level variations to be imperceptible to occupants of covered spaces.

C. Program Memory: Nonvolatile for one year, minimum, without power. When re-energized after a power outage, control starts at zero level and automatically advances system sound level at same rate used for programmed level changes.

2.05 POWER AMPLIFIERS

A. Power Amplifiers: Comply with EIA SE-101-A, and have the following minimum features: 1. Mounting: Rack mounted. 2. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from zero to full load. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent, at rated power output from 50 to 12,000 Hz. 4. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 60 dB or greater, at rated output. 5. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 50 to 12,000 Hz.

2.06 MASKING SPEAKER ASSEMBLIES

A. Speakers: Comply with EIA SE-103; cone type, with the following minimum features:

1. Minimum Axial Sensitivity: 45 dB. 2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 50 to 15,000 Hz. 3. Size: 8 inches) with 1-inch voice coil and minimum 5-oz. ceramic magnet, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees. 5. Rated Output Level: 10 W.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-4 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Configuration: Dual 8-inch (200-mm) and dual 5-inch (125-mm) units mounted on metal baffles and arranged for optimum, multidirectional, angular sound distribution. Arrange units for suspension from the building structure above the ceiling.

C. Matching Transformers: Comply with EIA-160, full-power rated with 4 standard taps, and a maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.

D. Assemblies installed in air-handling spaces shall comply with NFPA 70 requirements for rate of heat- release and rate of smoke-release characteristics. Tests for these requirements shall be according to UL 2043.

2.07 WIRE

A. Speaker Wire: Untinned, twisted-pair, solid-copper wire with PVC jacket; listed and labeled for environmental air plenums where cable is indicated in plenum spaces and is not indicated to be in raceway.

2.08 COMPONENT MOUNTING RACKS

A. Configuration: Comply with EIA-310-D. Factory-fabricated units designed for interchangeable mounting, forced or convection air cooling, wiring connection, and enclosure of standard 19-inch rack modules.

B. Mounting Provisions: Equipped for freestanding floor mounting.

C. Cabinet: Factory-finished steel with component mounting rails and prewired plug strips for component power connections. Full front and rear doors with continuous hinges, handles, and cylindrical keyed locks.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Speaker Assemblies: Suspend with chains from building structure above ceilings so bottom of assembly is 6 inches above upper plane of finished ceiling material. Use eyebolts on speaker assemblies for attachment. Suspend independently of supports for components of other building systems.

B. Speaker Connections: For two- or three-channel systems, connect speaker assemblies alternatively so masking sound is redundant throughout zones of coverage.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways, except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics and in hollow gypsum board partitions, and unless otherwise indicated. Conceal raceways and wiring, except in unfinished spaces.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

E. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between normal termination points. Remove and discard cable where damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-5 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package F. Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and support as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Grounding: As recommended by manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Ground equipment and conductors to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common- mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Install 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

H. Impedance Matching: For system components, including connecting cable, provide end-to-end level and impedance-matched signal paths. Use matching networks and balancing devices at connections where necessary to avoid mismatches.

I. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Use color-coded conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so media are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams.

B. Label speaker assemblies as to channel and zone.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections , and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. Include the following: 1. Operational Test: Start system to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Make initial sound-spectrum and -level adjustments for each zone. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

4. Pretesting: Tune, align, and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify they comply with specified material, installation, and performance requirements. Correct deficiencies and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. 5. Masking Sound-Power-Level Adjustments: Adjust independently for each space to minimum level between 40 and 50 dB that will provide speech privacy between adjacent workstations while complying with other system requirements.

D. Final Acceptance Testing: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of acceptance test performance schedule. Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-6 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. Test Conditions: As defined in "Test and Calibration Conditions" Paragraph in Part 1 of this Section. Perform tests as specified below, as required by ASTM E 1041, and as required to verify performance specified in Part 2 "System Description" Article. 2. Instrumentation: Use a professional-quality, sound-level meter with octave-band filters and documentation of recent calibration against recognized standards. 3. Record test observations, readings, and corrective actions. 4. System Tests: Include the following for each system zone: a. Speaker Circuit Impedance Test: Measure impedance at 1 kHz with amplifier disconnected, using a professional impedance meter or bridge. Locate and correct faults denoted by abnormal readings. b. Ambient Sound-Level Tests: With system off, measure ambient sound level in one-third octave bands. Also measure ambient sound level as a single, wide-band, A-weighted reading. c. Amplifier Noise Test: Check for performance specified in "System Description" Article with masking noise generator off and amplifiers on. d. System Noise Test: With masking noise signal on and amplifiers adjusted at a working level 10 dB above ambient sound level, check for hum, buzz, rattle, or other operating deficiencies. e. Spatial Uniformity Test: Measure sound level at locations no greater than 15 feet o.c. throughout covered spaces to determine compliance with specified performance level. f. Frequency Response Adjustment and Test: Adjust one-third octave frequency bands and other unit filters to provide response. Coordinate with NC 40 contour defined below between 200 and 2000 Hz, with smooth natural roll-off from those frequencies.

BAND RELATIVE ENCLOSED OFFICES SOUND-POWER LEVEL - dB

200 Plus 4 Minus 2 250 Plus 3 Minus 2 315 Plus 2 Minus 2.5 400 Plus 1 Minus 3 500 0 Minus 4 630 Minus 1 Minus 5 800 Minus 2 Minus 6 1000 Minus 3 Minus 7 1250 Minus 4 Minus 8.5 1600 Minus 5 Minus 10 2000 Minus 6 Minus 12

5. Adjust level of masking sound for each space so one-third octave band centered at 500 Hz has final selected sound-power level for that space. Measure deviation from listed values in one-third octave bands from 400 to 2000 Hz. Measured values must not deviate from those listed by more than 4 dB for open plan areas and 8 dB for enclosed offices. The total of individual band deviations in eight bands must not exceed 16 dB for open plan areas and 30 dB for enclosed offices. 6. Walk-through Test: People in covered spaces cannot discern speaker locations. 7. Temporal Stability Test: Check for uniformity of time by measuring sound level in each of 14 octave bands at one-minute intervals over a 30-minute test period. Deviations must not exceed limits specified in Part 2 "System Description" Article.

E. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until meeting specified requirements.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-7 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package F. Recording Control Settings and System Adjustments: Record final control settings and programming, and final tap setting of speaker matching transformers. Record final sound-level measurements and observations.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 2 visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain services. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION 27 51 19

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275119-8 Sound Masking Systems Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SECTION 27 51 23 INTERCOM SYSTEM

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

A. The Drawings, the provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and the General Requirements apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 – All Sections 2. Division 27 – All Sections 3. Division 28 – All Sections

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Intercom system work performed by the Hennepin County Security System Integrator: a. Intercom Substations b. Intercom Master Stations c. Transient Protection d. Integration with the Access Control and Video systems e. Connection to Hennepin County Local and Wide Area Exchange f. Security Operations Center workstation graphics g. Network coordination and connection to the Hennepin County Security Wide Area Network

B. Scope of Work required by others: 1. Cabling a. CAT6 Horizontal cabling for IP Intercom and IP Masters shall be provided by the Voice Data contractor as part of a tested horizontal cabling system. 2. Electrical Rough In and Power Requirements a. All electrical rough in and power requirements shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Security Integrator must be the existing Hennepin County Service Vendor for Stentofon Intercom Systems B. Contact: Ralph Michels Senior Account Manager 401 W Travelers Trail Burnsville, MN 55337 +1 952-707-9511 Direct +1 952-894-5343 Main [email protected]

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit per the general requirements of the project specifications. B. In addition: 1. Submit to the engineer all data sheets for components The parts list and the corresponding data sheets shall be submitted in the same order in a single PDF file. Multiple PDF files will be rejected.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275123-1 Intercom System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 2. Submit all as-built drawings in Autocad Format. As-builts shall include: a. Floorplans showing symbols for all devices b. Details plans showing wiring terminations to all devices and control equipment and interfaces to other systems such as fire alarm and elevator controls. c. Riser diagrams showing interconnection of all devices and control locations d. Schedules noting device types and configuration data e. Elevations of equipment racks 3. Operator and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as electronic documents or media. Hardcopy shall only be submitted if electronic versions are not available.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Package, handle, deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage. B. Provide locked storage units C. Contractor shall not deliver, store, or install any product in construction areas where the product is subject to damage from water, dust, and construction debris.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty per the general and supplemental conditions of the contract.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 The following products are standard products in use throughout Hennepin County facilities. No substitutions are allowed. If a listed product cannot be provided, notify the engineer in writing prior to the final addendum date and an alternative product will be identified.

A. Intercom Exchange 1. Minimum Requirements a. Expand the existing exchange located in the Hennepin County Security Operations Center b. Dimensions (WxHxD) 332 x 44 x 340 mm / 13.07 x 1.73 x 13.38 inch. c. Weight 2 kg / 4.40 lbs. d. Power 90-270 V AC 4 W max. e. Mounting: 19” rack f. Temperature range -15 C to +55 C g. Relative humidity 95% h. Processor subsystem Intel IXP425 with HW acceleration for packet processing and encryption i. Media subsystem DSP @ 1600 MIPS FPGA @ 400K gates j. Storage subsystem Solid state (64 MB Flash) SIM card (IP configuration, HW-ID) k. Memory 128 MB SDRAM 1 MB NVRAM l. Subscriber Capacity 552 intercom stations per server m. IP Telephones 552 IP telephones per server n. Priority features Group Call 250 groups Unlimited number of participants Priority features Call Modes Open mode Ringing mode Call request mode Priority features o. Audio messaging PA broadcasting Auto-attendant, Voice guidance (doors, elevators) p. Security voice response Compliance CE, FCC Part 15 2. Approved Products a. Zenitel XE1

2.02 The following products shall be provided by the Security Contractor unless noted otherwise.

A. IP Intercom Substation 1. Minimum Requirements a. Faceplate: 11 guage, #304 Stainless Steel

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275123-2 Intercom System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package b. Dimensions in inches: 4.5 H x 4.5 W x 2.3 D c. Protection Class: IP 64 with proper installation d. Speaker: 2 x 2 square, 45 ohm, 5 watt, waterproof e. Power: Power over Ethernet, IEEE f. Local Power 24VDC g. Indicator: LED behind translucent red epoxy bonded Lexan lens h. Mounting: Surface or Flush, depth of 2.5” required i. Connectors: 1 RJ45 (Ethernet) 10/100 Mbps j. 6 I/O’s k. 1 Relay Contact l. 10 Watt Class D Amplifier m. Electret Microphone n. Status LED o. Remote Control: 6 I/O’s tool less and one relay contact p. Operating temperature range -25° to 70° C / -13° to 158 ° F q. Storage temperature range -25° to 70° C / -13° to 158 ° F 2. Approved Products a. Zenitel IP Turbine Mini Substation TMIS-2 1008116020

B. Intercom Master Station 1. Minimum Requirements a. Mounting Table top b. Dimensions: (W x H x D) 72 x 140 x 270 mm, 2.8 x 5.5 x 10.6 inch c. Weight 0.4 kg (.89 lbs.) d. Temperature range 0˚C - 55˚C, 32˚C - 131˚F e. Humidity Non condensing, 10% - 85% RH f. Max SPL 85 dB at 1m g. Loudspeaker Impedance 8 ohm h. Frequency Range 300 - 7000 Hz i. Connector 1 x RJ45 (Ethernet) 10/100 Mbps j. Direct access display 10 lines, 5-8 characters graphic Information display 4 lines, 20 characters graphic k. Power consumption Power over Ethernet, IEEE 802.3 a-f, Class 0, Idle 4W, max. 8W l. IP protocols IP v4 - TCP - UDP - HTTPS – TFTP - RTP - RTCP -DHCP - SNMP - DiffServ - TOS – STENTOFONCCoIP® m. Active noise filtering n. Acoustic echo cancellation o. Handset and volume override p. Management and operation DuHTTPS (Web configuration) q. DHCP and static IP 2. Approved Products a. Stentofon IP Dual Display 1008007000. b. Confirm handset preference with the owner, provide handset model if preferred by the owner.

C. Transient Protection 1. Minimum Requirements a. Agency Approvals: UL497B b. Standards Compliance: CAT5e, EIA/TIA568A, EIA/TIA568B c. Connection Method: RJ45 In/Out Pinout: All 8 pins are protected d. Data Rate: Gigabit Ethernet e. Max Continuous Current: 1.5 Amps f. Dissipation: 3,000W/pair (10/1000µs impulse) g. Protection Modes: Line-Ground (All) h. Operating Temperature: -40°F - 158°F (-40°C - 70°C)

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275123-3 Intercom System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package i. Maximum Humidity: 95% non-condensing Dimensions: 1.7” x 3.0” x 1.2” (43mm x 76mm x 30mm) Weight: 4oz (113g) j. Housing: ABS k. Service Voltage 48V MCOV 64V l. Clamp Voltage 72V Peak m. Surge Current 30A/pair 2. Approved Manufacturers a. Ditek DTK-MRJPOE

D. Cabling 1. CAT6 cabling shall be provided by the Voice Data cabling contractor unless noted otherwise. 2. Provide all other cables as required for a complete and operational system. 3. Install per ANSI/TIA 568 and 569 4. Provide J Hook cable supports for all cabling. 5. Where basket tray is provided for low voltage cabling, install cabling in the partition designated for the intercom system.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION A. Refer to plans demolition requirements B. Remove equipment as shown in a non-destructive manner and offer to the owner C. If refused by the owner, dispose of equipment in a legal manner. D. Remove all cabling associated with demolished field devices and head end equipment

3.02 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Define intercom numbering and naming requirements B. Coordinate with Hennepin County to define IP addressing requirements for all devices. C. Program the intercom master programmable button and displays per Hennepin County standards. D. Integrate the intercom system with the Andover Access Control system per Hennepin County Standards. E. Program the system to rollover to the Hennepin County Security Operations Center if not answered at the local intercom master. The owner shall determine the rollover time period. When forwarded, there shall be no rollover delay when calling the Security Operations Center. F. Local and Security Operations Center Workstations 1. Provide control icons on the access control graphics for each intercom G. Intercom Substations: 1. All intercoms must be installed in a backbox as shown in the details drawings to ensure acoustical quality. 2. Prior to electrical rough in, schedule a coordination meeting where each Intercom location will be reviewed with: a. The General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Hennepin County Security, and the Engineer. b. Coordinate installation of the elevator substation and cabling with the elevator contractor.

H. Building Entrance Points 1. A building entrance point enclosure shall be provided by the electrical contractor where shown on plans. Coordinate location of devices with the associated contractors. Refer to detail drawings.

I. Cabling 1. Horizontal CAT6 cabling is provided by others 2. Coordinate final device locations and direct attached modular terminations with the Voice Data contractor

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275123-4 Intercom System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3.03 TRAINING

A. Provide 1 training sessions, 1 hour duration. 1. Training shall include: a. Operator Training – Use of the controls b. Building Engineer Training – Review installation, As-Builts, and Maintenance

3.04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. System Testing 1. Conduct a system test and provide all submittals below. a. Each intercom shall be tested in sequential order and a corresponding test report shall be submitted to the engineer. b. Test each of the following for proper operation: 1) Intercom call button operation 2) Intercom substation ID on master station display 3) Andover Graphics 4) Audio intelligibility and volume 5) Verify intercom master buttons and displays are programmed 6) Verify call forwarding to the SOC is programmed and staff are trained. 7) Cables are properly labeled, routed and secured 8) Submit a summary report of test findings confirming all items above have been tested and any deficiencies have been corrected.

B. Conduct a final acceptance test with the Owner and Engineer after system testing is complete, test reports have been submitted, and as built documentation has been submitted. 1. Upon completion of the above items and all requirements identified in the plans and specifications: a. Notify the engineer in writing and request final acceptance b. Conduct an on-site demonstration to the engineer of system performance and compliance with the plans and specifications c. Correct any items noted by the engineer during acceptance and submit a signed punch list of corrections made. C. Issue a statement of warranty to the Owner and copy the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 275123-5 Intercom System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SECTION 28 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Electronic safety and security equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electronic safety and security installation requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-dieneterpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all Division 28 work with Division 26 Contractor requirements.

B. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electronic safety and security equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electronic safety and security items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

E. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping. “.”

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-1 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter, less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm) , thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) . b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter, equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.02 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.03 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30- minute working time.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall- mounting items.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-2 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electronic safety and security equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS

A. Electronic safety and security penetrations occur when raceways, pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.”

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1- inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-3 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electronic safety and security installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION 28 05 00

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-4 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SECTION 28 10 03 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

A. The Drawings, the provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and the General Requirements apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Related Sections 1. Division 26 – All Sections 2. Division 27 – All Sections 3. Division 28 – All Sections

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Access Control System Integrator – The contractor performing the scope of work described in this section B. Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor – The contractor performing the scope of work described in Section 28 10 04 Access Control Devices and Cabling

1.03 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Access control system work performed by the Hennepin County Access Control System Integrator a. Access Control Panels b. System programming and Integration c. Software licenses and workstation configuration d. Network coordination and connection to the Hennepin County Security Wide Area Network

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Access Control System Integrator must be the existing Hennepin County Service Vendor for Andover Access Control Systems.

B. Contact: Ralph Michels Senior Account Manager 401 W Travelers Trail Burnsville, MN 55337 +1 952-707-9511 Direct +1 952-894-5343 Main [email protected]

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit per the General Requirements of the project specifications.

B. In addition:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281003-1 Access Control System Integration Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1. Submit to the engineer all data sheets for components. The parts list and the corresponding data sheets shall be submitted in the same order in a single PDF file. Multiple PDF files will be rejected. 2. Submit all as-built drawings in Autocad Format. As-builts shall include: a. Floorplans showing symbols for all devices b. Details plans showing wiring terminations to all devices and control equipment and interfaces to other systems such as fire alarm and elevator controls. c. Riser diagrams showing interconnection of all devices and control locations d. Schedules noting device types and configuration data per Hennepin County Standards e. Elevations of equipment racks f. Operator and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as electronic documents or media. Hardcopy shall only be submitted if electronic versions are not available.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, handle, deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage.

B. Provide locked storage units

C. Contractor shall not deliver, store, or install any product in construction areas where the product is subject to damage from water, dust, and construction debris.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty per the general and supplemental conditions of the contract.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

A. Andover Continuum Client Workstation Access Control Software 1. Provide all software licenses, software, and security keys required for the workstations shown on plans 2. Provide all database licenses 3. Provide Pinpoint graphics software 4. Provide server software license expansion as required

B. Access Control Panel 1. Minimum Requirements a. Configure Panel to include the following components as required. Provide all components and interconnections for a complete and operational system. Refer to detail pages for assembly information. b. Determine the number of panels, modules, and power suppliers per the access control devices shown on plans 2. Approved Products a. Andover Continuum AC-1 access control modules (Per controlled doors as shown on plans) b. Andover NetController II, 0 Nodes, RS-485 I/O Bus c. Andover Continuum UI-8, 10 bit resolution, 5V input module d. Andover Continuum DO-4-R-) w/3 position overide switches,

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281003-2 Access Control System Integration Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

e. Andover Continuum PS120/240-AC85U f. Andover Continuum Battery (12V, 6.5 Ahr battery) g. Kele 36x26x7 NEMA 1 Enclosure UL w/Perf Panel

C. Power Supplies 24VDC 1. Minimum Requirements a. Provide auxiliary power supplies to power Card Readers. b. Size and quantities are to be determined by this contractor. c. Provide Power Distribution Modules with individual fusing per device d. Configure network monitoring of the power supplies per Hennepin County Standards. e. Provide factory enclosures f. Provide battery backup 2. Approved Products a. Life Safety Power FPO Series

D. Power Supplies 12VDC Auxiliary Supplies 1. Minimum Requirements a. Provide auxiliary power supplies to power Card Readers. b. Size and quantities are to be determined by this contractor. c. Provide Power Distribution Modules with individual fusing per device d. Configure network monitoring of the power supplies per Hennepin County Standards. e. Provide factory enclosures f. Provide battery backup 2. Approved Products a. Life Safety Power FPO Series

E. Card Readers – Wall Mount 1. Minimum Requirements a. Dual Technology Compatible with: 1) Hennepin County Indala 125Khz cards 2) Hennepin County HID iClass 13.56 MHz SE cards b. Arch Wallswitch Package c. Black d. Weigand Output e. Hennepin County Format with Proprietary Format 2. Approved Products a. HID Multiclass SE RP40 Series

F. Card Readers – Mullion Mount 1. Minimum Requirements a. Dual Technology Compatible with: 1) Hennepin County Indala 125Khz cards 2) Hennepin County HID iClass 13.56 MHz SE cards b. Arch Wallswitch Package c. Black d. Weigand Output

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281003-3 Access Control System Integration Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

e. Hennepin County Format with Proprietary Format 2. Approved Products a. HID Multiclass SE RP15 Series

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION

A. Refer to plans demolition requirements B. Remove equipment as shown in a non-destructive manner and offer to the owner C. If refused by the owner, dispose of equipment in a legal manner. D. Remove all cabling associated with demolished field devices and head end equipment E. Modify system programming to remove demolished devices from the system

3.02 PHASING REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to the architectural phasing plans. Provide all scope of work per the phasing plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Card Readers 1. Configure card readers with proprietary Hennepin County format 2. Furnish readers to the owner for subsequent installation by the Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor.

B. Network Connections 1. Coordinate with Hennepin County IT to: a. Establish network connections to the Hennepin County Network b. Define IP address requirements c. Provide patch cabling

C. Local Andover Workstations 1. Per Hennepin County standards, provide graphical control and status annunciation for: a. Access Control Devices b. Intercoms

D. Andover System Programming – Hennepin County Security Operations Center (SOC) 1. The system will be monitored and controlled at the Hennepin County SOC 2. Modify the system graphics at each workstation per Hennepin County Standards to support control and monitoring of all devices including but not limited to: a. Card Reader Doors b. Monitored Doors c. Controlled Doors d. Intercoms

E. Card Reader Doors 1. Coordinate with owner to define: a. Access control clearance and cardholder privileges. b. Naming Conventions c. Submit written programming plan for owner approval prior to any system programming. 2. Program all scheduled clearance times and holiday schedules. a. Program propped and forced door alarms for each monitored door. Annunciate alarms on local workstation graphics. b. Card reader LED shall function as: 1) Green = Unlocked

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281003-4 Access Control System Integration Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

2) Red = Locked 3) Flashing = Alarm c. Request to exit sensor shall shunt alarms on valid egress. d. Request to exit sensors shall not unlock doors e. Request to exit sensor shall sound internal piezo alarm during propped or forced door alarms. Sounder shall clear once the door is returned to closed. Use of the sounder shall be programmable per door. Software design shall allow the security supervisor to enable\disable the sounder.

F. Coordination requirements with the Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor 1. Coordinate installation schedules such that: a. Field cabling is terminated on access control panels as while field devices are being terminated. b. Card readers are tested while the Device and Cabling Contractor is at the door location

G. Power Supplies 1. Configure the monitoring software for power supplies per Hennepin County Standards.

H. Access Control Panels 1. Coordinate wall space and equipment locations with other contractors. 2. Provide cable management within enclosure. 3. Provide wire duct or conduit for all wiring coming from accessible ceiling or between enclosure

I. Labeling 1. All labels shall be machine printed white background black letter labels with permanent ink and permanent adhesive. 2. Handwritten labels are not acceptable at any locations. 3. All equipment, cabinets, and junction boxes shall be labeled to match the designators shown on a corresponding as-built riser wiring diagram. 4. Each cable shall be labeled at all terminations points to match a corresponding as-built wiring diagram. Labeling is not required for interconnections within an enclosure or assembly. 5. Submit a labeling plan to the owner prior to label installation.

J. Supervisory Alarms 1. Provide interconnection and annunciate supervisory alarms relay output. a. Access Control Panel Tamper b. Power Supply Supervisory Alarms

3.02 TRAINING

I. Provide 1 training session of 1 hour duration. 1. Training shall include: a. Operator Training – Use of the controls b. Building Engineer Training – Review installation, As-Built’s, and Maintenance.

3.03 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. System Testing 1. Testing shall be a coordinated effort between the Access Control System Integrator, and the Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor. Each contractor shall provide technicians to fully test each door. a. Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor – Provide a technician at the door b. Access Control System Integrator – Provide a technician at the head end and provide either a laptop or connection to a workstation to facilitate testing.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281003-5 Access Control System Integration Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

B. Each door shall be tested in sequential order and a corresponding written test report shall be submitted to the engineer. Test each door and each of the following conditions in this order: 1. System Testing - Each door shall be tested in sequential order and a corresponding written test report shall be submitted to the engineer. Test each door and each of the following conditions in this order: a. Normal Card Read with and without ADA Actuator – No Alarms b. Normal Egress with and without ADA Actuator – No Alarms, adjust RTE sensors to eliminate false alarms. c. Door Release Button – No Alarms d. Prop Door – workstation alarm, local audible e. Forced Door – workstation alarm, local audible 2. Lockdown – Verify all doors lock in the lockdown group 3. Life Safety Interface – Verify all doors open in the fail safe group. 4. Power Down – Verify all panels remain operational during power down.

C. Conduct a final acceptance test with the Owner and Engineer after system testing is complete, test reports have been submitted, and as built documentation has been submitted. 1. Upon completion of the above items and all requirements identified in the plans and specifications: a. Notify the engineer in writing and request final acceptance b. Conduct an on-site demonstration to the engineer of system performance and compliance with the plans and specifications c. Correct any items noted by the engineer during acceptance and submit a signed punch list of corrections made.

D. Issue a statement of warranty to the Owner and copy the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281003-6 Access Control System Integration Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 28 10 04 ACCESS CONTROL DEVICES AND CABLING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

A. The Drawings, the provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and the General Requirements apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Related Sections 1. Division 26 – All Sections 2. Division 27 – All Sections 3. Division 28 – All Sections

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor – The contractor performing the scope of work described in this section B. Access Control System Integrator – The contractor performing the scope of work described in 28 10 03 Access Control System Integration

1.03 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Access Control Field Devices 2. Access Control Device Cabling

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor must have the necessary trained, licensed, and bonded trade and technical persons necessary to perform the tasks required under this specification.

B. Technicians shall be licensed as Power Limited Technicians through the Minnesota State Board of Electricity and have successfully completed an accredited, industry related, electronics course.

C. Contractor shall, upon request, submit individual training and/or certification documentation for any service technician providing services under this specification.

D. Contractor must be able to demonstrate that they have had a minimum of three (3) years experience in the access control field of commercial, institutional and/or industrial facilities (non- residential) within the confines of the thirteen (13) county Minneapolis-St. Paul-Bloomington MN- WI Metropolitan Statistical Area (The MN-WI MSA consists of the counties of Hennepin, Anoka, Carver, Chisago, Dakota, Isanti, Ramsey, Scott, Sherburne, Washington and Wright in Minnesota and Pierce and St. Croix in Wisconsin).

E. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of two (2) customer references within said thirteen (13) county MSA, at least one of which shall be substantially similar in size and scope to these specifications. References may be from either the public or private sector.

F. Contractor, on a 24 hour/7 day per week basis, must be able to respond to emergency service within two (2) hours of an emergency service request.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281004-1 Access Control Devices and Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package G. Contractor must employ in-house personnel to maintain and submit electronic record documentation in the most current AutoCAD format to Hennepin County.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit per the General Requirements of the project specifications.

B. In addition: 1. Submit to the engineer all data sheets for components. The parts list and the corresponding data sheets shall be submitted in the same order in a single PDF file. Multiple PDF files will be rejected. 2. Submit all as-built drawings in Autocad Format. As-builts shall include: a. Floorplans showing symbols for all devices 3. Operator and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as electronic documents or media. Hardcopy shall only be submitted if electronic versions are not available.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, handle, deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage.

B. Provide locked storage units

C. Contractor shall not deliver, store, or install any product in construction areas where the product is subject to damage from water, dust, and construction debris.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty per the general and supplemental conditions of the contract.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

A. Card Readers – Wall Mount 1. Approved Products a. Furnished to the Owner by the Access Control System Integrator. Installation by this contractor.

B. Card Readers – Mullion Mount for resident use doors 1. Approved Products a. Furnished to the Owner by the Access Control System Integrator. Installation by this contractor.

C. Cabling 1. Refer to cable types shown on plans 2. Provide plenum rated cable unless noted otherwise 3. Provide all other cables as required for a complete and operational system. 4. Install per ANSI/TIA 568 and 569 5. Provide J Hook cable supports for all cabling. 6. Where conduit or basket tray is provided for low voltage cabling, install cabling in the conduit or partition designated for this cabling system. Refer to electrical plans.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281004-2 Access Control Devices and Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package D. Request to Exit Sensor 1. Minimum Requirements a. Ceiling Mount b. PIR Sensor c. Internal Sounder 2. Approved Manufacturer a. Kantech T-Rex b. Or approved equal

E. Door Contact – Recessed 1. Minimum Requirements a. Recess Mount b. Match Color to Frame c. DPDT Contact Arrangement 2. Approved Manufacture a. GE Sentrol 1076D b. Or approved equal

F. Door Contact – Surface 1. Minimum Requirements a. Surface Mount b. Aluminum housing with armor cable c. DPDT Contact Arrangement 2. Approved Manufacturer a. GE Sentrol 2507AD-L b. Or approved equal

G. Relay Interfaces 1. Minimum Requirements a. Where interface relays are required for interfacing between system or for controlling power door operators: 1) Discrete relay for general I/O interfaces shall be selected sized by the contractor 2. Approved Manufacturers a. Discrete Relays for power door operator interfaces b. RIB Enclosed Relays for general interfacing

H. Access Control Junction Box 1. Refer to detail drawings for box configuration. 2. Provide smart relay system and program at door locations requiring an interface to power door operators.

3. Configure junction box to include the following components as required. Provide all components and interconnections for a complete and operational system. a. NEMA 4 Enclosure with Perf Panel b. IDEC Smart Relay with memory module (Where required for power door operators, the security integrator shall provide a programmed smart relay to the security contractor and coordinate on installation) c. Wago Terminal Blocks

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281004-3 Access Control Devices and Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION

A. Refer to plans for demolition requirements B. Remove equipment as shown in a non-destructive manner and offer to the owner C. If refused by the owner, dispose of equipment in a legal manner. D. Remove all cabling associated with demolished field devices and head end equipment

3.02 PHASING REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to the architectural phasing plans. Provide all scope of work per the phasing plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Card Readers 1. Coordinate final reader location with owner prior to electrical rough in. 2. Where card readers are placed back to back on, coordinate a vertical or horizontal offset of at least 12” to prevent cross reads. 3. Provide cabling and terminate the card reader as shown on plans 4. Provide device cabling to the Access Control Panel identified by the Access Control System Integrator. 5. Provide a minimum 10 foot service loop from where the cable enters the Access Control Panel. 6. Label the cabling to indicate the device type and door number 7. Coordinate testing of the card reader operation with the Access Control System Integrator such that the reader is tested at the time of installation.

C. Connections to ADA Actuators, Power Door Operators, Lock Power Supplies, Locks, Hinges, and Transfers. 1. Contractor shall provide low voltage wiring and termination to all devices. Refer to division 087100. Contractor shall coordinate with lock installer such that the lock is wired and installed with both contractors on site to test and troubleshoot. Include wiring between transfers, hinges and locks. Include wiring between ADA actuators, relay interfaces, power door operator, and access control system.

D. Door Contacts 1. Provide supervised inputs with end of line resistors at the contact. Do not place end of line resistors at the panel location. 2. Door contacts in contiguous banks of doors shall be wired as a group where indicated to reduce input requirements. Card reader door contacts shall not be included in any grouping of door contacts. 3. Anchor armored cabling from surface door contacts every 3” and at connection to the electrical box. Eliminate any loops in the cabling to prevent grabbing of the cable.

E. Request To Exit Sensors 1. Locate and adjust the sensor to detect person(s) as they contact the exiting door hardware. 2. Adjust as required to minimize false alarms 3. Adjust timers per recommendations from the Access Control System manufacturer. 4. Wire the internal sounder to annunciate propped and forced doors.

F. Integration with Power Door Operators 1. The security integrator shall review the electronic locking hardware and provide a programmed smart relay to meet the following requirements:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281004-4 Access Control Devices and Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Disable the exterior actuator when the door is locked b. Generate a request to exit signal to the access control system when the interior actuator is pressed to prevent false alarms when exiting. c. Delay door operator opening until electronic latch is released to prevent binding. d. Normal operation will require a valid card read prior followed by pressing the exterior actuator. e. Where specifically programmed per card holder, presenting a valid card shall unlock the door and activate the power door operator.

G. General Interface Relays 1. All relays shall be enclosed and labeled 2. Include wiring diagram in as built drawings 3. Relays shall be mechanically fastened to the enclosure. Adhesive mount is not allowed.

H. Labeling 1. All labels shall be machine printed white background black letter labels with permanent ink and permanent adhesive. 2. Handwritten labels are not acceptable at any locations. 3. All equipment, cabinets, and junction boxes shall be labeled to match the designators shown on a corresponding as-built riser wiring diagram. 4. Each cable shall be labeled at all terminations points to match a corresponding as-built wiring diagram. Labeling is not required for interconnections within an enclosure or assembly. 5. Submit a labeling plan to the owner prior to label installation.

3.03 TRAINING

A. No training required

3.04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Provide testing and close out per each phase as shown in the architectural phasing plan

B. System Testing 1. Testing shall be a coordinated effort between the Access Control System Integrator, and the Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor. Each contractor shall provide technicians to fully test each door. a. Access Control Device and Cabling Contractor – Provide a technician at the door b. Access Control System Integrator – Provide a technician at the head end and provide either a laptop or connection to a workstation to facilitate testing.

C. Each door shall be tested in sequential order and a corresponding written test report shall be submitted to the engineer. Test each door and each of the following conditions in this order: 1. System Testing - Each door shall be tested in sequential order and a corresponding written test report shall be submitted to the engineer. Test each door and each of the following conditions in this order: a. Normal Card Read with and without ADA Actuator – No Alarms b. Normal Egress with and without ADA Actuator – No Alarms, adjust RTE sensors to eliminate false alarms. c. Door Release Button – No Alarms d. Prop Door – workstation alarm, local audible e. Forced Door – workstation alarm, local audible

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281004-5 Access Control Devices and Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package A. Conduct a final acceptance test with the Owner and Engineer after system testing is complete, test reports have been submitted, and as built documentation has been submitted. 1. Upon completion of the above items and all requirements identified in the plans and specifications: a. Notify the engineer in writing and request final acceptance b. Conduct an on-site demonstration to the engineer of system performance and compliance with the plans and specifications c. Correct any items noted by the engineer during acceptance and submit a signed punch list of corrections made.

B. Issue a statement of warranty to the Owner and copy the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 281004-6 Access Control Devices and Cabling Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SECTION 28 21 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE – CAMERAS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The Drawings, the provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and the General Requirements apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Related Sections 1. Division 26 – All Sections 2. Division 27 – All Sections 3. Division 28 – All Sections

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Video Surveillance Camera Contractor (VSCC) – The contractor performing the scope of work described in this section

B. Video Management System Integrator (VMSI) –The contractor performing the work described in 28 23 00 Video Surveillance – Video Management System

1.03 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Surveillance Cameras 2. Camera Encoders 3. IP Extension Systems 4. Encoders 5. Decoders

B. The VSCC shall meet the following requirements 1. Background Checks a. All on site staff must successfully complete a Hennepin County Background Check and receive a Hennepin County contractor badge. 2. Project Experience a. 5 years’ experience in installation of IP Camera Systems b. 5 projects exceeding 100 cameras each within the last 5 years 3. Minimum Staff Qualifications a. Must have the necessary trained, licensed, and bonded trade and technical persons necessary to perform the tasks required under this specification. b. Licensed as Power Limited Technicians through the Minnesota State Board of Electricity and have successfully completed an accredited, industry related, electronics course. c. Four (4) persons on staff that have completed the Axis Certification Program d. Two (2) persons assigned to the project that have completed the Axis Certification Program and are directly responsible for: 1. Camera Configuration 2. On Site Camera Installation

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-1 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 3. As Built Documentation e. In-house personnel to maintain and submit electronic record documentation in the most current AutoCAD and Microsoft Excel format. 4. Service Requirements a. Five (5) existing IP camera service accounts b. On a 24 hour/7 day per week basis, must be able to respond to emergency service within two (2) hours of an emergency service request. c. Two (2) service technicians assigned to the project that have completed the Axis Certification Program and are directly responsible for camera service calls. 5. Location a. All project experience, project history, service, and staffing requirements must be provided within the confines of the thirteen (13) county Minneapolis-St. Paul-Bloomington MN-WI Metropolitan Statistical Area (The MN-WI MSA consists of the counties of Hennepin, Anoka, Carver, Chisago, Dakota, Isanti, Ramsey, Scott, Sherburne, Washington and Wright in Minnesota and Pierce and St. Croix in Wisconsin). 6. References and Qualification Submittal a. Project references and qualification submittals shall be provided upon request

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit per the General Requirements of the project specifications.

B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit to the engineer all data sheets for components. The parts list and the corresponding data sheets shall be submitted in the same order in a single PDF file. Multiple PDF files will be rejected.

C. Project Coordination Documents 1. VSCC Excel Spreadsheet a. Provide a VSCC Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet listing the cameras in sequential order as shown on floorplans. b. The VSCC spreadsheet shall identify: 1. Install Date 2. Device Number 3. Floor 4. Model 5. Mount 6. Firmware 7. Serial Number 8. MAC Address 9. Patch Panel Termination 10. IP Extension Termination 11. Fiber Port Termination 12. Transient Protection Device 13. IP Address

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-2 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package c. Sample VSCC Spreadsheet HENNEPIN COUNTY - Sample VSCC Camera Spreadsheet Location: XXXXXX Revision Date: 1/1/2019 VSCC Data Installation PLAN LEVEL/ SERIAL PATCH Extension Transient CAMERA MODEL Mount FIRMWARE MAC ADDRESS Fiber Port IP ADDRESS Date NUMBER FLOOR NUMBER PANEL Port Protection 1/1/2019 C-1-1 1 Axis P3225-LV Wall 7.9 1234 00:04:7D:32:4A:40 NVT-01-01-01 MRJ-POES 192.168.0.90 1/1/2019 C-1-2 1 Axis P3225-LV Wall 7.9 1235 00:04:7D:32:4B:4D NVT-01-01-02 192.168.0.91 1/1/2019 C-1-3 1 Axis P3225-LV Ceiling 7.9 1236 00:04:7D:0A:CC:B9 D-128 192.168.0.92 1/1/2019 C-1-4 1 Axis P3225-LV Ceiling 7.9 1237 00:04:7D:0A:88:0B D-129 192.168.0.93 1/1/2019 C-2-1 2 Axis P3225-LV Ceiling 7.9 1238 00:04:7D:0A:CC:B6 D-130 192.168.0.94 1/1/2019 C-2-2 2 Axis P3225-LV Ceiling 7.9 1239 00:04:7D:0A:88:42 D-131 192.168.0.95 1/1/2019 C-2-3 2 Axis P3225-LV Ceiling 7.9 1240 00:04:7D:22:FE:6D D-135 192.168.0.96

D. Project Close Out Documentation 1. Final VSCC Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet 2. Final image file from each camera 3. As Built Floorplans in Autocad format showing: a. VSCC Image on a Detail Sheet. b. Camera Locations c. Extension, Fiber, and Transient Devices 4. Warranty Letter 5. All close out documentation required by the general and supplemental conditions of the contract

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Package, handle, deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage.

B. Provide locked storage units

C. Contractor shall not deliver, store, or install any product in construction areas where the product is subject to damage from water, dust, and construction debris.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty per the general and supplemental conditions of the contract.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-3 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Unless noted as “Or Approved Equal” the approved products are standard products in use throughout Hennepin County facilities. No substitutions are allowed. If a listed product cannot be provided, notify the engineer in writing prior to the final addendum date and an alternative product will be identified.

B. Where noted as “Or Approved Equal” submit requests per the general terms and conditions of the contract.

C. Approved equals must meet or exceed all manufacturer’s specifications for the listed product. Any exceptions must be approved by the design engineer.

D. Approved equals will only be considered when submitted by a qualified VSCC. Requests from product manufacturers or their representatives will not be considered.

2.02 CAMERA TYPES

A. This specification lists all Hennepin County approved cameras types. Refer to the camera schedules and detail plans to determine which cameras are applicable to this project.

B. Summary of Camera Types 1. Camera Type 1 – Fixed View Dome, Indoor, 1080P. Axis P3225-LV 2. Camera Type 2 – Fixed View Dome, Outdoor, 1080P. Axis P3225-LVE 3. Camera Type 3 – Fixed View Dome, Indoor, Advanced, 1080P. Axis Q3515 -LV 9mm 4. Camera Type 4 – Fixed View Dome, Outdoor, Advanced, 1080P. Axis Q3515-LVE 9mm 5. Camera Type 5 – Fixed View Dome, Indoor, 5MP. Axis Q3517-LV 6. Camera Type 6 – Fixed View Dome, Outdoor, 5MP. Axis Q3517-LVE 7. Camera Type 7 – Multi Imager Dome, 180 Deg, Outdoor, 3x4K. Axis Q3709-PVE 8. Camera Type 8 – Multi Imager Dome, 360 Deg, Outdoor, 4x1080P, Axis Q6000-E Mk II 9. Camera Type 9 - PTZ Dome, Indoor,1080P, 32x Zoom. Axis Q6055 10. Camera Type 10 – PTZ Dome, Outdoor,1080P, 32x Zoom. Axis Q6055-E 11. Camera Type 11 – PTZ Dome, Outdoor, 1080P, 30X Zoom, Advanced Axis Q6155-E 12. Camera Type 12 – Multi Imager Dome, 360 Deg, Outdoor, 4x1080P, Advanced Axis P3717-PLE 13. Camera Type 13 – Fixed View Bullet, Thermal, Outdoor, 640x480. Axis Q1942-E

2.03 APPROVED CAMERAS

A. Camera Type 1 – Fixed View Dome, Indoor, 1080P 1. Approved Products a. Axis P3225-LV 2. Minimum Requirements a. Overview 1. Resolution:1080P 2. Zipstream: Yes 3. Lens: Motorized Varifocal 3-10.5MM

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-4 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 4. WDR – Forensic Capture 5. Axis’ Lightfinder technology 6. Optimized IR illumination b. Image sensor 1. Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/3” c. Lens 1. Varifocal, 3.0–10.5 mm, F1.4 2. Horizontal field of view: 92°–34° 3. Vertical field of view: 50°–20° 4. Remote focus and zoom, P-Iris control, IR corrected d. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter e. Minimum illumination 1. HDTV 1080p 25/30 fps with WDR - forensic capture: 2. Color: 0.16 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4 3. B/W: 0.03 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4, 0 lux with IR illumination on 4. HDTV 1080p 50/60 fps: 5. Color: 0.32 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4 6. B/W: 0.06 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4, 0 lux with IR illumination on f. Shutter time 1. 1/66500 s to 1 s g. Camera angle adjustment 1. Pan ±180°, tilt -35 to +75°, rotation ±95° h. Video compression 1. H.264 Baseline, Main and High Profile (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) 2. Motion JPEG i. Resolution 1. 1920x1080 to 160x90 j. Frame rate 1. With WDR: 25/30 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz 2. Without WDR: 50/60 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz k. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 3. VBR/MBR H.264 l. Multi-view streaming 1. 2 individually cropped out view areas m. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Digital PTZ, preset positions n. Image settings 1. Compression, Color, Brightness, Sharpness, Contrast, Local contrast, White balance, Exposure control (including automatic gain control), Exposure zones, Fine tuning of behavior at different light levels, WDR - forensic capture: Up to 120 dB depending on scene, Text and image overlay, Mirroring of images, Privacy masks 2. Rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, including corridor format o. Analytics

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-5 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. Included a. Video motion detection, active tampering alarm 2. Supported a. Motion guard, fence guard, loitering guard, perimeter defender b. Digital autotracking, people counter, tailgating detector, direction detector, occupancy estimator, random inspection, queue monitor c. Support for installation of third-party applications. p. Event triggers 1. Analytics, edge storage events, virtual inputs through API q. Casing 1. IP52-rated, IK08 impact-resistant, polycarbonate casing with hard-coated dome and dehumidifying membrane 2. Encapsulated electronics and captive screws 3. Color: white NCS S 1002-B r. Mounting 1. Mounting bracket with holes for junction boxes (double-gang, single-gang, and 4” octagon) and for wall or ceiling mount 2. ¼”-20 UNC tripod screw thread s. Power 1. Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 Class 3, 2. max 10.2 W, typical 6.1 W t. Connectors 1. Shielded RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE u. IR illumination 1. Power efficient built-in IR LED 850 nm with automatic adapting angle of illumination and intensity 2. Range of reach 30 m (100 ft) or more depending on scene v. Operating conditions 1. 0 °C to 50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F) 2. Humidity 10 to 85% RH (non-condensing) w. Dimensions 1. Height: 101 mm (4 in) 2. ø 149 mm (5 7/8 in) x. Weight 1. 550 g (1.2 lb)

B. Camera Type 2 – Fixed View Dome, Outdoor, 1080P 1. Approved Products a. Axis P3225-LVE 2. Minimum Requirements a. Overview 1. Resolution:1080P 2. Zipstream: Yes 3. Lens: Motorized Varifocal 3-10.5MM 4. WDR – Forensic Capture 5. Axis’ Lightfinder technology 6. Optimized IR illumination

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-6 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package b. Image sensor 1. Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/3” c. Lens 1. Varifocal, 3.0–10.5 mm, F1.4 2. Horizontal field of view: 92°–34° 3. Vertical field of view: 50°–20° 4. Remote focus and zoom, P-Iris control, IR corrected d. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter e. Minimum illumination 1. HDTV 1080p 25/30 fps with WDR - forensic capture: 2. Color: 0.16 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4 3. B/W: 0.03 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4, 0 lux with IR illumination on 4. HDTV 1080p 50/60 fps: 5. Color: 0.32 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4 6. B/W: 0.06 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4, 0 lux with IR illumination on f. Shutter time 1. 1/66500 s to 1 s g. Camera angle adjustment 1. Pan ±180°, tilt -35 to +75°, rotation ±95° h. Video compression 1. H.264 Baseline, Main and High Profile (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) 2. Motion JPEG i. Resolution 1. 1920x1080 to 160x90 j. Frame rate 1. With WDR: 25/30 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz 2. Without WDR: 50/60 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz k. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 3. VBR/MBR H.264 l. Multi-view streaming 1. 2 individually cropped out view areas m. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Digital PTZ, preset positions n. Image settings 1. Compression, Color, Brightness, Sharpness, Contrast, Local contrast, White balance, Exposure control (including automatic gain control), Exposure zones, Fine tuning of behavior at different light levels, WDR - forensic capture: Up to 120 dB depending on scene, Text and image overlay, Mirroring of images, Privacy masks 2. Rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, including corridor format o. Analytics 1. Included a. Video motion detection, active tampering alarm 2. Supported

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-7 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Motion guard, fence guard, loitering guard, perimeter defender b. Digital autotracking, people counter, tailgating detector, direction detector, occupancy estimator, random inspection, queue monitor c. Support for installation of third-party applications. p. Event triggers 1. Analytics, edge storage events, virtual inputs through API q. Casing 1. IP66- and NEMA 4X-rated, IK10 impact-resistant casing with hard-coated dome and dehumidifying membrane 2. Encapsulated electronics and captive screws 3. Color: white NCS S 1002-B r. Mounting 1. Mounting bracket with holes for junction boxes (double-gang, single-gang, and 4” octagon) and for wall or ceiling mount 2. ¼”-20 UNC tripod screw thread s. Power 1. Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 Class 3, 2. max 10.2 W, typical 6.1 W t. Connectors 1. Shielded RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE u. IR illumination 1. Power efficient built-in IR LED 850 nm with automatic adapting angle of illumination and intensity 2. Range of reach 30 m (100 ft) or more depending on scene v. Operating conditions 1. -40 °C to 50 °C (-40 °F to 122 °F) 2. Start-up: -30 °C to 50 °C (-22 °F to 122 °F) 3. Maximum temperature (intermittent): 55 °C (131 °F) 4. Humidity 10 to 100% RH (condensing) w. Dimensions 1. Height: 101 mm (4 in) 2. ø 149 mm (5 7/8 in) x. Weight 1. 550 g (1.2 lb)

C. Camera Type 3 - Fixed View Dome, Indoor, Advanced, 1080P 1. Approved Products a. Camera Type Axis Q3515-LV 2. Minimum Requirements a. Overview 1. HDTV 1080p video at up to 120 fps 2. Forensic WDR, Lightfinder and Optimized IR 3. Axis Zipstream technology 4. EIS, IK10 vandal resistance, IP52 water and dust protection b. Image sensor 1. Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/2.8” c. Lens

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-8 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. Varifocal, remote focus and zoom, P-Iris control, IR corrected 2. 9 mm: 3–9 mm, F1.3 a. Horizontal field of view: 105°–36° b. Vertical field of view: 57°–21° 3. 22 mm: 9–22 mm, F1.6 a. Horizontal field of view: 36°–15° b. Vertical field of view: 19°–9° d. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter e. Minimum illumination 1. 9 mm: HDTV 1080p 25/30 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.07 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3; B/W: 0.01 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3 2. HDTV 1080p 50/60 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.14 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3; B/W: 0.03 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3 3. HDTV 1080p 100/120 fps: a. Color: 0.28 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3; B/W: 0.06 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3 4. 22 mm: HDTV 1080p 25/30 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.11 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6; B/W: 0.02 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 5. HDTV 1080p 50/60 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.22 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6; B/W: 0.04 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 6. HDTV 1080p 100/120 fps: a. Color: 0.44 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6; B/W: 0.08 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 f. Shutter time 1. 1/66500 to 2 s g. Camera angle adjustment 1. Pan: 360° 2. Tilt: ±80° 3. Rotation: ±175° h. Video compression 1. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles 2. Motion JPEG i. Resolution 1. 1920x1080 to 160x90 j. Frame rate 1. HDTV 1080p (1920x1080) with WDR: Up to 50/60 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz 2. HDTV 1080p (1920x1080) without WDR: Up to 100/120 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz k. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 3. VBR/MBR H.264 l. Multi-view streaming 1. 8 individually cropped-out view areas m. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Digital PTZ, Optical zoom, Preset positions 2. 9 mm: 3x Optical zoom, 2x Digital zoom

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-9 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 3. 22 mm: 2.4x Optical zoom, 2x Digital zoom n. Image settings 1. Scene profiles, compression, color, brightness, sharpness, contrast, local contrast, white balance, day/night threshold, exposure control (including automatic gain control), defogging, exposure zones, fine tuning of behavior at different light levels, forensic WDR: Up to 120 dB depending on scene, electronic image stabilization, barrel distortion correction, dynamic text and image overlay, privacy masks, mirroring of images, straighten image, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, auto, including corridor format o. Audio streaming 1. Full-duplex p. Audio compression 1. 24–bit LPCM 48 kHz, AAC LC 8/16/32/48 kHz, G.711 PCM 8 kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8kHz, Opus 8/16/48 kHz 2. Configurable bitrate q. Audio input/output 1. Input for external microphone or line-level device 2. Line output r. Analytics 1. Included a. video motion detection, motion guard, fence guard, loitering guard, active tampering alarm, audio detection 2. Supported a. perimeter defender, digital autotracking b. Support for installation of third-party applications. s. Event triggers 1. Analytics, supervised external inputs, virtual inputs through API, edge storage events, shock detection t. Casing 1. IP52-rated, IK10 impact-resistant casing with polycarbonate hard-coated dome, aluminum base and dehumidifying membrane 2. Encapsulated electronics, captive screws 3. Color: White NCS S 1002-B u. Mounting 1. Mounting bracket with holes for junction boxes (double-gang, single-gang, 4” square, and 4” octagon) and for ceiling and wall mounting 2. ½” (M20) conduit side entry v. Power 1. Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 2. Class 3, typical 5.6 W, max 12.5 W 3. 8–28 V DC, typical 6.3 W, max 13.6 W 4. Power redundancy w. Connectors 1. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE, terminal block for two configurable supervised inputs / digital outputs (12 V DC output, max load 50 mA), 3.5 mm mic/line in, 3.5 mm line out, terminal block for DC input x. IR illumination 1. Power efficient built-in IR LED 850 nm with automatic adapting angle of illumination and intensity.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-10 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 2. 9 mm: Range of reach 40 m (130 ft) or more depending on the scene 3. 22 mm: Range of reach 60 m (200 ft) or more depending on the scene y. Operating conditions 1. -10 °C to 50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F) 2. Humidity 10–85% RH (non-condensing) z. Dimensions 1. Height: 124 mm 2. ø 162 mm aa. Weight 1. 1.4 kg (3.1 Ib)

D. Camera Type 4 - Fixed View Dome, Outdoor, Advanced, 1080P 1. Approved Products a. Camera Type Axis Q3515-LVE 2. Minimum Requirements a. Overview 1. HDTV 1080p video at up to 120 fps 2. Forensic WDR, Lightfinder and OptimizedIR 3. Axis Zipstream technology 4. EIS and vandal resistance with IK10+, IP66, IP67 Rating b. Image sensor 1. Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/2.8” c. Lens 1. Varifocal, remote focus and zoom, P-Iris control, IR corrected 2. 9 mm: 3–9 mm, F1.3 a. Horizontal field of view: 105°–36° b. Vertical field of view: 57°–21° 3. 22 mm: 9–22 mm, F1.6 a. Horizontal field of view: 36°–15° b. Vertical field of view: 19°–9° d. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter e. Minimum illumination 1. 9 mm: HDTV 1080p 25/30 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.07 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3; B/W: 0.01 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3 2. HDTV 1080p 50/60 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.14 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3; B/W: 0.03 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3 3. HDTV 1080p 100/120 fps: a. Color: 0.28 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3; B/W: 0.06 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3 4. 22 mm: HDTV 1080p 25/30 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.11 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6; B/W: 0.02 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 5. HDTV 1080p 50/60 fps with forensic WDR: a. Color: 0.22 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6; B/W: 0.04 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 6. HDTV 1080p 100/120 fps: a. Color: 0.44 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6; B/W: 0.08 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 f. Shutter time

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-11 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. 1/66500 to 2 s g. Camera angle adjustment 1. Pan: 360° 2. Tilt: ±80° 3. Rotation: ±175° h. Video compression 1. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles 2. Motion JPEG i. Resolution 1. 1920x1080 to 160x90 j. Frame rate 1. HDTV 1080p (1920x1080) with WDR: Up to 50/60 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz 2. HDTV 1080p (1920x1080) without WDR: Up to 100/120 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz k. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 3. VBR/MBR H.264 l. Multi-view streaming 1. 8 individually cropped-out view areas m. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Digital PTZ, Optical zoom, Preset positions 2. 9 mm: 3x Optical zoom, 2x Digital zoom 3. 22 mm: 2.4x Optical zoom, 2x Digital zoom n. Image settings 1. Scene profiles, compression, color, brightness, sharpness, contrast, local contrast, white balance, day/night threshold, exposure control (including automatic gain control), defogging, exposure zones, fine tuning of behavior at different light levels, forensic WDR: Up to 120 dB depending on scene, electronic image stabilization, barrel distortion correction, dynamic text and image overlay, privacy masks, mirroring of images, straighten image, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, auto, including corridor format o. Audio streaming 1. Full-duplex p. Audio compression 1. 24–bit LPCM 48 kHz, AAC LC 8/16/32/48 kHz, G.711 PCM 8 kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8kHz, Opus 8/16/48 kHz 2. Configurable bitrate q. Audio input/output 1. Input for external microphone or line-level device 2. Line output r. Analytics 1. Included a. video motion detection, motion guard, fence guard, loitering guard, active tampering alarm, audio detection 2. Supported a. perimeter defender, digital autotracking b. Support for installation of third-party applications.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-12 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package s. Event triggers 1. Analytics, supervised external inputs, virtual inputs through API, edge storage events, shock detection t. Data streaming 1. Event data u. Built-in installation aids 1. Remote zoom, remote focus, pixel counter, leveling assistant, autorotation, straighten image, traffic wizard v. Casing 1. IP66-, IP67-, IP6K9K- and NEMA 4X-rated, IK10+ (50 joules) impact-resistant casing with polycarbonate hard-coated dome, aluminum base and dehumidifying membrane 2. Encapsulated electronics, captive screws 3. Color: White NCS S 1002-B w. Mounting 1. Mounting bracket with holes for junction boxes (double-gang, single-gang, 4” square, and 4” octagon) and for ceiling and wall mounting 2. ¾” (M25) conduit side entry x. Memory 1. 1 GB RAM, 512 MB Flash y. Power 1. Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 2. Class 3, typical 5.6 W, max 12.5 W 3. 8–28 V DC, typical 6.3 W, max 13.6 W 4. Power redundancy z. Connectors 1. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE, terminal block for two configurable supervised inputs / digital outputs (12 V DC output, max load 50 mA), 3.5 mm mic/line in, 3.5 mm line out, terminal block for DC input aa. IR illumination 1. Power efficient built-in IR LED 850 nm with automatic adapting angle of illumination and intensity. 2. 9 mm: Range of reach 40 m (130 ft) or more depending on the scene 3. 22 mm: Range of reach 60 m (200 ft) or more depending on the scene bb. Storage 1. Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card 2. Support for SD card encryption 3. Support for recording to network-attached storage (NAS) cc. Operating conditions 1. -50 °C to 60 °C (-58 °F to 140 °F) 2. Start-up: -40 °C to 60 °C (-40 °F to 140 °F) 3. Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing) dd. Dimensions 1. Height: 182 mm including weathershield 2. ø 183 mm ee. Weight 1. 2.0 kg (4.4 lb) including weathershield

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-13 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package E. Camera Type 5 – Fixed View Dome, Indoor, 5MP 1. Approved Products a. Axis Q3517-LV 9mm b. Minimum Requirements 1. Overview a. Resolution:5MP b. Zipstream: Yes c. Lens: Motorized Varifocal 4.3-8.6mm d. WDR – Forensic Capture e. Axis’ Lightfinder technology f. Optimized IR illumination 2. Image sensor a. Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/1.8” 3. Lens a. Varifocal, 4.3-8.6 mm, F1.5 b. Horizontal field of view: 96° – 50° c. Vertical field of view: 53° – 29° d. Remote focus and zoom, P-Iris control, IR-corrected 4. Day and night a. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter 5. Minimum illumination a. 5MP 25/30 fps with WDR: Color: 0.12 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5; B/W: 0.02 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5, 0 lux with IR illumination on b. 4MP 50/60 fps: Color: 0.24 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5, B/W; 0.04 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5, 0 lux with IR illumination on c. Shutter time d. 1/71 500 s to 2 s 6. Camera angle adjustment a. Pan: 360° b. Tilt: ±80° c. Rotation: ±175° 7. Video compression a. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles b. Motion JPEG 8. Resolution a. 3072x1728 to 160x120 b. Frame rate c. 5MP with WDR: 25/30 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz d. 4MP without WDR: 50/60 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz 9. Video streaming a. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG b. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth c. VBR/MBR H.264 10. Multi-view streaming a. 8 individually cropped-out view areas 11. Pan/Tilt/Zoom

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-14 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Digital PTZ, Optical zoom, Preset positions 12. Image settings a. Scene profiles, compression, color, brightness, sharpness, contrast, local contrast, white balance, day/night threshold, exposure control (including automatic gain control), defogging, exposure zones, fine tuning of behavior at different light levels, forensic WDR: Up to 120 dB depending on scene, electronic image stabilization, barrel distortion correction, dynamic text and image overlay, privacy masks, mirroring of images, straighten image, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, auto, including corridor format 13. Audio streaming a. Full-duplex 14. Audio compression a. 24–bit LPCM 48 kHz, AAC LC 8/16/32/48 kHz, G.711 PCM 8 kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8kHz, Opus 8/16/48 kHz b. Configurable bitrate 15. Audio input/output a. Input for external microphone or line-level device b. Line output 16. Analytics a. Included 1. video motion detection, motion guard, fence guard, loitering guard, active tampering alarm, audio detection b. Supported 1. perimeter defender, digital autotracking 2. Support for installation of third-party applications. 17. Event triggers a. Analytics, supervised external inputs, virtual inputs through API, edge storage events, shock detection 18. Casing a. IP52-rated, IK10 impact-resistant casing with polycarbonate hard-coated dome, aluminum base and dehumidifying membrane b. Encapsulated electronics, captive screws c. Color: White NCS S 1002-B 19. Mounting a. Mounting bracket with holes for junction boxes (double-gang, single-gang, 4” square, and 4” octagon) and for ceiling and wall mounting b. ½” (M20) conduit side entry 20. Sustainability a. PVC-free 21. Power a. Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 b. Class 3, typical 6.5 W, max 12.9 W c. 8–28 V DC, typical 6.9 W, max 14.5 W d. Power redundancy 22. Connectors a. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE, terminal block for two configurable supervised inputs / digital outputs (12 V DC output, max load 50 mA), 3.5 mm mic/line in, 3.5 mm line out, terminal block for DC input 23. IR illumination

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-15 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Power efficient built-in IR LED 850 nm with automatic adapting angle of illumination and intensity. b. Range 40 m (130 ft) or more, depending on the scene 24. Operating conditions a. -10 °C to 50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F) b. Humidity 10–85% RH (non-condensing) 25. Dimensions a. Height: 124 mm b. ø 162 mm 26. Weight a. 1.4 kg (3.1 Ib)

F. Camera Type 6 – Fixed View Dome, Outdoor, 5MP 1. Approved Products a. Axis Q3517-LVE 9mm b. Minimum Requirements 1. Overview a. Resolution:5MP b. Zipstream: Yes c. Lens: Motorized Varifocal 4.3-8.6mm d. WDR – Forensic Capture e. Axis’ Lightfinder technology f. Optimized IR illumination 2. Image sensor a. Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/1.8” 3. Lens a. Varifocal, 4.3-8.6 mm, F1.5 b. Horizontal field of view: 96° – 50° c. Vertical field of view: 53° – 29° d. Remote focus and zoom, P-Iris control, IR-corrected 4. Day and night a. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter 5. Minimum illumination a. 5MP 25/30 fps with WDR: Color: 0.12 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5; B/W: 0.02 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5, 0 lux with IR illumination on b. 4MP 50/60 fps: Color: 0.24 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5, B/W; 0.04 lux at 50 IRE, F1.5, 0 lux with IR illumination on c. Shutter time d. 1/71 500 s to 2 s 6. Camera angle adjustment a. Pan: 360° b. Tilt: ±80° c. Rotation: ±175° 7. Video compression a. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles b. Motion JPEG 8. Resolution

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-16 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. 3072x1728 to 160x120 b. Frame rate c. 5MP with WDR: 25/30 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz d. 4MP without WDR: 50/60 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz 9. Video streaming a. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG b. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth c. VBR/MBR H.264 10. Multi-view streaming a. 8 individually cropped-out view areas 11. Pan/Tilt/Zoom a. Digital PTZ, Optical zoom, Preset positions 12. Image settings a. Scene profiles, compression, color, brightness, sharpness, contrast, local contrast, white balance, day/night threshold, exposure control (including automatic gain control), defogging, exposure zones, fine tuning of behavior at different light levels, forensic WDR: Up to 120 dB depending on scene, electronic image stabilization, barrel distortion correction, dynamic text and image overlay, privacy masks, mirroring of images, straighten image, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, auto, including corridor format 13. Audio streaming a. Full-duplex 14. Audio compression a. 24–bit LPCM 48 kHz, AAC LC 8/16/32/48 kHz, G.711 PCM 8 kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8kHz, Opus 8/16/48 kHz b. Configurable bitrate 15. Audio input/output a. Input for external microphone or line-level device b. Line output 16. Analytics a. Included 1. video motion detection, motion guard, fence guard, loitering guard, active tampering alarm, audio detection b. Supported 1. perimeter defender, digital autotracking 2. Support for installation of third-party applications. 17. Event triggers a. Analytics, supervised external inputs, virtual inputs through API, edge storage events, shock detection 18. Casing a. IP66-, IP67-, IP6K9K- and NEMA 4X-rated, IK10+ (50 joules) impact-resistant casing with polycarbonate hard-coated dome, aluminum base and dehumidifying membrane b. Encapsulated electronics, captive screws c. Color: White NCS S 1002-B 19. Mounting a. Mounting bracket with holes for junction boxes (double-gang, single-gang, 4” square, and 4” octagon) and for ceiling and wall mounting b. ¾” (M25) conduit side entry 20. Power

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-17 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 b. Class 3, typical 6.5 W, max 12.9 W c. 8–28 V DC, typical 6.9 W, max 14.5 W d. Power redundancy 21. Connectors a. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE, terminal block for two configurable supervised inputs / digital outputs (12 V DC output, max load 50 mA), 3.5 mm mic/line in, 3.5 mm line out, terminal block for DC input 22. IR illumination a. Power efficient built-in IR LED 850 nm with automatic adapting angle of illumination and intensity. b. Range 40 m (130 ft) or more, depending on the scene 23. Operating conditions a. -50 °C to 60 °C (-58 °F to 140 °F) b. Start-up: -40 °C to 60 °C (-40 °F to 140 °F) c. Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing) 24. Dimensions a. Height: 182 mm including weathershield b. ø 183 mm 25. Weight a. 2.0 kg (4.4 lb) including weathershield

G. Camera Type 7 – Multi Sensor Panoramic 180 Degree, Outdoor, 3 x 4K 1. Approved Products 1. Axis Q3709-PVE 2. Minimum Requirements a. Overview 1. 180° panoramic overview 2. Factory-focused lenses 3. Outdoor-ready b. Video 1. The camera shall provide simultaneous Motion JPEG and H.264 video streams. 2. The camera shall be designed to video streams in: a. 3 x 4K Ultra HD: Up to 25/30 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz b. 3 x 11 MP: Up to 16/20 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz c. The camera shall support H.264 Baseline, Main and High Profile. d. The H.264 implementation shall include both unicast and multicast functionality and support Constant Bit Rate (CBR) as well as Variable Bit Rate (VBR). c. Sensors & optics 1. The camera shall provide a 180° panoramic overview provided by three sensors. 2. The camera shall be equipped with factory-focused lenses in order to eliminate the need for manual focusing. 3. The camera shall be equipped with an IR-sensitive progressive scan sensor. 4. The camera shall contain a removable IR-cut filter providing Day/Night functionality. 5. The camera shall provide images down to 2 lux in color and 0.4 lux in B/W. d. Power 1. Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-18 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package e. Mechanical 1. IEC/EN 60529 IP66 (Ingress protection) 2. NEMA 250 Type 4X 3. IEC/EN 62262 IK10 f. Environmental 1. The camera shall operate in a temperature range of -40°C to +55°C (-40°F to +131°F). 2. The camera shall operate in a humidity range of 10-100% RH (condensing). g. Image Control 1. The unit shall incorporate Automatic and Manual White Balance. 2. The camera shall be equipped with an electronic shutter. 3. The camera shall incorporate Wide Dynamic Range – dynamic contrast. 4. The camera shall support a configurable maximum shutter in the range from 1/23250 s to 2/5 s. 5. The camera shall provide backlight compensation. 6. The camera shall incorporate a function for optimization of low light behavior. h. Connectors 1. The camera shall be equipped with a RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE Ethernet port. i. Pan Tilt functionality 1. The camera shall provide +/- 180° Pan 2. The camera shall provide 18°–75° Tilt 3. The camera shall provide Digital PTZ functionality 4. The camera shall incorporate guard tour functionality. 5. The camera shall provide preset positions functionality. j. Network functionality 1. The camera shall support both static IP addresses and addresses from a DHCP-server. 2. The camera shall support both IPv4 and IPv6. 3. The camera shall incorporate support for Quality of Service (QoS) 4. The camera shall incorporate support for Bonjour. 5. To secure access to the unit as well as provided content, the unit shall support HTTPS, SSL/TLS and IEEE802.1X authentication. 6. The camera shall provide centralized certificate management, with both pre-installed CA certificates and the ability to upload additional CA certificates. The certificates shall be signed by an organization providing digital trust services. 7. The camera shall support IP address filtering and include at least three different levels of password security. 8. The camera shall support time synchronization via NTP server. k. API & applications 1. The unit shall contain a built-in web server making video, audio and configuration available in a standard browser environment using HTTP. 2. The camera shall be fully supported by open and published API (Application Programmers Interface) providing necessary information for integration of functionality into third party applications. 3. Cameras shall comply with relevant ONVIF profile as defined by the ONVIF Organization.

H. Camera Type 8 – Multi-Imager Dome, 360 Deg, Outdoor, 4 x 1080P 1. Approved Products a. Axis Q6000-E Mk II 2. Minimum Requirements

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-19 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Image sensor 1. 2 MP Progressive scan RGB CMOS 4 x 1/2.8” b. Lens 1. Fixed focus, Fixed iris, F2.0, Focal length: 1.37 mm 2. Horizontal field of view default mode (4:3) 113° 3. Horizontal field of view (16:9) 152° 4. Vertical field of view (4:3 and 16:9) 85° c. Light sensitivity 1. Color: 0.3 lux, F2.0 d. Shutter time 1. 1/45500 s to 4 s e. Camera angle adjustment 1. Pan: 4 x 90° 2. Tilt: –10° to –75° f. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Remote Gatekeeper, One-click PTZ control g. Video compression 1. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High profiles 2. Motion JPEG h. Resolution 1. Standard lenses: a. 4 x 1280x720 (HDTV 720p) to 320x180 b. Default: 960x720 c. Quad view: 1920x1440 (4:3) to 320x180 2. Optional lenses: a. 4 x 1920x1080 (HDTV 1080p) to 480x270 3. Default: 960x720 i. Frame rate 1. Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) @720p 2. Up to 12.5/15 fps (50/60 Hz) @1080p j. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 3. MBR H.264 k. Image settings 1. Resolution, compression, color level, brightness, sharpness, contrast, white balance, exposure value, exposure control, automatic backlight compensation, exposure zones, shutter & gain fine tuning of behavior at normal and low light, privacy masks (maximum 4 per channel) l. Analytics 1. Video motion detection, Active tampering alarm, Edge storage events, Shock detection 2. Support for installation of third-party applications. m. Event triggers 1. Detectors: Live Stream Accessed, Shock detection, Tampering Hardware: Fan, Network, Temperature Input signal: Manual Trigger, Virtual Input Storage: Disruption, Recording

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-20 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package System: System Ready Time n. Event actions 1. File upload via FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, Network share and email Notification via email, HTTP, HTTPS and TCP Video recording to edge storage Pre- and post-alarm video buffering Overlay text o. Data streaming 1. Event data p. Built-in installation aids 1. Pixel counter q. Casing 1. IP66- and NEMA 4X-rated, die-casted aluminum, polycarbonate dome r. Sustainability 1. PVC free s. Memory 1. 1 GB RAM, 256 MB Flash t. Power 1. AXIS Q6000–E Mk II with Solo kit: a. Power consumption: typical 8 W, max 18 W b. Axis Midspan 30 W 1-port: 100-240 V AC, max. 30 W 2. AXIS Q6000–E Mk II with AXIS Q60–E/Q61–E PTZ Network Cameras: a. High PoE midspan 1–port 100–240 V AC, max 60 W recommended (included in AXIS Q60-E/Q61–E PTZ Network Cameras). u. Connectors 1. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T PoE 2. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Q60-E/Q61–E port 3. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Service port v. Storage 1. Support for SD/SDHC/SDXC card 2. SD card encryption 3. Support for recording to network-attached storage (NAS) w. Operating conditions 1. -30 °C to 50 °C (-22 °F to 122 °F) 2. Maximum temperature (intermittent): 60 °C (140 °F) 3. Humidity 10-100% RH (condensing) x. Storage conditions 1. -40 °C to 65°C (-40 °F to 149 °F) y. Approvals 1. EMC a. EN 55032 Class A, EN 55024, IEC 62236-4, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000- 3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 50121-4, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, VCCI Class A, ITE, RCM AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A, KCC KN22 Class A, KN24 2. Safety a. IEC/EN/UL 60950-1, IEC/EN/UL 60950-22 3. Environment

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-21 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. EN 50581, IEC/EN 60529 IP66, IEC/EN 62262 IK10 (IK08 with AXIS Q61–E PTZ Network Cameras), NEMA 250 Type 4X, NEMA TS 2-2016, IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068- 2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60721-4-3 Class 4K3, 4M3 z. Dimensions 1. ø 389 mm (15 5/16 in) 2. Height: 186 mm (7 5/16 in), 193 mm (7 5/8 in) incl AXIS Q6000–E Solo kit, 308 mm (12 1/8 in) incl AXIS Q60–E PTZ Network Camera, 350 mm (13 3/4 in) incl AXIS Q6128–E or Q6155–E PTZ Network Camera, 331 mm (13 1/16 in) incl AXIS Q6114–E or Q6115–E PTZ Network Camera aa. Weight 1. 3.55 kg (7.8 lb) 2. 7.2 kg (16 lb) including an AXIS Q60-E PTZ Network Camera 3. 6.6 kg (14.55 lb) including an AXIS Q61–E PTZ Network Camera 4. 4.2 kg (9.26 lb) including AXIS Q6000–E Solo kit bb. Languages 1. English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese

I. Camera Type 9 – PTZ Dome, Indoor, 32x Zoom, 1080P 1. Approved Products a. Axis Q6055 2. Specifications a. Image sensor 1. 1/2.8” progressive scan CMOS b. Lens 1. 4.44–142.6 mm, F1.6–4.41 2. Horizontal field of view: 62.8°–2.23° 3. Vertical field of view: 36.8°–1.3° 4. Autofocus, auto-iris c. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter d. Minimum illumination 1. Color: 0.3 lux at 30 IRE F1.6 2. B/W: 0.03 lux at 30 IRE F1.6 3. Color: 0.5 lux at 50 IRE F1.6 4. B/W: 0.04 lux at 50 IRE F1.6 e. Shutter time 1. 1/33000 s to 1/3 s with 50 Hz 2. 1/33000 s to 1/4 s with 60 Hz f. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Pan: 360° endless, 0.05° - 450°/s 2. Tilt: 180°, 0.05°-450°/s 3. 32x optical zoom and 12x digital zoom, total 384x zoom 4. E-flip, 256 preset positions, Tour recording, Guard tour, Control queue, On-screen directional indicator, Set new pan 0°, Adjustable zoom speed g. Video compression 1. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-22 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 2. Motion JPEG h. Resolution 1. HDTV 1080p 1920x1080 to 320x180 2. HDTV 720p 1280x720 to 320x180 i. Frame rate 1. Up to 50/60 fps (50/60 Hz) in HDTV 720p 2. Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) in HDTV 1080p j. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Reduced bandwidth and storage needs technology 3. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 4. VBR/MBR H.264 k. Image settings 1. Manual shutter time, compression, color, brightness, sharpness, white balance, exposure control, exposure zones, fine tuning of behavior at low light, rotation: 0°, 180°, text and image overlay, 32 individual 3D privacy masks, image freeze on PTZ, automatic defog, backlight compensation 2. Wide Dynamic Range (WDR): Up to 120 dB depending on scene, highlight compensation l. Audio 1. Audio Support 2. Two-way audio 3. Full duplex audio 4. Audio Detection m. Alarm Inputs - 4 n. Security 1. Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1X network access control, digest authentication, User access log, Centralized Certificate Management, Brute force delay protection o. Supported protocols 1. IPv4, IPv6 USGv6, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL/TLS, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnP, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, SRTP, SFTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP, DHCP, ARP, SOCKS, SSH, NTCIP, LLDP p. Application Programming Interface 1. Open API for software integration 2. ONVIF® Profile S and ONVIF® Profile G, specification at onvif.org q. Analytics 1. Included 2. video motion detection, Autotracking, Active Gatekeeper, fence guard, motion guard 3. Basic Analytics (not to be compared with third-party analytics): object removed, enter/exit detector, fence detector, object counter 4. Highlight compensation 5. Supported 6. Support for installation of third-party applications. r. Event triggers 1. Detectors: live stream accessed, video motion detection, shock detection 2. Object removed, enter/exit detector, fence detector, object counter 3. Hardware: fan, network, temperature, casing open

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-23 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 4. PTZ: autotracking, error, moving, ready, preset reached 5. Storage: disruption, recording 6. System: system ready 7. Time: recurrence, use schedule 8. Input signal: manual trigger, virtual input s. Event actions 1. Day/night mode, overlay text, video recording to edge storage, pre- and post-alarm video buffering, send SNMP trap 2. PTZ: PTZ preset, start/stop guard tour 3. File upload via FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS network share and email 4. Notification via email, HTTP, HTTPS and TCP t. Data streaming 1. Event data u. Built-in installation aids 1. Pixel counter v. Casing 1. IP66-, IP67-, NEMA 4X- and IK10-rated 2. Metal casing (aluminum), polycarbonate (PC) clear dome, sunshield (PC/ASA) w. Sustainability 1. PVC free x. Memory 1. 512 MB RAM, 256 MB Flash y. Power 1. Axis PoE+ midspan 1–port: 100–240 V AC, max 37 W 2. IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4 3. Camera consumption: typical 13 W, max 19 W z. Connectors 1. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE, RJ45 Push-pull Connector (IP66) included aa. Storage 1. Support for SD/SDHC/SDXC card 2. Support for SD card encryption 3. Support for recording to network-attached storage (NAS) bb. Operating conditions 1. With 30 W midspan: -20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F) 2. With 60 W midspan: -50 °C to 50 °C (-58 °F to 122 °F) 3. Maximum temperature (intermittent): 60 °C (140 °F) 4. Arctic Temperature Control: Start-up as low as -40 °C (-40 °F) 5. Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing) cc. Storage conditions 1. -40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F) dd. Approvals 1. EMC 2. EN 55022 Class A, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 55024, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, VCCI Class A, RCM AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A, KCC KN32 Class A, KN35 3. Safety

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-24 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 4. IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 5. IEC/EN/UL 60950-22 6. Environment 7. EN 50121-4, IEC 62236-4, IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, NEMA 250 Type 4X 8. IEC/EN 60529 IP66 9. IEC 60721-4-3, IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 60068-2-60, IEC 60068-2-78, NEMA TS-2-2003 v02.06, Subsection 2.2.7, 2.2.8, 2.2.9; IEC 62262 IK10, ISO 4892-2 10. Network 11. NIST SP500-267 12. Midspan: EN 60950-1, GS, UL, cUL, CE, FCC, VCCI, CB, KCC, UL-AR ee. Weight 1. 3.7 kg (8.2 lb) ff. Dimensions 1. Ø232 x 280 mm (Ø9 1/8 x 11 in)

J. Camera Type 10 – PTZ Dome, Outdoor, 32x Zoom, 1080P 1. Approved Products a. Axis Q6055-E 2. Specifications a. Image sensor 1. 1/2.8” progressive scan CMOS b. Lens 1. 4.44–142.6 mm, F1.6–4.41 2. Horizontal field of view: 62.8°–2.23° 3. Vertical field of view: 36.8°–1.3° 4. Autofocus, auto-iris c. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter d. Minimum illumination 1. Color: 0.3 lux at 30 IRE F1.6 2. B/W: 0.03 lux at 30 IRE F1.6 3. Color: 0.5 lux at 50 IRE F1.6 4. B/W: 0.04 lux at 50 IRE F1.6 e. Shutter time 1. 1/33000 s to 1/3 s with 50 Hz 2. 1/33000 s to 1/4 s with 60 Hz f. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Pan: 360° endless, 0.05° - 450°/s 2. Tilt: 220°, 0.05°-450°/s 3. 32x optical zoom and 12x digital zoom, total 384x zoom 4. E-flip, 256 preset positions, Tour recording, Guard tour, Control queue, On-screen directional indicator, Set new pan 0°, Adjustable zoom speed g. Video compression 1. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles 2. Motion JPEG h. Resolution

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-25 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. HDTV 1080p 1920x1080 to 320x180 2. HDTV 720p 1280x720 to 320x180 i. Frame rate 1. Up to 50/60 fps (50/60 Hz) in HDTV 720p 2. Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) in HDTV 1080p j. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Reduced bandwidth and storage needs technology 3. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 4. VBR/MBR H.264 k. Image settings 1. Manual shutter time, compression, color, brightness, sharpness, white balance, exposure control, exposure zones, fine tuning of behavior at low light, rotation: 0°, 180°, text and image overlay, 32 individual 3D privacy masks, image freeze on PTZ, automatic defog, backlight compensation 2. Wide Dynamic Range (WDR): Up to 120 dB depending on scene, highlight compensation l. Security 1. Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1X network access control, digest authentication, User access log, Centralized Certificate Management, Brute force delay protection m. Supported protocols 1. IPv4, IPv6 USGv6, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL/TLS, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnP, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, SRTP, SFTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP, DHCP, ARP, SOCKS, SSH, NTCIP, LLDP n. Application Programming Interface 1. Open API for software integration 2. ONVIF® Profile S and ONVIF® Profile G, specification at onvif.org o. Analytics 1. Included 2. video motion detection, Autotracking, Active Gatekeeper, fence guard, motion guard 3. Basic Analytics (not to be compared with third-party analytics): object removed, enter/exit detector, fence detector, object counter 4. Highlight compensation 5. Supported 6. Support for installation of third-party applications. p. Event triggers 1. Detectors: live stream accessed, video motion detection, shock detection 2. Object removed, enter/exit detector, fence detector, object counter 3. Hardware: fan, network, temperature, casing open 4. PTZ: autotracking, error, moving, ready, preset reached 5. Storage: disruption, recording 6. System: system ready 7. Time: recurrence, use schedule 8. Input signal: manual trigger, virtual input q. Event actions 1. Day/night mode, overlay text, video recording to edge storage, pre- and post-alarm video buffering, send SNMP trap

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-26 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 2. PTZ: PTZ preset, start/stop guard tour 3. File upload via FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS network share and email 4. Notification via email, HTTP, HTTPS and TCP r. Data streaming 1. Event data s. Built-in installation aids 1. Pixel counter t. Casing 1. IP66-, IP67-, NEMA 4X- and IK10-rated 2. Metal casing (aluminum), polycarbonate (PC) clear dome, sunshield (PC/ASA) u. Sustainability 1. PVC free v. Memory 1. 512 MB RAM, 256 MB Flash w. Power 1. High PoE midspan 1–port: 100–240 V AC, max 74 W 2. Camera consumption: typical 16 W, max 60 W x. Connectors 1. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE, RJ45 Push-pull Connector (IP66) included y. Storage 1. Support for SD/SDHC/SDXC card 2. Support for SD card encryption 3. Support for recording to network-attached storage (NAS) z. Operating conditions 1. With 30 W midspan: -20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F) 2. With 60 W midspan: -50 °C to 50 °C (-58 °F to 122 °F) 3. Maximum temperature (intermittent): 60 °C (140 °F) 4. Arctic Temperature Control: Start-up as low as -40 °C (-40 °F) 5. Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing) aa. Storage conditions 1. -40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F) bb. Approvals 1. EMC 2. EN 55022 Class A, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 55024, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, VCCI Class A, RCM AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A, KCC KN32 Class A, KN35 3. Safety 4. IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 5. IEC/EN/UL 60950-22 6. Environment 7. EN 50121-4, IEC 62236-4, IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, NEMA 250 Type 4X 8. IEC/EN 60529 IP66 9. IEC 60721-4-3, IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 60068-2-60, IEC 60068-2-78, NEMA TS-2-2003 v02.06, Subsection 2.2.7, 2.2.8, 2.2.9; IEC 62262 IK10, ISO 4892-2 10. Network

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-27 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 11. NIST SP500-267 12. Midspan: EN 60950-1, GS, UL, cUL, CE, FCC, VCCI, CB, KCC, UL-AR cc. Weight 1. 3.7 kg (8.2 lb) dd. Dimensions 1. Ø232 x 280 mm (Ø9 1/8 x 11 in)

K. Camera Type 11 – PTZ Dome, Outdoor, 1080P, 30x Zoom, Advanced 1. Approved Products a. Axis Q6155-E 2. Overview a. Laser focus b. Axis Sharpdome technology with Speed Dry c. Lightfinder and WDR – Forensic Capture d. Zipstream e. HDTV 1080p and 30x optical zoom 3. Specifications a. Image sensor 1. 1/2.8” Progressive scan CMOS b. Lens 1. 4.3-129 mm, F1.6-4.7 2. Horizontal field of view: 66.7˚–2.36˚ 3. Vertical field of view: 39.5˚–1.37˚ 4. Laser focus, auto-iris c. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter d. Minimum illumination 1. Color: 0.15 lux at 30 IRE, F1.6 2. B/W: 0.01 lux at 30 IRE, F1.6 3. Color: 0.2 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 4. B/W: 0.02 lux at 50 IRE, F1.6 e. Shutter time 1. 1/60000 s to 2 s f. Pan/Tilt/Zoom 1. Pan: 360° endless, 0.05°–700°/s 2. Tilt: +20 to -90°, 0.05°–500°/s 3. Zoom: 30x optical, 12x digital, total 360x zoom 4. Nadir flip, 256 preset positions, tour recording, guard tour, control queue, on-screen directional indicator, set new pan 0°, adjustable zoom speed, speed dry g. Video compression 1. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles 2. Motion JPEG h. Resolution 1. 1920x1080p (HDTV 1080p) to 320x180 i. Frame rate 1. Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) in 1080p

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-28 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 2. Up to 50/60 fps (50/60 Hz) in 720p j. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth 3. VBR/MBR H.264 k. Image settings 1. Compression, color, brightness, sharpness, white balance, exposure control, exposure zones, rotation, fine tuning of behavior at low light, electronic image stabilization (EIS), manual shutter time, text and image overlay, image freeze on PTZ 2. Contrast, local contrast, automatic backlight compensation, autofocus, WDR - forensic capture: 120 dB 3. 32 individual 3D privacy masks l. Security 1. Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1X network access control, digest authentication, User access log, Centralized Certificate Management, Brute force delay protection m. Supported protocols 1. IPv4, IPv6 USGv6, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL/TLS, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnP, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, SRTP, SFTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP, DHCP, ARP, SOCKS, SSH, NTCIP n. Application Programming Interface 1. Open API for software integration 2. ONVIF® Profiles S and G, specifications at www.onvif.org o. Analytics 1. Included 2. video motion detection, fence guard, motion guard 3. Supported 4. Support for installation of third-party applications. p. Event triggers 1. Detectors: live stream accessed, motion detection, shock detection, day/night mode 2. Hardware: network, temperature, fan 3. Input Signal: manual trigger, virtual inputs 4. PTZ: autotracking, error, moving, preset reached, ready 5. Storage: disruption, recording 6. System: system ready 7. Time: recurrence, use schedule q. Event actions 1. Record video: SD card and network share 2. Pre- and post-alarm video or image buffering for recording or upload 3. Upload of images or video clips: FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share, and email 4. Notification: email, HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, and SNMP trap 5. PTZ: PTZ preset, guard tour, autotracking 6. Overlay text, day/night mode 7. WDR mode r. Data streaming 1. Event data s. Built-in installation aids

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-29 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. Pixel counter t. Casing 1. IK08, IK10 housing and mounting, IP66- and NEMA 4X-rated 2. Repaintable metal casing (aluminum), hard coated Polycarbonate (PC) clear dome with Sharpdome technology u. Sustainability 1. PVC free v. Memory 1. 512 MB RAM, 256 MB Flash w. Power 1. High PoE midspan 1-port: 100–240 V AC, max 74 W 2. Camera consumption: typical 11 W, max 51 W 3. PoE+ midspan 1-port: 100–240 V AC, max 37 W 4. IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4 5. Camera consumption: typical 11 W, max 25 W x. Connectors 1. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 2. RJ45 Push-pull Connector (IP66) y. Storage 1. Support for SD/SDHC/SDXC card 2. Support for SD card encryption 3. Support for recording to network-attached storage (NAS) z. Operating conditions 1. With 30 W midspan: -20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F) 2. With 60 W midspan: -55 °C to 50 °C (-67 °F to 122 °F) 3. Maximum temperature (intermittent): 60 °C (140 °F) 4. Arctic Temperature Control: Start-up as low as -40 °C (-40 °F) 5. Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing) aa. Storage conditions 1. -40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F) bb. Approvals 1. EMC a. EN 55022 Class A, EN 55024, EN 50121-4, IEC 62236-4, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3- 3, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, VCCI Class A, RCM AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A 2. KCC KN32 Class A, KN35 3. Safety a. IEC/EN/UL 62368-1, IEC/EN/UL 60950-22, Laser Safety Regulations IEC/EN 60825-1 Class I Ed. 3 (2014) 4. Environment a. IEC/EN 62262 IK08, IEC/EN 60529 IP66, NEMA 250 Type 4X, IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 60068-2-78, ISO4892-2 b. Midspan: EN 60950-1, GS, UL, cUL, CE, FCC, VCCI, CB, KCC, UL-AR 5. Network a. NIST SP500-267 cc. Dimensions

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-30 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. With mounting hook: 274 x 165 x 165 mm (10 13/16 x 6 1/2 x 6 1/2 in) 2. Without mounting hook: 256 x 165 x 165 mm (10 1/16 x 6 1/2 x 6 1/2 in) dd. Weight 1. 2.9 kg (6.4 lb) ee. Languages 1. English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese

L. Camera Type 12 – Multi Imager Dome, 360 Deg, Outdoor, 4x1080P, Advanced 1. Approved Product a. Axis P3717-PLE 2. Overview a. 8 MP, 360° multidirectional camera, with one IP address b. 360° IR illumination and remote zoom and focus c. Axis Lightfinder and Forensic WDR d. Flexible positioning of four varifocal camera heads e. Axis Zipstream 3. Specifications a. Image sensor 1. 4 x 1/2.8” progressive scan RGB CMOS b. Lens 1. Varifocal, 3–6 mm, F1.8–2.6 2. 4x1080p capture mode: 3. Horizontal field of view: 96°–49° 4. Vertical field of view: 53°–27° 5. Diagonal field of view: 113°–55° 6. Motorized focus, motorized zoom c. Day and night 1. Automatically removable infrared-cut filter d. Minimum illumination 1. Color: 0.17 lux e. Shutter time 1. 1/32500 s to 2 s with 50 Hz 2. 1/32500 s to 2 s with 60 Hz f. Camera angle adjustment 1. Pan ±90°, tilt 5–65°, rotation 5–95°, twist ±20° g. Video compression 1. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles 2. Motion JPEG h. Resolution 1. 4 x 1920x1080 (4 x HDTV 1080p) to 160x90 i. Frame rate 1. Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) j. Video streaming 1. Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG 2. Controllable frame rate and bandwidth

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-31 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 3. VBR/MBR H.264 k. Image settings 1. Saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness, Forensic WDR, white balance, exposure control, exposure zone, fine tuning of behavior at low light, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° including corridor format, dynamic text and image overlay, Polygon privacy mask, compression l. IP address 1. One IP address for all channels m. Security 1. Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1X network access control, digest authentication, user access log, centralized certificate management n. Supported protocols 1. IPv4/v6, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL/TLS, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnP, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, SFTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP, DHCP, ARP, SOCKS, SSH o. Application Programming Interface 1. Open API for software integration 2. ONVIF® Profile S and ONVIF® Profile G, specification at onvif.org p. Analytics 1. Included 2. video motion detection, active tampering alarm 3. Supported 4. perimeter defender, cross line detection, motion guard, fence guard, and loitering guard, store optimization suite, loss prevention suite 5. Support for installation of third-party applications. q. Event triggers 1. Detectors, hardware, input signal, storage, system, time, analytics, edge storage events r. Event actions 1. Day/night vision mode, overlay text, record video, send images, send notification, send SNMP trap, send video clip, status LED 2. File upload: FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share, SFTP and email 3. Notification: email, HTTP, HTTPS, TCP and SNMP trap s. Data streaming 1. Event data t. Built-in installation aids 1. Pixel counter, focus assistant, remote focus, remote zoom u. Casing 1. IP66-, IP67-, NEMA 4X-rated, IK09 impact-resistant, aluminium and plastic casing with polycarbonate hard-coated dome, sunshield (PC/ASA) 2. Color: white NCS S 1002-B v. Mounting 1. Mounting bracket with junction box holes (double gang box, single gang box, 4” octagon junction box and 4” square junction box) 2. ½” (M20) conduit side entry 3. ¾” (M25) conduit adapter included w. Sustainability 1. PVC free x. Memory

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-32 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. 1024 MB RAM, 512 MB Flash y. Power 1. Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4 2. IR illumination on: class 4, typical 11.1 W, max 17.0 W 3. IR illumination off: class 3, typical 8.6 W, max 11.0 W z. Connectors 1. RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE aa. IR illumination 1. Four individually controllable IR with power-efficient, long-life 850 nm IR LEDs 2. Range of reach 15 m (49.2 ft) or more depending on the scene bb. Storage 1. Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card 2. Dual SD cards 3. Support for SD card encryption 4. Support for recording to network-attached storage (NAS) cc. Operating conditions 1. -30 °C to 50 °C (-22 °F to 112 °F) 2. Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing) dd. Storage conditions 1. -40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F) ee. Approvals 1. EMC 2. EN 55032 Class A, EN 50121-4, IEC 62236-4, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 55024, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, VCCI Class A, RCM AS/NZS CISPR 32 Class A, KC KN32 Class A, KC KN35 Safety 3. IEC/EN/UL 62368-1, IEC/EN/UL 60950-22 4. Environment 5. IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068- 2-78, IEC/EN 60529 IP66/67, IEC/EN 62262 IK09, NEMA 250 Type 4X 6. Other 7. IEC 62471 ff. Dimensions 1. Height: 91.5 mm (3.6 in) 2. ø 255 mm (10.04 in) gg. Weight 1. 2.0 kg (4.4 lb) hh. Languages 1. English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish

M. Camera Type 13 – Fixed View Bullet, Thermal, Outdoor, 640x480 1. Approved Products a. Axis Q1942-E 2. Overview a. High resolution thermal imaging b. Superb image contrast, for more details

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-33 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package c. Built-in analytics for high quality detection d. Electronic Image Stabilization e. Axis Zipstream technology 3. Specifications a. Sensors & optics 1. The camera shall use an Uncooled Microbolometer with a FPA Format of 640x480 and 17µm pixel size. 2. The camera shall be available in at least 4 different versions, providing horizontal field of views between 10º and 63º. 3. The camera shall provide a NetD sensitivity of less than 50mK. b. Image Control 1. The camera shall provide at least 8 different palettes used to improve the detection of information in the video. 2. The camera shall allow for rotation of the image in steps of 90º. 3. The camera shall incorporate a function for Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS) for real-time image stabilization. c. Video 1. The camera shall provide simultaneous Motion JPEG and H.264 video streams. 2. The camera shall be designed to provide a native thermal video stream of 640x480 pixels resolution at 8.3 frames per second using H.264 or Motion JPEG and shall provide NetD sensitivity below 50 mK. 3. The camera shall be designed to provide a native thermal video stream of 640x480 pixels resolution at 30 frames per second using H.264 or Motion JPEG and shall provide NetD sensitivity below 50 mK. 4. The camera shall support video resolutions including: a. 640x480 (native resolution) b. 800x600 (scaled) 5. The camera shall provide both landscape format (4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratio) as well as corridor format (3:4 and 9:16 aspect ratio). 6. The camera shall support H.264 Baseline, Main and High Profile. 7. The H.264 implementation shall include both unicast and multicast functionality and support maximum Bit Rate (MBR) as well as Variable Bit Rate (VBR). 8. The camera shall support H.264 with automatic scene adaptive bitrate control. 9. The camera shall for its H.264 implementation support scene adaptive bitrate control with automatic dynamic ROI to reduce bitrate in unprioritized regions in order to lowering bandwidth and storage requirements. d. Audio 1. The camera shall provide two-way full duplex audio 2. Input sources: a. External microphone b. External line device 3. Output sources a. External line device 4. The camera shall support the following encodings: a. AAC LC at 8/16 kHz b. G.711 PCM at 8 kHz c. G.726 ADPCM at 8 kHz e. Mechanics & environmental

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-34 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 1. The camera shall be manufactured with an IP66-, IP67- and NEMA 4X-rated metal casing (aluminum). 2. The camera shall be manufactured with a heated protective window for protection of the lens and to enable deicing. 3. The camera shall operate in a temperature range of -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F). 4. The camera shall operate in a humidity range of 10-100% RH (condensing). f. Connectors 1. The camera shall be equipped with a RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE Ethernet port. 2. The camera shall, by using a “multi wire cable”, provide connectivity for: a. Two digital I/O(alarm) ports. Configurable as input or output b. One line/mic input and one line out. c. AC power d. DC power g. Event functionality 1. The camera shall be equipped with an integrated event functionality, which can be trigged by: a. Video Motion Detection b. Audio Detection c. Live Stream Accessed d. Manual Trigger/Virtual Inputs e. External input f. Embedded third party applications g. Edge storage disruption detection h. Shock Detected 2. The cameras response to a trigged event shall include: 3. Send notification, using HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, SNMP trap or email 4. Send images, using FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share or email a. Send video clip, using FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share or email b. Send SNMP trap message c. Recording to local storage and/or network attached storage d. Activating external output e. Play audio clip f. Text Overlay h. Storage 1. The camera shall be equipped with a video buffer for saving pre- and post-alarm images and shall have a microSD-card slot to support local storage of video. 2. The camera shall support recording to network attached storage. i. Security 1. To secure access to the unit as well as provided content, the unit shall support HTTPS, SSL/TLS and IEEE802.1X authentication. 2. The camera shall provide centralized certificate management, with both pre-installed CA certificates and the ability to upload additional CA certificates. The certificates shall be signed by an organization providing digital trust services. j. Installation and maintenance 1. The camera shall include a customizable pixel counter functionality, identifying the size of objects in number of pixels. 2. The camera shall allow updates of the software (firmware) over the network, using FTP or HTTP.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-35 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 3. The camera shall support time synchronization via NTP server. 4. The camera shall provide a log file, containing information about all users connecting to the unit since last restart. The file shall include information about connecting IP address and the time of connecting. 5. The camera shall be monitored by a Watchdog functionality, which shall automatically re- initiate processes or restart the unit if a malfunction is detected. 6. The camera shall send a notification when the unit has re-booted and all services are initialized. k. Other functionality 1. The camera shall provide text overlay ability, including date and time. 2. The camera shall have the ability to apply a graphical image as an overlay image in the video stream. 3. The camera shall provide the ability to apply privacy masks to the image. 4. The camera shall provide a function for altering the language of the user interface, and shall include support for at least: a. Brazilian Portuguese b. French c. German d. Italian e. Japanese f. Korean g. Russian h. Simplified Chinese i. Traditional Chinese j. Spanish l. Network functionality 1. The camera shall support both static IP addresses and addresses from a DHCP-server. 2. The camera shall support both IPv4 and IPv6. 3. The camera shall incorporate support for Quality of Service (QoS). 4. The camera shall incorporate support for Bonjour. 5. The camera shall support IP address filtering and include at least three different levels of password security. m. Power 1. Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 Class 3 a. Max 11.8 W b. Typical 4.8 W 2. 8 - 28 V DC a. Max 13 W b. Typical 6.6 W 3. 20 - 24 V AC a. Max 19 VA b. Typical 11 VA n. API & applications 1. The unit shall contain a built-in web server making video, audio and configuration available in a standard browser environment using HTTP. 2. The camera shall be fully supported by open and published API (Application Programmers Interface) providing necessary information for integration of functionality into third party applications.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-36 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 3. Cameras shall comply with relevant ONVIF profile as defined by the ONVIF Organization. o. Standards & Regulations 1. The specified unit shall meet product safety standards as defined in IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 2. The specified unit shall meet product safety standards as defined in IEC/EN/UL 60950-22 3. The camera shall meet ISO/IEC 14496-10 Advanced Video Coding (H.264) 4. The specified unit shall carry the following EMC approvals: a. EN 55022 Class A b. EN 55024 c. FCC Part 15 - Subpart A d. VCCI Class A e. RCM AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A f. ICES-003 Class A g. KCC KN32 Class A h. KN35 5. The camera shall meet the following mechanical environmental standards: a. IEC 60529 IP66/IP67 b. NEMA 250 Type 4X c. IEC 60068-2-1 d. IEC 60068-2-2 e. IEC 60068-2-6 Class 4M4 f. IEC 60068-2-27 g. IEC 60068-2-52 h. IEC 60721-3-4 Class 4K3 i. EN 50581 6. The camera shall meet the following standards: a. IEEE 802.3af/802.3at (Power over Ethernet) b. IEEE 802.1X (Authentication) c. IPv4 (RFC 791) d. IPv6 (RFC 2460) e. QoS – DiffServ (RFC 2475) p. Installation, Warranty & Recognitions 1. The specified unit shall be backed by a minimum of three years manufacturer warranty. 2. The manufacturer shall provide the option of extended warranty for the camera. The optional extended warranty shall be available in two-year extension blocks for a total warranty period of maximum five years. 3. The contractor or designated subcontractor shall submit credentials of completed manufacturer certification, verified by a third party organization, as proof of the knowledge. 4. All equipment shall be tested and configured in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacturer prior to installation.

N. Transient Protection – Camera Power Conductors 1. Minimum Requirements a. UL 497B b. Minimum Surge Current Capacity: 2,000 Amps per pair c. Maximum Continuous Current: 5 Amps d. MCOV: 33 Volts e. Service Voltage: 24Volts f. Ten Year Limited Warranty

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-37 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 2. Approved Products a. DTK-1LVLPLV b. Or Approved Equal

O. Encoder 1. Minimum Requirements a. 4 Channel Encoder b. ONVIF support 2. Approved Products a. Axis Q7424 b. Or Approved Equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Material and workmanship shall comply with applicable codes. As a minimum, codes include all State and Federal laws, local ordinances and interpretations of the following by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. State and all local Building Codes. 2. State and Local Fire Codes. 3. National Electrical Code. 4. State and Local Electrical Codes. 5. State Board of Health 6. State Elevator Codes. 7. OSHA regulations.

3.02 PHASING

A. Phasing and Scheduling 1. Complete all work in accordance with the architectural project phasing plans and specifications

3.03 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Schedule all noisy or disruptive work before or after normal business hours unless specifically authorized by the owner.

B. Secure areas requiring escort include detention spaces, law enforcement departmental space, courts and court security space, and others as identified by the owner.

3.04 USE OF LIFTS

A. Provide lifts where required. Use of County owned lifts is not permitted.

B. Where exterior lifts are used, confirm the access route with the building engineer prior to locating the lift.

C. Receive approval of the use of a lift from the building engineer. Protect floors with rugs or mats to prevent floor damage.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-38 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package 3.05 SAFETY

A. Comply will all OSHA requirements

3.06 DEMOLITION

A. Sequencing and Cutover 1. Unless specifically noted otherwise on plans, existing cameras shall remain in service until all new camera installations are complete and operational. 2. Notify the owner and engineer of any existing cameras that must be demolished prior to the installation of new cameras covering the same area. 3. Where an existing camera must be demolished prior to new camera installation, the demolition and installation shall be coordinated to minimize downtime.

B. General 1. Offer demolished equipment to the owner 2. If refused by the owner, dispose of all equipment and materials in a legal manner. 3. Minor patching and painting resulting from device and raceway removal is excluded from this specification section. Notify the engineer by email including a digital photograph and location for any required patching and painting. 4. Contractors are responsible for damage to ceilings and walls not associated with raceway or device removal.

C. Cameras 1. Where indicated on plans, carefully remove existing cameras to minimize damage to ceilings and walls. 2. In locations where a camera has been abandoned, resulting in an open jbox, wall cut out, or ceiling cut out, provide a metallic cover plate over the opening. Provide Stainless steel covers for electrical boxes and rectangular cutouts. Provide metallic ivory powder coated circular cover plates for circular cutouts. 3. Where a cutout remains in an ACT ceiling, notify the owner and request a replacement ceiling tile.

D. Raceways and Backboxes. 1. Where indicated on plans: a. Remove abandoned surface boxes, stubs, and raceways from camera locations to accessible ceilings. b. Where long raceways are abandoned in concealed or unfinished spaces: 1. Label both ends of the raceway with a permanent 2” high visibility yellow label. 2. Print a sequential conduit number on both labels and endpoint location of the raceway. 3. Note the raceway location on the electronic as built drawing. 4. The raceway will then remain in place. c. Coaxial and Camera Power Cable 1. Remove existing coaxial and camera power cable from the camera location to the headend location 2. Contractors shall make every reasonable effort to remove existing cabling. Cabling that cannot be removed due to risk of damage to cabling in shared raceways will require the following: a. Remove as much cable as possible and cut clean at the point where the cable can no longer be removed. b. Place a permanent 2” wide high visibility yellow label at each end. Machine print “Demolish” in large black font.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-39 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package c. Take a digital photograph of the condition and submit to the engineer including the building name and a sequential number for each condition per building. d. Note the location of the condition at both ends of the cable on the electronic as built drawing. e. The engineer will review the condition and if agreed to, removal of the remaining cable will be addressed under separate contract.

E. Removal of Head End Equipment 1. Where indicated on plans a. Demolish all camera power supplies. b. Coordinate the disconnection and demolition of all hardwired 120 VAC camera power supply circuits. 2. Matrix Switcher a. Remove the Matrix Switcher in a Non-Destructive manner b. Return to the owner for service stock 3. Network Video Recorder a. Remove the Network Video Recorder in a non-destructive manner b. Return to the owner for storage of recorded video.

3.07 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Camera Configuration and Pretest 1. Prior to installation, connect the camera to a test PC and POE network switch (Contractor Owned). a. Upgrade the camera firmware to the most recent available firmware approved by the VMSI b. Configure the default password as directed by the VMSI c. Configure the default IP Address as directed by the VMSI d. Test the following applicable functions 1. Motorized or Manual Focus 2. IR Illumination 3. Inspect the image for clarity and color reproduction 4. Inspect the camera door for scratches or other visual deficiencies 5. Inspect the camera housing for scratches, cracks, or other deficiencies. 2. Receive the Network Jack, Patch Panel, and TR room number for each camera from the Division 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling Contractor 3. Provide a permanent label to the camera body denoting the camera plan number. a. Black lettering on clear backing. .250” W 4. Log all resulting configuration information in the VSCC spreadsheet and submit to the VMSI for approval prior to camera installation.

B. Camera Installation 1. Follow instructions in the installation documentation provided by the camera manufacturer. 2. All equipment shall be tested and configured in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacturer prior to installation. 3. Refer to camera details and schedules for mounting and accessory requirements. 4. Notify the engineer by email of any recommended mounting change. Include a digital photograph of the condition. 5. Seal exterior camera raceways and penetrations to prevent water infiltration to the building and camera enclosure. 6. Field of View Walk Through

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-40 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Prior to the installation of any cameras, the contractor shall meet with the owner and review each location and view. Notify the owner a minimum of 5 days in advance of camera installation start date. The owner intend to be actively involved in camera placement and views. In order to minimize adjustments and rework, contractors are required to closely coordinate and demonstrate each camera view during the installation process. Notify the engineer of any changes resulting from coordination with the building owner. b. Locate the camera to best provide the intended field of view. Where placement adjustments are required, locate the camera to provide a larger area of view than shown on plans. Notify the engineer of any issues prior to installation. c. Where a camera requires a change to the specified mount to achieve the desired view, notify the engineer of the requested change along with a digital photograph. Additional mounting accessories will be approved where a change is needed. d. Do not install cameras in any location where the field of view is blocked by signage or any other visual obstruction. It is the contractor’s responsibility to notify the engineer of any locations that should be changed to provide the intended field of view. 7. Once installed, provide a final cleaning of the camera assembly. Ensure that domes or viewing window are free of dirt, dust, and fingerprints. 8. Focus the camera per manufacture instructions. 9. Turn on WDR for any cameras where light differentials may cause silhouetting of the foreground image. Typical locations include: a. Perimeter vestibules and perimeter doors b. Loading dock doors c. Skyways d. Window lined corridors e. Rooms with exterior windows 10. Test Images a. Capture a test image of each camera in full resolution. Name the image filename to match the camera plan number. b. Submit a test image of each camera view to the engineer

C. Raceway and patch cabling from the camera to the data jack 1. Coordinate final camera locations with the Division 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling Contractor. 2. Provide patch cabling from the camera to the camera data jack. 3. Exposed patch cabling from the camera to the data jack is allowed in accessible ceiling spaces. 4. In interior exposed areas and exposed ceiling spaces, provide metallic wiremold or surface conduit from the camera to the data jack or accessible ceiling space. 5. For exterior cameras, provide flexible metallic sealtight conduit from the camera to the transient protection device and data jack or accessible ceiling.

D. Transient protection devices 1. Provide transient protection for all copper conductors connected to exterior cameras. Ground the transient protection device per manufacturer’s instructions to the nearest grounded building steel or service ground. Follow the manufacturer’s installation guidelines for ground wire length and gauge. 2. Refer to device details for transient protection enclosure requirements.

3.08 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Acceptance Testing 1. Schedule an acceptance test with the owner and engineer after all record documentation is submitted for approval.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-41 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Provide on site demonstration of installed equipment b. Demonstrate device locations and cabling terminations 2. A punch list of deficiencies will be generated by the engineer. 3. Make all required corrections and return a signed punch list stating that all repairs are complete

B. Warranty 1. Provide a 1 year parts and labor warranty. The warranty period shall commence with the completion of all punch list items. 2. Material Warrantees – Identify the material warranty period for all devices. 3. Submit all warranty information in a warranty letter to the owner. The warranty letter shall be signed by a company officer.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282100-42 Video Surveillance Cameras Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE – VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The Drawings, the provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and the General Requirements apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Related Sections 1. Division 26 – All Sections 2. Division 27 – All Sections 3. Division 28 – All Sections

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Video Management System Integrator (VMSI) – The contractor performing the scope of work described in this section B. Video Surveillance Camera Contractor (VSCC) – The contractor performing the work described in 28 21 00 Video Surveillance

1.03 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Video Management System 2. Video Recording 3. System programming 4. Software licenses and workstation configuration 5. Network coordination and connection to the Hennepin County Security Wide Area Network

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The scope of work described in this specification section and related work shown on plans shall be provided by the current Hennepin County Vendor for Video System Integration. Contact:

KURT JOHNSON , Account Manager, NICET III DIRECT: 763.732.7404 // CELL: 612.328.2962 24/7 SERVICE: 763.595.4300 WWW .EGANCO .COM EMAIL: [email protected] 11611 Business Park Boulevard North, Champlin, MN 55316

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit per the General Requirements of the project specifications. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit to the engineer all data sheets for components. The parts list and the corresponding data sheets shall be submitted in the same order in a single PDF file. Multiple PDF files will be rejected.

C. Project Coordination Documents 1. Receive a Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet from the VSCC listing the cameras in sequential order as shown on plans.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282300-1 Video Management System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

a. The VSCC spreadsheet shall identify the Telecommunications Room for each camera termination. b. The VSCC spreadsheet shall identify the camera model number, mount, and POE class for each camera c. The VSCC spreadsheet shall identify any auxiliary power supplies or transient detection devices provided per camera. 2. Identify the IP Address and Port Assignment for each camera. 3. Provide the IP addresses for each camera to the VSCC.

D. Project Close Out Documentation 1. Master Spreadsheet a. Receive the existing Hennepin County Master Video System Spreadsheet from Hennepin County Security. b. Format the camera spreadsheet information received from the VSCC and from Hennepin County IT and incorporate in to the Hennepin County Master Video System Spreadsheet. c. Update the spreadsheet to include all fields for all cameras with the exception of x,y,z coordinates. The owner will create coordinates from As-Builts.

2. Submit all as-built drawings in Autocad Format. As-builts shall include: a. Floorplans showing symbols for all devices b. Details plans showing wiring terminations to all devices and control equipment and interfaces to other systems such as fire alarm and elevator controls. c. Riser diagrams showing interconnection of all devices and control locations d. Schedules noting device types and configuration data e. Elevations of equipment racks

3. Operator and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as electronic documents or media. Hardcopy shall only be submitted if electronic versions are not available.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty per the general and supplemental conditions of the contract.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

A. Pelco VMS Software 1. Prior to bidding, contact the engineer to determine software version, Legacy system has been discontinued. 2. Provide all camera and software licenses 3. Provide all database licenses 4. Provide server software license expansion as required

B. Network Video Recorder

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282300-2 Video Management System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

1. Prior to bidding, contact the engineer to review availability of the legacy recording system listed below. Hennepin County is currently reviewing new Video Management Systems and the system for this project will be determined in a review with the VMSI, Engineer, and Hennepin County Security. 2. Minimum Requirements a. Processor Intel® Xeon E3-1275 v3 b. Operating System Windows 7 Ultimate 64-bit c. Internal Memory 16 GB DDR ECC d. User Interface DS Control Point e. System Drive SSD f. Storage Drives 6 x 4 TB, Configure for 20TB RAID 5 plus 1 Hot Spare g. USB Ports 3 USB 2.0 ports (1 front, 2 rear)

3. Reference Legacy Product, Actual to be reviewed prior to bidding a. Pelco DSSRV2-240RD

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Workstation Configuration 1. Configure VMS software on the local workstations per Hennepin County Standards 2. Configure SOC Workstations per Hennepin County Standards B. Camera Configuration 1. Review IP cameras installed by the VSCC prior to connection to the County Network 2. Provide IP addressing requirements and confirm correct IP Address has been set for each camera 3. Confirm that the camera is operable and ready for integration 4. During construction, program the camera parameters including; a. Resolution – See camera schedule on drawings for resolution settings b. Bit Rates – Set all cameras to variable bit rate and set an initial max bit rate of 2Mb\s for 1080P cameras. For higher resolution cameras, consult with the engineer on max bit rates and configure accordingly. c. Encoding – Enable Axis Zipstream, H.264 5. Program the interior cameras to record in time lapse mode at a rate of 10 IPS. 6. Program the interior cameras to detect motion where persons or vehicles would be seen in areas of interest. When motion is detected, program the system to index the motion event for subsequent video motion event search. 7. Coordinate with the owner to receive a list of titles for all cameras and program all camera titles. 8. Passwords – Remove all default passwords and configure cameras\recorders with owner provided passwords. 9. Provide patch cables and coordinate patching to the owner provided network switches. C. Camera optimization 1. The VMSI shall provide camera optimization 30 days after the building is in normal use. 2. Record Duration – review the duration of recording and adjust parameters to achieve a minimum of 30 days. If the record duration exceeds 45 days, selectively increase resolution and\or frame rate on select cameras as directed by the owner. 3. Motion detection – Review the history of the motion detection events per camera and make adjustments to eliminate repetitive false detection including but not limited to: a. Low light conditions and AGC noise. b. Shadows and light penetration through windows c. Flicker from light fixtures, signage, equipment LED’s, or other light sources 4) Moving objects such as flags, fans, or curtains. 4. Submit an electronic report of findings to the Engineer and estimate the impact on storage duration once corrections are made. Verify results after 30 days of operation.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282300-3 Video Management System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

D. Camera Bit Rates 1. Observe bit rates for typical cameras in typical areas: a. Parking areas during peak inrush and also during low light conditions when ramp is empty and lighting is reduced. b. Exterior areas during normal hours and in low light conditions c. General office during normal hours and in low light conditions d. Public lobbies during normal hours and in low light conditions 2. Adjust the maximum bit rate to eliminate excessive bandwidth from poor quality low light images. 3. Adjust the maximum bandwidth to eliminate reduced resolution or frame rate during normal operation. 4. Submit an electronic report of findings to the Engineer and estimate the impact on storage duration once corrections are made. Verify results after 30 days of operation. E. Storage Load Balancing 1. If required, reassign cameras to achieve minimum storage durations for each Network Video Recorder.

3.02 TRAINING

A. The VMSI shall provide a minimum of 2 training sessions. Each session shall last a minimum of 1 hours. B. Training shall include on site and SOC training: 1. Operator Training – Use of the controls 2. Building Engineer Training – Review installation, As-Builts, and Maintenance

3.03 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. The VMSI shall conduct a final acceptance test with the Owner and Engineer after all system testing is complete and as built documentation has been submitted. B. Upon completion of the above items and all requirements identified in the plans and specifications: C. Notify the engineer in writing and request final acceptance D. Conduct an on-site demonstration to the engineer of system performance and compliance with the plans and specifications E. Correct any items noted by the engineer during acceptance and submit a signed punch list of corrections made. F. The VMSI shall conduct the final acceptance test and provide all submittals below. 1. Each camera shall be tested in sequential order and a corresponding test report shall be submitted to the engineer. 2. Test each of the following conditions in this order: a. Titles, numbers, recording parameters are programmed. b. Cameras are properly focused and cleaned. Fields of view are unobstructed and acceptable to the owner. Submit a report with a signature from the owner that all cameras have been reviewed and are approved. c. Cables are properly labeled, routed and secured 3. Submit a summary report from the system documenting the recording parameters for each camera. Confirm and document that all cameras are recording per the specifications.

G. VMS System 1. Submit system reports documenting 2. Storage Capacity 3. Storage Duration 4. IP Configurations

H. The VSCC shall attend the final acceptance test and make repairs as identified by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282300-4 Video Management System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

SECTION 28 26 16 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEMS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

A. The Drawings, the provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and the General Requirements apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 – All Sections 2. Division 27 – All Sections 3. Division 28 – All Sections

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Wireless Duress Alarms and Repeaters 2. Intrusion Alarm system 3. Integration with the Access Control

B. Scope of Work required by others: 1. Cabling a. All cabling shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor 2. Electrical Rough In and Power Requirements a. All electrical rough in and power requirements shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Required Qualifications for the Duress Alarm Contractor 1. Must be the existing Hennepin County Service Vendor for Alarm Systems:

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit per the General Requirements of the project specifications.

B. In addition: 1. Submit shop drawings as a complete PDF package including a data sheet for all components and a parts list indicating the quantity of devices being provided. The PDF shall be a single compiled package. Multiple PDF files will be rejected. 2. Submit all as-built drawings in Autocad Format. As-builts shall include:

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282616-1 Security Alarm System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package a. Floorplans showing symbols for all devices b. Details plans showing wiring terminations to all devices and control equipment and interfaces to other systems such as access control systems. c. Riser diagrams showing interconnection of all devices and control locations d. Schedules noting device types and configuration data 3. Operator and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as electronic documents or media. Hardcopy shall only be submitted if electronic versions are not available. 4. Submit a complete points list from the monitoring service of each device including zone number and description.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, handle, deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage.

B. Provide locked storage units

C. Contractor shall not deliver, store, or install any product in construction areas where the product is subject to damage from water, dust, and construction debris.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty per the general and supplemental conditions of the contract.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

A. Wireless Receiver 1. Minimum Requirements a. Transmits EchoStream formatted messages to the head end application b. Supervises connection between the receiver and application c. Serial integration enables hundreds to thousands of wireless devices d. Product Specifications e. Weight: 4.7 oz (133 g) f. Power requirement: 10 - 14 VDC; 100 mA g. Operating environment: h. Temperature: 32°- 140°F i. Humidity: Up to 90% (non-condensing) j. Market: North America, Australia, New Zealand k. EchoStream® frequency: 902-928 MHz, frequency hopping spread spectrum l. Regulatory compliance: FCC, Industry Canada, RoHSAS/NZS 4268:2008 2. Approved Products a. Inovonics EN4000 with ENKIT SD12 for Bosch interface

B. Wireless Repeater 1. Minimum Requirements a. Radio: Inovonics EchoStream 900MHz

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282616-2 Security Alarm System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package b. Housing Material: ABS c. Closure: Latching with optional screws for high security installs d. Dimensions: 6.5x3.5x1.0” e. Power requirements: 12 - 16.5 VAC or VDC f. Battery capacity: 2450mAH @ 3.7V g. Back-up battery life: Up to 24 hours (varies on repeater usage) h. Operating temperature 32° to 104°F 2. Approved Products a. Inovonics EN5040 (Do not provide transformers, wire to Card Access Aux power supply)

C. Wireless Transmitter 1. Minimum Requirements a. Frequency: 900MHz b. Dimensions: 3.0x1.6x0.72” c. Battery BAT:608 d. Battery life: 3-5 years 2. Approved Manufacturers a. Inovonics EN1235SF

D. Intrusion Panel a. Existing to Remain

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION

3.02 PHASING REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to the architectural phasing plans. Provide all scope of work per the phasing plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain accurate field notations of final duress button locations and submit as part of the As-Built documentation.

B. Coordinate with the owner prior to the installation of any transmitters. The owner shall determine the exact location of each transmitter

C. Program the system per Hennepin County Standard including supervision alarms for low battery and missing transmitters

D. Labeling 1. Label each transmitter with a permanent label indicating zone and transmitter number. 2. Label all receivers and repeaters with the device number shown on the as-built floor plans.

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282616-3 Security Alarm System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package

3.04 TRAINING

A. Provide 1 Training Session of 1 hour duration. 1. Training shall include: a. Operator Training b. Building Engineer Training – Review installation, As-Builts, and Maintenance

3.05 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. System Testing 1. Each duress alarm and motion detector shall be tested in sequential order and a corresponding test report shall be submitted to the engineer. a. Test each of the following for proper operation: 1) Duress Button activation 2) Confirmation of correct notification on Bold Alarm Monitoring Workstations at Hennepin County Security Operations Center b. Test keypad for arming disarming c. Test supervisory interface to access control

B. Conduct a final acceptance test with the Owner and Engineer after all system testing is complete and as built documentation has been submitted. 1. Upon completion of the above items and all requirements identified in the plans and specifications: a. Notify the engineer in writing and request final acceptance b. Conduct an on-site demonstration to the engineer of system performance and compliance with the plans and specifications c. Correct any items noted by the engineer during acceptance and submit a signed punch list of corrections made.

C. Issue a statement of warranty to the Owner and copy the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

17366.3HCP / Hennepin County 282616-4 Security Alarm System Intake/Triage - Fit Up Package